EN - 840D SL - Complete Sinumerik Operate Turning - v26

Operating and Programming
Documentation
Turning
Sinumerik operate
828D/840Dsl
Edition 2011.1
Training Manual
This document was produced for training purposes.

Siemens assumes no responsibility for its contents.
SINUMERIK 828D
840D sl SINUMERIK Operate
Operating and Programming

Manual for Turning machines
Valid for:
Sinumerik 828D Software 4.3

840D sl Sinumerik Operate Software 2.6
Start
B501
Contents
General
technology
basics
B502 B503 B504
Geometry Simple Contour Mathematical
Basics Elements Principles
B505
Zero offset and
Reference
Points
B506
Program
Structure
B510 B507
B509 B508
Mirror - offset - Cutting Edge
Loops, Jumps, Program of
rotate - scale Radius
and Repetitions Subroutines
when milling Correction
B515
Basics
B516 B517 B518 B519 B520

Operating Switching on Basic Operating Area Operating Mode
Elements the Machine Operations MACHINE JOG
B521
Operating Mode
MDA
B525
B526 B524 B523 B522
Operating Area
Operating Area Operating Area Operating Area Operating Mode
Program
Diagnostics Program PARAMETER AUTO
Manager
B527
Operating Area
Start-Up
B605
Basics of B611 B618 B634 B626
Programming Drilling Milling Turning Contour turning
with programGUIDE programGUIDE programGUIDE programGUIDE
programGUIDE
B650
Measure
Turning
programGUIDE
B601
Basics of B658
B625 B617 B610
programming Measure
Turning Milling Drilling
with Milling
ShopTurn ShopTurn ShopTurn
ShopTurn programGUIDE
B633
Contour turning
ShopTurn
B701
Drawings of
programming
Examples
B649
B641 Measure
B657
Measure Milling
B500 End
Straight Circle Turning Cycles
ShopTurn
ShopTurn
B501 General technology basics
1 Brief description
Objective of the module:
Working through this module you become familiar with the most important technological aspects and
machine functions.
Description of the module:
This module explains the general layout of a program, with respect to the technological commands as
per DIN 66025 for turning and milling.
Content:
Layout of a CNC-program
Programming of the technology data
Switching commands
Programmable presettings
Summary
828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate
828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 This document was produced for training purposes.
B501
B501
B501 Page 2 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

B501
General technology basics: Description General
Technology
This module explains the general layout of a pro- Basics:
START
gram, with respect to the technological commands
as per DIN 66025 for turning and milling.
Layout of a
CNC-program
Programming
of the techno-
logy data
Switching
commands
Programmable
presettings
Summary
General
Technology
basics:
END
Notes :
828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 B501

Section 2 Layout of a CNC-program
Notes :
A CNC-program, also known as part program, consists of a logical se-
quence of commands, which are executed step-by-step by the control unit
after the program has been started.
The manufacturers of control units recognize and apply the guidelines as
per DIN 66025.
Each program is compiled and stored under a program name in the con-
trol unit. The name can contain letters as well as numbers.
A block starts with a block number followed by the commands.
Each command consists of command words, which in turn consist of an

address letter (A-Z) and an associated numerical value (both upper or
lower case characters are permissible).
Program layout:
Departure information Switching information

Block Auxil-
Nr.. Misc.
iary Interpolation para-
Coordinate axes Feed Speed Tool func-
com- meter tion
mand
N G X Y Z I J K F S T M
Geometrical data Technological data
The block number is a program-technical assignment, which is not evalu-

ated by the control unit as a command. It is usually programmed to go up
in steps of 10 and serves the user only for a better oversight. It has no
effect on the program execution.
The geometrical data include all instructions that clearly define mathemati-
cally the motion of the tool or the axes.
The technological data are used for instance to activate the required tool
and to pre-select the necessary cutting parameters feed rate and spindle
speed. Miscellaneous functions can control for example such things as di-
rection of rotation and auxiliary appliances.
Programming example:
….
N80 T1; Roughing tool
N90 M6
N100 G54 F0.2 S180 M4
N110 G00 X20 Y0 Z2 D1
N120
….
In order to improve the oversight within a program, comments can be op-

tionally added at the end of a block. These must be preceded by a semi-
colon; Any characters that follow thereafter will not be taken account of by
the control unit.

Programming of the technology data Section 3
Notes :
Before every technological working step in a CNC-Program the respective
tool must be selected by means of the addresses “T” and “D”.
The address “T” is followed by the name of the tool, which may be stated
either with numbers or letters (here only the variant using numbers will be
dealt with).
All applicable tool data (e.g. tool type, length, radius, etc.) are activated in
the program with the address “D”.
Here a complete set of data “D“ is referred to as “Cutting edge”.
Several cutting edge numbers (D1 … D9) may be generated for each tool.
Programming example: Explanation:

N10 T17 ; Drill Block 10, call-up of tool 17,
Commentary to the tool
N20 M6 Tool change,
N30 … D1 The cutting edge D... must be activated
in the block with the first axis movement.
After the call-up of the tool, follows the selection of the optimum cutting
values with the addresses “F” and “S”.
The feed rate vf with the address “F” can be entered either as feed per min
(in mm/min) or as feed per revolution (in mm/rev).
The Cutting speed vc with the address “S” can be entered either as spindle
speed in revolutions per minute (rev/min) or direct as cutting speed in me-
ters per minute (m/min).
Default status of the machines when they are powered up are as follows:
 Milling machines with feed rate “F” in mm/min Code G94
 Turning machines with feed per revolution “F” in mm/rev Code G95
Selection of cutting speed:
 Constant cutting speed “S” in m/min Code G96
(Relative to workpiece Ø)
 Deactivate constant cutting speed “S” Code G97
spindle speed in rev/min (default)
Programming example 1: Explanation:

N10 T20 ; Endmill
N20 M6
N30 G94 F200 S1000 M3 D1 vf = 200 mm/min, n = 1000 min-1
N40 ….

N10 T2; Turning tool, finishing
N20 G96 F0.1 S200 M4 D1 vf = 0,1 mm/rev , vc = 200 m/min
N30 ….

Section 4 Switching commands
Notes :
There are different commands to control the direction of rotation of the
work spindle.
Additional auxiliary functions can for example control cooling circuits,
clamping devices, auxiliary functions and running of the program.
But the presence of these additional functions depends entirely on the
technology and the machine design.
The following list should be only considered as an example of commands:
Instruction Meaning
M00 Programmed Halt
M03 Work spindle ON, clockwise
M04 Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise
M05 Work spindle Halt (however, the program continues)
M06 Tool change
M08 Coolant ON
M09 Coolant OFF
M30 End of program; jump back to the start of the program

N10 T1; Face mill
N20 M6 Tool change
N30 G94 G97 F600 S2500 D1 vf = 600 mm/min, n = 2500 min-1
N40 M3 M8 Spindle ON clockwise, coolant ON
…..
N90 M30 End of program
(Note: Further functions can be found in the annexure of this manual)
Effect of the switching commands M3 and M4
Example Milling Example Turning
M3
M4
M3
Viewing direction
M4

Programmable presettings Section 5
Notes :
When starting a part program the basic settings as defined by the manu-
facturer will be activated. These depend on the individual machine specifi-
cation and apply thereafter for the whole of the program run (modal) unless
they are changed by the operator in the program.
This section describes just a few of the possible selections for turning- and
milling machines that deserve highlighting.
Note: Codes that have already been dealt with are no longer included
Continuous path behaviour:
Exact stop Code G09 block-by-block Code G60 * modal
In order to reach the final position precisely the path velocity is reduced at
the end of the block towards zero. This is useful, for instance, to obtain
relatively sharp edges when machining around contour corners.
However, it must be borne in mind that, if there are too many positioning
sequences, it will result in increased machining time and cannot be ne-
glected.
Continuous control operation Code G64
In this case the tool moves as much as possible with constant velocity
without deceleration at the end of a block. Hence the machining time is
less than under the continuous path status “Exact stop“.
The corners of contours are machined without any relief and therefore the
corners are not so sharply defined.
With this function the control works with a speed control taking into ac-
count several blocks ahead (Look Ahead).
The even speed in this instance results in better cutting conditions and
also a better surface quality.
The following image compares the frequent braking and accelerating se-
quences between the individual blocks in case of G60 and the constant
speed in case of G64.
Feed rate
G64 Continuous path mode
with Look Ahead
Programmed feed rate
G60 Exact stop
Block path
*
Usual preset starting status

Section 5 Programmable presettings
Notes :
The continuous path behaviour “Exact stop“ with the Codes G09 or G60
respectively does not entirely ensure dimension-wise as to how precisely a
corner point between two positioning blocks is attained.
If an exact stop has been activated in a program, the codes described be-
low can be used to specify a very precise braking behaviour at the end of
blocks. By this it is possible to determine as to how precisely the pro-
grammed corner point will be attained.
Change-over when the positioning window “fine” is reached

Code G601
The tool motion changes to the next block when the tool has reached the
fine positioning window.
Sharp contour corners result at the programmed destination points.
Change-over when the positioning window “coarse” is reached

Code G602
This code can be used to obtain a defined rounding of the programmed

contour corners. The block change-over occurs already at the coarse posi-
tioning window.
Block change-over
Destination point of the pro-

G601 grammed path
Actual tool paths depending on the

G60 positioning window
Tool
A dimensional definition of the positioning windows “coarse” and “fine” is

preset by means of machine datum.
Please find out the values preset on your machine by the machine manu-
facturer from his operation manual if you are going to use the described
codes.

Programmable presettings Section 5
Notes :
There is yet another means of influencing the continuous path behaviour
by changing over to the next positioning block depending on the pro-
grammed path velocity of the tool.
Change-over when the setpoint position is reached: Code G603
The block change-over is initiated as soon as the control has calculated

the setpoint speed for all axes to be equal to zero.
Since the physical tool position lags behind the calculated value by a cer-
tain amount, the effect in this case is that the axis changes direction before
the end of the interpolation is reached.
The greater the feed rate, the greater is also the lag of the tool behind the
evaluated value and therefore the rounding radius.
This permits the contour corners to be formed in dependence on the path

velocity.
Destination point of the pro-

grammed path (Interpolation ends)
Actual tool path with smaller feed

rates
Actual tool path with greater feed

Workpiece rates
Hint:
The rounding radius depends on the programmed path velocity as swell as
the drive dynamics of the machine.
The codes G601, G602 and G603 are modal.

They only have an effect in conjunction with active exact stop
with G09 or G60.

Section 6 Summary
Notes :
Address Meaning
T Tool number
D Cutting edge (tool data)
F Feed/Feed rate
S Speed/Cutting speed
Path information/departure commands
Instruction Meaning
G09 Exact stop, operative block-by-block
G60 Exact stop, modal function
G64 Continuous path control
G601 Change-over when positioning window “fine” is reached
G602 Change-over when positioning window “coarse” is reached
G603 Change-over when the interpolation end is reached
G70 Input system in inches

G71 Input system metrical
G94 Linear feed in mm/min *

G95 Feed per revolution in mm **
G96 Constant cutting speed in m/min **

G97 Spindle speed in min-1 *
* Switching-ON status for milling machines

** Switching-ON status for turning machines
Switching information
Instruction Meaning
M00 Programmed halt
M03 Work spindle ON, clockwise

M04 Work spindle ON, anti-clockwise
M05 Work spindle Stop
M06 Tool change
M08 Coolant ON
M09 Coolant OFF
M17 End of subprogram

M18 End of program, jump back to the beginning of program
All instructions (except G09) mentioned above are modal, until they are pro-
grammed to deactivate with different set of instructions.
Furthermore there are instructions that are operative only block-by-block,

e.g. G09. These are automatically reset by the control unit with the succeed-
ing block.

B502 General geometry basics
1 Brief description
Working through this module you learn to understand the programming planes and also how to
specify points in a DIN conforming coordinate system.
This module explains the assignment of the axis and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of
the machine and also teaches the definition of points in relation to the work space.
Content:
Right hand rule
Explanation of the axis assignments
Points and distances in the work space
Programming planes
B502
B502

B502
Geometry basics: Description

General geometry
basics:
This module explains the assignment of the axis START
and plane descriptions to the coordinate system of
the machine and also teaches the definition of
points in relation to the work space.
Right hand
rule
Explanation of
the axis as-
signments
Points and
distances in
the work
space
Programming
planes
General geometry
basics:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Right hand rule
Notes :
Explanation:
According to DIN standard the various axes of motion within work space of
CNC machines are addressed by alphabets. The rules for the assignment
of the axes are determined in this DIN-standard.
The machine coordinate system that is derived from the DIN-standard is

the base for the geometrical description of work pieces which allows us to
clearly determine the points in a plane or in space.
The cartesian (rectangular) spatial coordinate system can be best de-

scribed with the “Right hand rule”. Here the fingers of the right hand rep-
resent the axes: “X” (thumb), “Y” (first finger) and “Z” (middle finger). The
finger tips point in the positive direction.
Vertical turning machine Horizontal milling machine
The position of the machine coordinate system is specified by the machine

manufacturer keeping the following in mind:
Definition of axis according to DIN-standard:
 Z-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the working spindle or coincides with it.

The positive direction points away from the work piece. In case of more
than one spindle, one of them will be declared as the main spindle.
 X-Axis: Is aligned parallel to the set-up plane or coincides with it. If the
Z-axis is vertical, the positive X-axis is directed towards the right. If the
Z-axis is horizontal, the positive X-axis is directed towards the left.
 Y-Axis: Is perpendicular to the X- and Z-axis, in such a way that a spa-
tial cartesian coordinate system results.
The direction “FROM” the work piece “TO” the tool is “PLUS”
The tool movement is “ALWAYS” to be programmed!

Defining of axis within a workspace Section 3
Notes :
Explanation as per DIN 66217 or ISO 841:
However defining only three axes is not enough on modern machine tools.
For instance if the milling head of a milling machine is to be swivelled by a
certain angle or the quill of a tailstock is to be moved, a further definition of
these axes is required.
The DIN standard provides the following variants for such cases.
Here the rotational axes A/B/C

are associated with the X/Y/Z
axes.
Looking in the positive direc-

tion of the linear axis, a clock-
wise rotation equals a positive
rotation of the associated ro-
tary axis.
The axes U/V/W are parallel to

the axes X/Y/Z.
V
The positive direction is that of
the associated main axis.
Y
B

Section 4 Points and distances within the work space
Notes :
Explanation:
For the determination of all points within the work space, the control unit
requires a zero point of the coordinate system. This has been determined
by the machine manufacturer. All other points have either fixed distances
from the machine zero point or else the distance must be defined.
The machine zero point (M) is determined by the

machine manufacturer and cannot be altered. On
milling machines point is usually set on the work
table, and on turning machines on the spindle
flange.
The work piece zero point (W) is the origin of the

work piece coordinate system. This can be specified
by the programmer and should always be chosen in
a way that the least calculation work is required to
determine points on the contour given the dimen-
sioning of the drawing. For turning work it lies mostly
on the turning axis and the right hand planar face.
The reference point (R) is approached for initializ-

ing the path measuring system, which means that at
this point all axes are set to zero. This is necessary
since generally speaking the machine zero point
cannot be approached.
The tool carrier reference point (F) is of prime im-

portance for the adjustment of preset tools. The
lengths “L” (XPF) and offset “O” (ZPF) shown in the
image below are used as tool calculation values for
instance for the tool radius correction and must be
entered into the tool memory of the control unit.
ZMR
Example:
2-axis turning ZMF
machine
XPF
XMR
ZMW
XMF
ZPF

Points and distances within the work space Section 4
Notes :
Example:
3-axis milling
machine
ZPF
ZMR
ZMW
XMR
XMW
YMR
YMW
Distances from the reference point to the machine

XMR = zero point. These are set by the machine manufac-
YMR = turer during commissioning and are transferred to
ZMR = the control unit when the reference point is reached.
These represent distances from the machine zero

XMW = point to the work piece zero point. The work piece
YMW = zero point must be determined by the operator by
ZMW = scratching or probing and entered into the tool cor-
rection memory.
Distances from the tool carrier reference point to the

XPF = tool point on the cutting edge or the front face of the
ZPF = milling cutter.
Distances from the machine zero point to the tool

XMF = carrier reference point. The distance is determined
ZMF = by the machine manufacturer and entered into the
control unit (only relevant on turning machines).

Section 5 Programming planes
Notes :
Continuous path control units can control slides and tool carriers simulta-
neously along 2 or more axes at a programmed feed rate. For this the
speed of the individual drives must be matched to one another. This job is
taken over by the interpolator of the CNC-control unit. This is a software
program for the evaluation of intermediate positions and speed conditions
of the individual axes such that the slides can follow the programmed path.
Starting with a 2 ½-D Continuous path control unit the interpolation can be
switched between the three different planes.
+Z
G18
G19
G17
-Y
+X
A selection of the plane is made with the associated programming

instruction:
 XY-Plane - programming command G17
 XZ-Plane - programming command G18
 YZ-Plane - programming command G19
Note:
The standard plane being used for working with CNC-Turning machines is
G18. With CNC-Milling machines the programming plane G17 is being
used.
The working plane should either be programmed at the beginning of the

NC-program, or before programming an operation in the relevant working
plane.
The active programming plane is modal and remains active until changed
by another programming instruction.

B503 Simple contour elements
1 Brief description
Working through this module you learn to program linear and circular interpolation commands both
with absolute and incremental dimensions.
This module explains the use of absolute, incremental and mixed coordinate points. It also explains
the programming of simple geometrical path conditions.
Content:
Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming
Rapid traverse motion
Straight line interpolation
Circular interpolation
Summary
B503
B503

B503
Simple contour elements: Description

Simple contour
elements:
This module explains the use of absolute, incre- START
mental and mixed coordinate points. It also ex-
plains the programming of simple geometrical path
conditions. Absolute and in-
cremental dimen-
sioning, mixed
programming
Rapid traver-
se
motion
Straight line
interpolation
Circular
interpolation
Summary
Simple contour
elements:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming
Notes :
2. 1 Absolute dimensioning
When writing CNC-programs a fundamental differentiation must be made

between absolute and incremental coordinates.
Which of the two options the programmer chooses depends on the usage
of the program and the dimensioning on the drawing.
Absolute dimensioning, Code G90
All dimensions always refer to the active work piece zero point.
About workpiece zero point refer to Module B555 - “reference point, work-
piece offset”, Section 3.
The absolute coordinates in a departure command describe the position,

to which the tool is to traverse.
Example:
Coordinates for milling:
Workpiece zero point
G90 X Y
P1 20 35
P2 50 60
P3 70 20
Coordinates
An example for turning:
(All X values are diameter
values, DIAMON)
G90 X Z
P1 25 -7.5
P2 40 -15
P3 40 -25
P4 60 -35
Code G90 is usually activated as machine status when switching ON.

It is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to incre-
mental dimensioning with G91.

Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming Section 2
Notes :
2.2 Incremental dimensioning
Code G91
(also known as chain dimensioning).
All position statements refer to the current starting position of the tool.
The programmed value states the coordinate distance, by which the tool is
being traversed.
Example:
Coordinates for milling:
G91 X Y
P1 20 35
P2 30 20
P3 20 -35
Example:
Coordinates for turning:
(All X values are radius
values, DIAMOF)
G91 X Z
P1 12.5 -7.5
P2 7.5 -7.5
P3 0 -10
P4 10 -10
Code G91 is modally active for all axes simultaneously and can be reset to
absolute dimensioning with G90.

Section 2 Absolute and incremental dimensioning, mixed programming
Notes :
2.3 Mixed Programming
As already mentioned, the destination point coordinates can be stated in

the program for all types of interpolation as absolute or incremental values
respectively.
Depending on the presently activated status (G90 or G91), all further coor-
dinate values will refer then also this type of dimensioning.
In practice, however, it is often sensible to mix the two possibilities within a

program block. The control unit provides a comfortable means of instruc-
tion to utilize this additional possibility.
Mixed programming: Codes AC(…) and IC(…)
A dimension value will also be taken as an absolute dimension under G91

if the following syntax is used: AC(numerical value)
If a dimension value is to be taken to be an incremental value under G90, it

must be written as follows: IC(numerical value)
Clarification of mixed programming with an example for milling:
G90 X Y
P1 20 35
P2 IC(30) IC(25)
P3 70 IC(-40)
G91 X Y
P1 AC(20) AC(35)
P2 30 AC(60)
P3 20 -40
A great number of various possibilities are available to the operator in deal-

ing with a mixture of the two types of dimensioning:
Note:
The above example describes only a small selection of mixed coordinate
inputs. A further selection of examples can be found in the description of
interpolation types in this manual.

Rapid traverse motion Section 3
Notes :
Code G00
Rapid traverse is used for the quickest possible repositioning of the tool to
the contour element or, for instance, for moving the tool to the tool chang-
ing position.
The highest possible speed along a straight line that the machine is capa-
ble of attaining is used, however, no machining is possible here. Hence the
control unit does not require a value input under the address “F”.
Repositioning with rapid traverse can be programmed to take place in sev-

eral axes simultaneously.

N10 T1 ; End mill
N20 M6
N30 G00 X200 Y80 Z2 D1 Motion at rapid traverse to the desti-
nation point X200, Y80, Z2 (taking
into account the tool length)
The above programming example repositions the tool from point P1 to the
point P2.
straight line

Section 4 Straight line interpolation
Notes :
4.1 Straight line interpolation
Code G01
The straight line interpolation is used to move the tool with an exactly de-
fined speed along a straight line from the current position to the pro-
grammed destination point.
All axes can be traversed simultaneously, in which case the resulting line
of motion can lie anywhere at an angle within the working space. For this
the control unit requires a specified feed rate which at the latest must be
defined under the address “F” in the block containing the Code G1.
The following example describes the milling of a slot with absolute dimen-
sioning as per the drawing shown below.
Note:
The setup feed rate G94 defines the feed rate in millimetre per minute
(mm/min), in comparison to setup feed rate G95 that defines the feed rate
in millimetre per revolution (mm/rev).

N10 T1 ; End mill Tool call-up T1
N20 M6
N30 G94 F300 S2000 M3 D1 Technology block for the tool T1
with the cutting edge D1,
N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 With rapid traverse to the starting po-
sition P1 on the safety plane (absolute
dimensions),
N50 G01 Z-12 Plunging with feed rate,
N60 X20 Y18 Z-10 Milling the slot in 3 axes (G1 is
modally active),
N70 Z2 F1000 Retraction with increased feed rate
N80 G00 Z200
N90 M30
The following program section shows the milling of the same slot using in-
cremental dimensioning (up to N40 see above):
N50 G91 G1 Z-14 Infeed along Z by –14 mm,

N60 G01 X-20 Y-30 Z2 Incremental traversing of the axes
N70 G90 Z2 F1000 Retraction with absolute dimensions
N80 G00 Z200
N90 M30
Straight line interpolation Section 4
Notes :
4.2 Straight line interpolation with mixed programming
The example shown below describes the milling of the slot with mixed
cordinates input.
Program blocks such as the call-up of the tool etc., which have already
been dealt with, will not be repeated.
Important:
If any address letter “X”, “Y”, “Z” is not followed immediately by a numerical
value, an equal-sign must be written instead.
Syntax: X=IC(…), Y=AC(…), Z...
Programming example under G90: Explanation:

….
N40 G90 G00 X40 Y48 Z2 M8 To starting position absolute
N50 G01 Z=IC(-14) Incremental coordinate Z
N60 X20 Y=IC(-30) Z-10 Incremental coordinate Y
N70 Z2 F1000
….
Programming example under G91: Explanation:
N10 G91 Incremental dimensioning,

….
N40 G00 X=AC(40) Y=AC(48) Z=AC(2) To starting position P1 absolute
N50 G01 Z-14 Incremental coordinate Z
N60 X=AC(20) Y-30 Z2 Absolute coordinate X
N70 Z=AC(2) F1000 Absolute coordinate Z
….

Section 5 Circular interpolation
Notes :
5.1 Circular interpolation
Code G02 (clockwise)

Code G03 (anti-clockwise)
A circular interpolation permits the traversing of the tool with a defined

speed along a circular path from the present start point to the programmed
destination point.
Apart from the destination point coordinates, the control unit also needs
statements about the sense of rotation and the centre of the circle.
The centre is entered with “I”, “J” and “K” with incremental dimensions with
the centre point as origin.
The following assignment applies:

 I for the X-axis
 J for the Y-axis
 K for the Z-axis
Programming example with G02: Explanation:

…..
N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2 With rapid traverse to the start point
N50 G01 Z-5 Grooving with Z
N60 G02 X50 Y40 I10 J-7 Circular interpolation clockwise
N70 G01 Z2 F1000
…..
Start point
End point
Centre point
The following example describes an anti-clockwise circular interpolation as

shown in the sketch above.
Note:
The endpoint in the sketch is now the starting point for the circular interpo-
lation.
Programming example with G03: Explanation:

…..
N40 G00 X50 Y40 Z2 With rapid traverse to the start point
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 G03 X40 Y40 I-10 J-7 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise
N70 G01 Z2 F1000
…..

Circular interpolation Section 5
Notes :
5.2 Circular interpolation with mixed programming
Particularly the incremental statement of the centre of the circle usually

represents some difficulties to the operator in practice, since it must often
be evaluated using triangle calculations.
This is a prime example of where the mixed coordinate programming of the

circle centre point in absolute dimensions comes in useful.

…..
N40 G00 X30 Y40 Z2
N50 G01 Z-5
N60 G02 X50 Y40 I=AC(40) J=AC(33) Circle centre absolute
N70 G01 Z2 F1000
…..
Start point
End point
Centre point

Section 5 Circular interpolation
Notes :
5.3 Circular interpolations before and behind the turning axis
The sketch below shows once again the principle of direction programming
of circular interpolations.
Code G02: Circular arc clockwise

Code G03: Circular arc anti-clockwise
The following sketch shows the circular arc orientation on turning ma-
chines with different tool arrangements due to the machine layout.
Tool arrangement behind the

turning axis
G2
G3
G2
G3
Tool arrangement in front of

the turning axis
Note:
No matter which tool arrangement is applicable to the particular machine,
the program as per DIN ISO always describes the contour of the workpiece
behind the turning axis.

Summary Section 6
Notes :
Path information
Instruction Meaning
G90 Coordinate input with absolute dimensions
G91 Coordinate input with incremental dimensions
G00 Linear motion with rapid traverse
G01 Straight line interpolation with defined speed
G02 Circular interpolation clockwise
G03 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise
All the above departure commands are modal.
Interpolation Meaning
parameter
I Circle centre coordinate in X, incremental from
starting point
J Circle centre coordinate in Y, incremental from
starting point
K Circle centre coordinate in Z, incremental from
starting point
The interpolation parameters are operative block-by-block
Mixed programming for coordinate input
IC(…) Incremental dimension input

AC(…) Absolute dimension input
The statements IC(…) and AC(…) are valid only for the address preceed-
ing them.
Example:
Instruction Meaning
X=IC(10) Traverse by 10 mm in X
Y=AC(20) Traverse to 20 mm in Y

Section End
Notes :

B504 Basic mathematical principles
1 Brief description
Working through this module you learn the mathematical approach necessary for the programming
and for the calculation of missing contour points.
In this module contour points will be calculated using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometrical
functions (sine, cosine and tangent).
Content:
Types of angles
The Pythagorean theorem
Trigonometrical functions
Example calculations
B504
B504

B504
Basic mathematical principles: Description

Basic mathematical
principles:
In this module contour points will be calculated START
using the Pythagorean theorem and trigonometri-
cal functions (sine, cosine and tangent).
Types of
angles
The Pythago-
rean theorem
Trigonometri-
cal functions
Example
calculations
Basic mathematical
principles:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Types of angles
Notes :
2.1 Basic principles of coordinate evaluation
Almost all of the contours encountered during machining can be traced

back to a interface of straight lines and circular arcs.
For part programming the respective endpoint of the contour element must
be known.
In most cases these contour points can be taken directly from the drawing
provided dimensioning is NC-suitable. In some cases, however, the an
evaluation of coordinates may be necessary. For these calculations a ba-
sic knowledge of the types of angles, trigonometrical functions and the Py-
thagorean theorem is required.
2.2 Types of angles
In the case of oblique work piece contours angles with a definite relation-
ship to one another result between the contour sections. Depending on
their relative position a differentiation is made between complementary an-
gles, step angles and side angles.
Complementary angles Step angles

add up to 180° have always the same value
 
If a transition is at right angles to the radius centre point it is always a tan-

gential transition, and there is no corner shown on the technical drawing.
If a corner line is shown, it is not a tangential transition.

The Pythagorean theorem Section 3
Notes :
The right angled triangle has a special meaning in geometry, since the
sides of such a triangle exhibit a definite relationship to one another.
The various sides of the right angled triangle are named specifically:
 The longest line opposite the right angle is called the hypotenuse.
 The two other lines, which form the right angle, are called cathetus.
 The side opposite an angle is called the opposite side.
 The bounding side of the angle is called the adjacent side.
In case of a right angled triangle the missing length of a side can be calcu-
lated if the length of the other two sides is known. For this the Pythagorean
theorem is used.
Pythagorean theorem:
In a right-angled triangle the square of the hypotenuse (the side

opposite the right angle), c, is equal to the sum of the squares
of the other two sides, b and a - that is: a² + b² = c².
c²= a² + b²
5x5=25
c
a 3x3=9
16+9=25
4x4=16
c = a2  b2
b = c 2  a2
c 2  b2
By suitable rearrangement of
the equations the respective a =
sides can be calculated.

Section 4 Trigonometrical functions
Notes :
The trigonometrical ratios describe the relationships between the angles
and the sides in a right angled triangle. With the aid of these trigonometri-
cal functions it is possible to calculate both angles and sides in a right an-
gled triangle. For this one side and an angle or two sides must be known.
The selection of the suitable trigonometrical function, i. e. the sine, cosine
or tangent, depends on which sides and angles are known and which side
or angle is to be found.
1. Adjacent side (AS)
2. Hypotenuse (H)
3. Opposite side (OS)

β
α Angle 2
β Angle
3
α
By the use of the various trigonometrical functions all sides and angles can
be calculated.
Sine function
OS OS
sin α  H OS  sin α * H
H sin 
Cosine function
AS AS
cos  H  AS  cos * H
H cos 
Tangent function
OS OS
tan   AS  OS  tan * AS
AS tan 

Example calculations Section 5
Notes :
5.1 Task
P1 M1 P2 P3 P4 M2
X 25 35 40 30
Z -20 -20
 Evaluate the missing coordinates of the points “P1” to “P4”, as well as

“M1” and “M2”
 Enter the coordinate values in the table.
 The values for the spaces shown with a dark background are dimen-
sions that can be taken directly from the drawing.
Note: All X values are diameter values
See the next page for the solution of this example.

Section 5 Example calculations
Notes :
5.2 Solution for the example calculation
P1 M1 P2 P3 P4 M2
X 25 35 27,929 37,071 40 30
Z -20 -20 -23,536 -28,107 -31,642 -31,642
For the solution method see the following page

Example calculations Section 5
Notes :
5.3 Solution method
Since the two sides are equal, all values can be found using the Pythago-
rean theorem.
xp2  5  5² / 2  3,5355
zp2  xp2  3,5355
zp4  zp2 * (1)   3,5355
xp3  zp4  3,5355
P2x  25  (2 * (5  xp2))  25  (2 * (5  3,5355))  27,929

P2z  P1z  zp2  20  zp2  20  5² / 2  20  3,5355   23,5355
P3x  40  2 * (5  3,5355)  37,071
a  (P3x  p2x) / 2  (37,071  27,929) / 2  4,571
zp3  a  4,571
P3z  P1z  zp 2  zp3  20  3,535  4,571   28,1065
P4z  P3z  zp2  28,1065  3,5355   31,642

Section End
Notes :

B505 Zero points, work offset and reference
point
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to use the various zero points within the working space of a Turning ma-
chine.
This module describes the call-up of individual work piece zero points on the work piece with
reference to various starting conditions.
Content:
Position of the machine zero point
Zero point offset G54
Further zero point offsets
Further zero point offsets
Summary
B505
B505

B505
Zero offsets and reference points: Description

Zero offsets and
reference points:
This module describes the call-up of individual START
work piece zero points on the work piece with ref-
erence to various starting conditions.
Position of the
machine zero
point
Zero point
offset G54
Further zero
point offsets
Further zero
point offsets
Summary
Zero offsets and

reference points:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Position of the machine zero point
Notes :
All axis motions on a CNC-machine tool are referred to the right-hand
Cartesian coordinate system.
Note:
See also module B502 - “Geometry basics”.
The entire path measuring system is initialized by approaching the refer-

ence point with all axes.
At the same time the control unit activates the coordinate system at the
machine zero point.
M Machine zero point
This fixed coordinate point (origin) is determined by the manufacturer and

cannot be altered by the operator.
It serves as a reference point for the machine coordinate system (MCS) of

the machine tool.
X
Axis denominations:
Planar axis X
(Ordinate)
Z
M
Longitudinal axis Z
(Abscissa)
For reasons of design this machine zero point on turning machines is lo-
cated exactly on the rotational axis on the right hand planar face of the
spindle flange (see image above).
Hence this point cannot be reached during machining of the work piece.
However machine zero point cannot be ignored and it is this point which
serves as a reference to all other points in a working plan or work space
inside the machine.
This point can be used for example to approach a certain workpiece inde-
pendent fix points within a workpiece program
(see section 4 in this module).

Zero point offset G54 Section 3
Notes :
For machining the work piece the work piece coordinate system (WCS) is
available on the machine.
This can be freely chosen by the operator depending on the manufacturing

conditions or according to the usual workshop practice.
By this the machine zero point is offset by a defined distance, thus obtain-
ing a work piece zero point that is directly referred to the item to be ma-
chined.
W Workpiece zero point
Zero point offset Code G54 (modally active)
With this code the work piece zero point can be defined on the machine.
The following image shows how by programming G54 the position of the
work piece zero point has been shifted to the right hand planar face of the
turned item.
Finished planar face of the

work piece.
(Work piece coordinates

along the longitudinal axis are
W to be programmed in negative
direction)
The zero point on the machine is set in JOG mode and is activated in the
program with G54.
By this the coordinate origin for the program and the machine zero point
coordinate are now identical.
N10 G18 G54 ... Plane selection, call-up of the

zero point offset G54
N20 G00 X200 Z300 Approach to the tool change point
N30 T1; Roughing tool Call-up of the tool T1

...

Section 4 Further zero point offsets
Notes :
For the efficient production of parts it is often sensible to provide several
work piece zero points.
The control unit manufacturer provides for up to 99 selectable zero point

offsets.
Note:
Depending on the machine parameters this number can be set differently.
Please refer to the machines manual regarding the exact number of avail-
able zero points.
Further zero point offsets Codes G55, G56 and G57
Codes G505 to G599

(all stated codes are
modally active)
The application example indicates the use of yet another zero point located
on the setting plane of the chuck.
In the picture below the work piece zero point has been transferred with
G55 exactly to the setting plane of the chuck jaws.
In the program this must be activated by means of the code G55.
Setting face of the chuck jaws.

The left planar face of the work
piece is already machined.
W (All work piece coordinates of the

longitudinal axis must be pro-
grammed in the positive direction)
The use of several zero point offsets can substantially reduce the setting
times particularly in cases of one-off or small series machining.
For example: You could define just once a specific setting point for each
one of your clamping fixtures or else a specific work piece zero point for
various work pieces.
In the program the respective zero point offset depending on the clamping
fixture or the work piece can then be selected.
If an identical work piece is to be machined at a later time, the respective

zero point is immediately available under the same code.
Important:
Zero point offset instructions or commands are modal commands, that
means once executed they remain active until they are deactivated with
different set of commands.

Tool changing point Section 5
Notes :
The indexing of the tool turret must always take place at a collision-proof
point within the work space of the turning machine.
For this the tool carrier is generally retracted well back into the positive
range of the work space (Please take into account the real traverse ranges
of your machine; the values used in the example are only exemplary!).

N10 G18 G54 ...
N20 G00 X300 Z150 Approach of the tool changing point,
N30 T1; Roughing tool Indexing the turret to position T1
...
On this basis the tool carrier will traverse to various positions depending on
the active tool length (in X and Z) and the position of the work piece zero
point (It is always the tool tip that is being positioned).
Pos. X
Pos. Z
Attention:
In case the next tool is going to be for instance a long boring bar, the tool
carrier must be repositioned along the longitudinal axis further away from
the work piece.
Otherwise there might be a danger of collision during the tool

change!
On the next page a suggestion for the programming of an independent tool

changing point can be found.

Section 5 Tool changing point
Notes :
In order to approach a tool changing point that is independent of the length
of the tool and the presently active zero point offset, the following condi-
tions must be programmed:
Switching OFF of all the active offsets

or manipulations of the coordinate system Command SUPA
(operative block-by-
block)
Deactivation of the tool lengths in X and Z Command D0

(modally active)

N10 G18 G54 ...
N20 G00 X400 Z500 SUPA D0 Approach of tool changing point in the
MCS, without tool data
N30 T1; Roughing tool Indexing the turret to position T1
N40 D1 Call-up of the tool data for T1
…
Pos. X
M W
Pos. Z
Since by using the code SUPA any manipulations of the coordinate system
have been deactivated only for the programmed block, they do not need to
be reactivated.
But care must be taken, because after each tool change the required cut-
ting edge must be called up again.
Note:
The extent of programming for the approach of the tool changing point can
be reduced if for this purpose a subprogram is written (see Section 5 in this
module).

Summary Section 6
Notes :
Suggestion of a subprogram for tool changing:
Subprogram name: SUBR100.SPF
N10 G18 G00 X300 Z500 SUPA G40 D0; Approach of tool changing
point in the turning plane,
zero point offsets OFF,
all tool corrections OFF
N20 RET; Return to the main program,
with out interruption of the
feed motion.
Explanation of the symbols
M Machine zero point
W Work piece zero point
MCS Machine coordinate system
WCS Work piece coordinate system
Instruction Meaning
G54 to G57 Call-up of a selectable zero point offset *
G505 to G599 Call-up of further zero point offsets *

(conditionally available)
D0 Deactivation of the tool dimensions *
D1- D9 Reactivation of the tool dimensions after the tool

change *
SUPA Switching-OFF of programmable, selectable and ex-

ternal offsets **
RET End of subprogram, return jump
* Modally active instruction

** Instruction active block-by-block

Section End
Notes :

B506 Program structure
1 Brief description
Aim of the module:
In this module you learn how to structure a part program clearly and functionally.
This module describes the programming structure of NC-programs.
Content:
Basic principles of programming
Program structure of a part program
Program structure of a machining sequence
Settings at the start of a program
Dimensioning for the X axis
B506
B506

B506
Program structure: Description

Program structure:
This module describes the programming structure START
of NC-programs.
Basic princi-
ples of pro-
gramming
Program
structure of a
part program
Program
structure of a
machining
sequence
Settings at the
start of a pro-
gram
Dimensioning
for the X axis
Program structure:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Basic principles of programming
Notes :
Certain principles should be followed during the creation of part pro-
grams:
 The program must ensure that an unlimited number of work pieces can
be produced with the quality (tolerances, surface quality, form and posi-
tion deviation, etc.) required on the drawing with a minimum of produc-
tion time and the least possible material wastage.
 It is always the motion of the tool along the drawn ideal contour of the
work piece.
 If tolerances are shown, the programming is always referred to the mid-
dle of the tolerance.
Example:  20 + 0,1 - programmed value = 20,05.
Precise dimension corrections can be carried out on the machine by
means of the wear correction feature for the tool.
 The program should exhibit a clear and concise structure and should
contain comments wherever possible to ensure that other users can un-
derstand the layout easily at later stages.

Program structure of a part program Section 3
Notes :
The following flow chart represents a possible suggestion for a suitable
structure of the main program.
Program
header
Tool call-up 1
Technology block
Approaching the safety

level with the tool
Machining sequence 1
Retraction of the tool
no yes
Workpiece finished
Tool call-up 2 End of program
Technology block
Approaching the safety

level with the tool
Machining sequence 2

Section 4 Program structure of a part program
Notes :
The programming of the machining sequence can be achieved by means
of description of the individual steps using departure commands (e.g. G00,
G01, G02, etc.) or by means of machining cycles.
The following representation refers to the flow chart in section 2 of this

manual and describes a possible machining sequence.
Programming with G-Codes Programming using cycles
Activation of radius correc-

tion Input of the individual pa-
rameters using the input
mask and graphical support
Interpolation to the first
destination point
Interpolation to the next

destination point
Interpolation to the last

destination point
Deactivation of the radius

correction
The following criteria should be kept in mind when selecting between the
two described possibilities:
 Availability of the cycles on the respective machine.
 Machining time required with cycles or with G-codes.
 The relation of the number of work pieces to the required programming
extent.

Settings at the start of a program Section 5
Notes :
For the user it may be advantageous to switch on certain settings, that are
to be activated in the part program, already in the program heading.
If necessary, these modally active commands can always be reset by other

commands at any stage during the program.
N10 G17 G54 G64 G71 G90 G94 X/Y-plane, 1st ZP-offset,
continuous control, metrical
system, absolute dimensions,
linear feed rate F in mm/min,
N20….
….
Suggestion of a program heading for a turning application:
N10 G18 G54 G64 G71 G90 G96 Z/X-plane, 1st ZP-offset,
continuous path control, metrical
system, absolute dimensions,
constant cutting speed S in m/min
N20 DIAMON LIMS=3000 Diameter input*, speed limitation

nmax=3000 min-1
N30
….
Note:
As soon the tool reaches the diameter of 0 (e.g. facing), the spindle speed
evaluated internally in the control unit increases steadily until eventually
the maximum possible spindle speed would be attained.
Depending on the clamping conditions and the size of the work piece a
speed limitation should always be selected for reasons of safety.
* The explanation of the diameter input will be found in section 6 of this

manual.

Section 6 Dimensioning for the X-axis
Notes :
The following 3 commands determine the coordinate statements for the
destination points of the address X when programming departure com-
mands:
Diameter programming ON Code DIAMON
Diameter programming OFF Code DIAMOF
Diameter programming for G90,

Radius programming for G91 Code DIAM90
These commands are modally operative.
They remain valid for the program until a block is reached where an oppos-
ing command is programmed or terminated automatically by the end of the
program.
Note:
For turning machines the code “DIAMON” is normally set as default for
switching-ON condition.
Please refer to the machine manual as to which condition has been imple-
mented by the manufacturer in case of your machine.
Representation of the commands for the dimension inputs absolute (G90)

and incremental (G91):
Destination point of the X coordinate

Command
under G90 under G91
DIAMON * Diameter Diameter
DIAMOF** Radius Radius
DIAM90 Diameter Radius
* Switching-ON condition for turning machines

** Switching-ON condition for milling machines
On the following pages the effects of the described codes are shown
graphically.
Only the motion of the X-axis is taken is into account for this.
The rough turning of the shown work piece is not part of this example.

Dimensioning for the X-axis Section 6
Notes :
Effect of the command “DIAMON” under G90:
Programming example : Explanation:
N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAMON; Absolute dimension, diameter progr. ON
N90 G01 X0 Z0; Starting position on diameter 0
N100 X30; Motion to diameter 30
N110 Z-10; Motion in Z
N130….
N120 Motion to the diameter 60
N100 Motion to the diameter 30
N90 Original position of the tool
Effect of the command “DIAMON” under G91:

N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAMON; Absolute dimension, diameter progr. ON
N90 G01 X0 Z0; Original position to diameter 0
N100 G91; Incremental dimension
N110 X30; Motion by diameter 30
N120 Z-10
N130 X30; Motion by diameter 30
N140 G90; Switching back to absolute dimensions
N150 ….
N130 Motion by the diameter 30
N110 Motion by the diameter 30

Section 6 Dimensioning for the X-axis
Notes :
Effect of the command “DIAMOF” under G90:
N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAMOF; Absolute dimensions, diameter progr. OFF
N90 G01 X0 Z0; Original position to the radius 0
N100 X15; Motion to the radius 15
N110 Z-10
N120 X30; Motion to the radius 30
N130 DIAMON; Diameter programming ON
N140 ….
N120 Motion to the radius 30
N100 Motion to the radius 15
N90 Original position des Werkzeuges
Effect of the command “DIAMOF“ under G91:

N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAMOF; Absolute dimensions, diameter progr. OFF
N90 G01 X0 Z0; Original position to the radius 0
N100 G91; Incremental dimension
N110 X15; Motion by radius 15
N120 Z-10
N140 G90 DIAMON; Absolute dimensions, diameter progr. ON
N150….
N120 Motion by radius 15

Dimensioning for the X-axis Section 6
Notes :
Effect of the command “DIAM90” under G90:
N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAM90; Absolute dimensions, diameter progr. for G90
N90 G01 X0 Z0; Original position to diameter 0
N110 Z-10
N130...
N120 Motion to diameter 60
N100 Motion to diameter 30
Effect of the command “DIAM90” under G91:

N70 ….
N80 G90 DIAM90; Absolute dimensions, diameter progr. for G90
N90 G001 X0 Z0; Original position auf Diameter 0
N100 G91; Incremental dimension, DIAM90 radius
programming!!!
N120 Z-10;
N140 G90; Absolute dimensions, DIAM90 diameter
programming!!!
N150 ….

Section End
Notes :

B507 Nose radius correction
1 Brief description
In this module you will become familiar with TNCR (Tool Nose Radius Correction), programming of
chamfers and tangential rounding.
This module explains the programming of the tool nose radius correction as well as the tangential
rounding and chamfering on contour transitions.
Content:
Tool nose radius correction
Chamfering of contour corners
Tangential rounding
Summary
B557
B507

B507
Tool nose radius correction: Description

Tool nose radius
correction:
This module describes the commands for radius START
correction, the rounding and the chamfering of
edges. These commands can be used for writing a
simple CNC-program. A explanations of the com- Tool nose
mands is provided. radius
compensation
Chamfering
Of contour
corners
Tangential
rounding
Summary
Tool nose radius

correction:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Tool nose radius correction
Notes :
Workpiece is programmed as per the dimensions/coordinates described in
the drawing/CAD without taking any tool dimensions into account.
Due to the rounding of the tool nose there will, however, be a certain dis-
tance between the theoretical tool point “P” to the physical cutting edge.
R = Tip radius (tool nose radius)
S = Cutting edge centre point
P = Tool point (theoretical tool point)
A contour error will result on the surface of the work piece if in the program
a tool nose radius correction has not been activated
Programmed contour
Resulting contour
If the tool nose radius correction is activated, the cutting edge centre point
“S” will now be moved along an equidistant path parallel to the contour.
The equidistant path is parallel to the contour at a distance that equals the
cutting edge radius. Hence no contour errors will result.
Resulting contour
Equidistant path calcu-
lated internally by the
control unit

Tool nose radius correction Section 2
Notes :
Tool nose radius correction OFF: Code G40
The tool point “P” is traversed along the programmed contour. (Switching
ON status of the machine)
Contour errors will result if the tool traverses in both axes simultaneously.
(e.g. in the case of cones and circular arcs).
During roughing these errors are ignored as they are negligible compared
to the stock/material clearance. Therefore during roughing the tool nose
radius correction is normally not activated, however this plays an important
role during finishing operation of the workpiece.
Tool nose radius correction to the left of the contour: Code G41
Internally in the control unit an equidistant path is calculated, along which

the cutting edge centre point is being guided, which lies to the left of the
contour when looking in the direction of feed.
Tool nose radius correction to the right of the contour: Code G42
The cutting edge centre point is being guided along an equidistant path
that lies to the right of the contour in the direction of feed.
Note:
G42
Left and right of the contour is
determined when looking at the
tool in the direction of feed.
G41
Important:
The activation and deactivation of the tool nose radius compensation is
always accompanied with motion of the X or Z axis either in feed motion
(G1) or in rapid traverse (G00). The distance of this motion must at least
be equal to the cutting edge radius of the tool “R”.

…..
N40 G42 G00 X0 Z2 G42 is activated with rapid traverse
N50 G01 Z0 Approach of the contour contour,
N60 X50 further contour machining, G01 remains
activated in modal manner
…

Section 3 Chamfering of contour corners
Notes :
For a defined breaking of the edges as a chamfer between linear and cir-
cular contours the control provides a variety of instructions.
It is only necessary to program the points of intersection of the contour

without any chamfers (see illustration below, P1 - P3).
The corners are broken automatically following the block where they have
been programmed.
Chamfer with statement of the leg length Code CHR=
Statement of the length of the chamfer Code CHF=
Finished contour
Programmed contour
P3
P2 P1

…..
N40 G42 G00 X0 Z2
N50 G01 Z0
N60 X50 CHR=10 Straight to P1, length of the
leg of the chamfer = 10 mm
N70 Z-40 CHF=30 Straight to P2, chamfer length = 30 mm
N80 X80 Z-80 Straight to P3,
N90 Z-85
N100 X82 Retraction of the tool
N110 G40 G00 X200 Z300 Deselection of the radius correction, with
rapid traverse to the tool changing point

Chamfering of contour corners Section 4
Notes :
A defined rounding of the contour corners between linear and circular con-
tours in any combination can be carried out very comfortably.
Only the points of intersection of the contour elements have to be pro-

grammed. The control unit automatically adds the required circular arc
contour element.
Finished contour
P3
Programmed contour
P2 P1
Rounding with statement of the rounding radius Code RND=

…..
N40 G42 G00 X0 Z2
N50 G01 Z0
N60 X40 RND=10 Straight to P1, tangential rounding
with radius 10 mm
N70 Z-40 RND=40 Straight to P2, rounding radius = 40 mm
N80 X80 Z-80 Straight to P3
....
If on a work piece there are several edges one after the other on each of
which the same rounding radius is to be machined (e. g. for deburring),
modal rounding may be used.
This instruction must be deactivated afterwards.
Modal rounding ON Code RNDM=
Modal rounding OFF Code RNDM=0
.....
N50 G01 Z0
N60 X40 RNDM=0.5 Straight to P1, Tangential rounding
modal ON with radius 0,5 mm,
N70 Z-10 Straight, rounding with radius 0,5 mm,
N80 X50 Straight, rounding with radius 0,5 mm,
N90 Z-50 Straight, rounding with radius 0,5 mm,
N100 RND=0 modal rounding OFF
…

Section 5 Summary
Notes :
Tool nose radius correction:
Instruction Meaning
G40 Tool nose radius correction OFF (switching ON
status)
G41 Tool nose radius correction to the left of the contour
G42 Tool nose radius correction to the right of the con
tour
These instructions are modally active.
For switching ON and OFF a path (at least the length of the tool nose ra-
dius) must be programmed in the active plane.
Chamfer:
Instruction Meaning
CHR= Chamfer with statement of the leg length
CHF= Statement of the length of the chamfer
These two instructions are block-by-block active.
Rounding:
Instruction Meaning
RND= Rounding with statement of the rounding radius
The instruction is block-by-block active.
RNDM= Modal rounding ON with statement of the radius

(after all subsequent contour elements a rounding
of the corner will be added.)
RNDM=0 Modal rounding OFF
Note:
Independent of the settings of “DIAMON”, “DIAMOF” or “DIAM90“, the con-
tour elements chamfer and rounding are always programmed with their
real size.

B508 Program of subroutines
1 Brief description
Having worked through this module you will be able to create a subprogram with contour description
of a work piece.
This module describes the creation and usage of subprograms on a lathe.
Content:
The use of subprograms
Contour programming of a turning part
Finishing with subprogram call-up
Summary
B508
B508

B508
Program of subroutines: Description

Program of
subroutines:
This module describes the creation and usage of START
subprograms on a lathe.
The use of
subprograms
Contour
programming
of a turning
part
Programming
of subroutines
Summary
Program of
subroutines:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Use of subprograms
Notes :
2.1 What is the need of subprograms
Certain sections of a program that are to be executed repeatedly are just

programmed once in a separate NC program called “subprogram file”.
This subprogram can then be called at any point from the main program.
In the technology turning the use of subprograms is especially of advan-
tage when programming a contour path of a turning part. The contour path
is called up repeatedly with different tools, for various machining opera-
tions like e.g. contour roughing and finishing.
2.2 The principle of the subprogram technique
The name of the subprogram (here “CONTOUR”) acts as an instruction to

jump from the main program to the subprogram.
From now on all the instructions of the subprogram will be executed by the
control unit.
The jump back to the main program, which called up the routine, is initiated
with the instruction “M17”.
Main program
SHAFT.MPF
….
N30 T1; roughing
….
N60 G00 X.. Z… Subprogram
Call-up SUBR1.SPF
N70 SUBR1
N80 G00 X200 Z300 N10 G01 X0 Z0
N90 T2; finishing Jump back N20 G01 X…
…. follows after N30 G03 X… Z… I… K…
N120 G00 G42 X… Z… M17 N40 G01 Z…
N130 SUBR1 N50 G02 X… Z… I...K…
N140 G00 G40 X200 Z300 N60 G01 X...
N150 M30 ….
N150 G01 X…
N160 M17
If the contour is to be used at various locations of the work piece (e.g. for
special grooves), the contour sequence must be programmed with incre-
mental coordinate values.
For the selection of the name of the subprogram the following must be ob-
served:
 The first two characters must be letters.
 The name can consist of a maximum of 31 characters, consisting of let-
ters, numbers or underlines.

Contour programming of a turned item Section 3
Notes :
The contour of the shown turning part “Plug” in this example is to be pro-
grammed as a contour path in a subroutine.
Plug
Guide lines for contour programming of a turned item:
 In the subprogram only the complete geometrical contour sequence of

the work piece will be described, beginning at the selected starting
point.
 Under-cuts, grooves, threads etc. will not be included in the contour;
they will be machined later using cycles for instance.
 The tool call-up, technological instructions (e.g. “F” and “S”), activation
of the tool nose radius correction etc. will be taken care of by the main
program before the contour is called up.
 The last block of the contour description must retract the tool from the
work piece.

Section 3 Contour programming of a turning part
Notes :
Preliminary note:
Since the entire production of the plug is not the subject of this document,
only the contour sequence without any threads and grooves will be dealt
with.
Contours of grooves, under-cuts etc are not integrated into the contour se-
quence of a subprogram; instead they are machined separately using cy-
cles.
The work piece zero point was selected as starting point. The maximum
diameter of the raw material is 80 mm.
Task:
Program now the complete subprogram “SUBR2” according to the drawing

on the previous page.
The following hardcopy from the editor is intended to serve as an aid to

find the correct solution.
N10 G01 X0 Z0 ; Contour starting point

N20 X20 CHR=2.5 ; Chamfer for M20
N30 Z-22
N40 X32 RND=2 ; R2 on diameter 32
N50 Z-32 ; Starting point for R4
N60 G02 X40 Z-36 I4 K0 ; Circular interpolation R4
N70 G01 X43.963 RND=1 ; Medium of the tolerance Ø 40 f7
N80 Z-62
N90 X60.787 Z-80 ; Cone
N100 X66 ; Starting point for chamfer
N110 X72 Z-83 ; Chamfer
N120 X82 ; Retraction above the raw material
N130 M17 ; End of subprogram return to mainprogram
Note:
The chamfering of the work piece on diameter 70 mm with subsequent re-
traction of the tool in block N110 presents here a danger of collision with
the chuck jaws!
For this reason ensure already during the setting up for a collision free
positioning of the of the tool in the Z-axis to at least -85 mm!

Finishing with subprogram call-up Section 4
Notes :
The finishing of contours on the turned item can either be accomplished by
direct call-up of the contour subprogram or with the support of cycles.
The purpose of this document is particularly the variant of a direct call-up.
Note:
For the sake of argument it is assumed that the work piece is already
loaded in the chuck on the finished diameter 70 mm and that the contour
has been roughed out with the usual finishing allowance.
For a subprogram call-up the following layout of the calling main pro-
gram is recommended:
1. Tool call-up followed by the statement of the technology data

2. Positioning at rapid traverse rate to the safety plane above the con-
tour starting point and simultaneously activation of the tool radius
correction
3. Call-up of the subprogram
4. Deactivation of the nose radius correction, possibly on the way to the
tool changing point
The editor printout below lets you follow through the entire program. (The
program section referring to the present task starts at block N70)
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=4000

N20 G00 X200 Z300
N30 T1 ; Roughing tool
N40 G96 S180 F0.25 M4 D1
N50 G00 X82 Z4 M8 ; Starting point for the roughing cycle
N60 CYCLE95("SUBR2",4,0.2,0.3,0,0.25,0.1,,1,0,0,3)
N70 G00 X200 Z300
N80 T2 ; Finishing tool
N90 G96 S220 F0.15 M4 D1
N100 G00 X0 Z2 G42 ; Starting point, nose radius correction ON
N110 SUBR2 ; Call-up of subprogram
N120 G00 X200 Z300 G40 ; Cancel tool nose radius correction
N130 M30

Section 5 Summary
Notes :
With the subprogram technique any repeatable contour elements of the
work piece or special technological machining sequences can be pro-
grammed very effectively.
A subprogram can be called up by any program and can be executed any

number of times.
Subprogram call-up:
The call-up is effected simply by stating the name in the calling program.
Programming example:
….
N110 SUBR2
….
Jump back:
With the instruction “M17” in the subprogram the control unit jumps back to
the next block of the calling program following the call-up.
Note:
 Contour elements that are to be executed at various geometrical loca-
tions on the same work piece must be programmed with incremental
dimensions.
 The subprogram should not contain anything other than the geometrical
contour description. Hence the call-up of tools, rapid traverses, instruc-
tions regarding radius correction etc. must therefore be programed in
the main program.
 Modal instructions maintain their validity also after the jump back to the
main program. For this reason any instructions included merely for the
purpose of the subprogram (e.g. G91) must be cancelled before the
jump back to the main program.

B509 Loops, jumps, repetitions and messages
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to manipulate the regular block-by-block program execution and to use R-
variables. The use of the codes is equally possible for both milling and turning.
This module describes the possibilities of program jumps, repetitions of certain sections of the pro-
gram and the application of variables for calculation.
Content:
Program jumps and skip blocks
Program section repeat
Calculation variables R
Program loops
Programmable messages
B509
B509

B509
Loops, jumps, repetitions and messages: Loops, jumps,

Description Repetitions and
messages:
This module describes the possibilities of program START
jumps, repetitions of certain sections of the pro-
gram and the application of variables for calcula-
tion. Program
jumps and
skip blocks
Program sec-
tion repeat
Calculation
variables R
Program loops
Programmable
messages
Loops, jumps,
Repetitions and
messages:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Program jumps and skip blocks
Notes :
2.1 Program jumps
In practice it is often necessary to interrupt the block-by-block execution of

the program and to jump to another part of the program.
Certain number of blocks should not be executed by the control unit for
instance when testing a program.
Since the control does not recognize the block numbers, the jump destina-
tion must always be identified by markers (labels).
The MARKER may be any chain of characters followed by a colon, how-

ever, the chain of characters must not be identical to any command of the
control unit.
Example: N100 LBL8
If for instance a section of the program is to be left out, the jump instruction
GOTOF can be used.
This instruction searches for the jump destination only in the forward direc-
tion of the program. The program will then be continued from there on in
the normal manner.
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=3000

N20 G00 X200 Z300
Forward jump to the marker
N30 GOTOF LBL8
„LBL8:“
N50 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
The blocks N40 to N90 will be
N60 G00 X82 Z0.2 M8
ignored
N70 G01 X-1.6
N80 Z2
N90 G00 X200 Z300
The program will be continued
N100 LBL8:
as from block N100
N110 T2; Finishing tool
N120 G96 S200 F0.15 M4 D1
N130 G00 G42 X0 Z2 M8
N140 G01 Z0
To initiate a backward jump in the program the instruction GOTOB must be

used.
Caution!
The backward jump will result in an endless loop if the number of runs is
not limited (see section 4).
Note:
Markers will be ignored by the control unit if there is no jump command to
the marker. The execution of the program will not be affected under any
circumstances by a marker without a jump instruction.

Program jumps and skip blocks Section 2
Notes :
2.2 Deletion blocks
There is another way of optionally including or excluding certain parts of

the program by excluding explicitly marked blocks.
The program blocks intended for optional exclusion are marked simply by
a preceding / (slash).
Example: /N200 CYCLE96(24,-30,“A“,3)
Simply by activating the option "SKP Skip block" (after pressing the VSK 4
"Prog. Cntrl." (Program control) in the automatic mode) all blocks marked
with a "/" will be ignored by the control unit.
If this option is deactivated, the marked blocks will be executed in the

same manner as all others.
SKP is activated; in the program SKP is deactivated; the control

mode the blocks with a preceding also executes the blocks with a
slash will be ignored. preceding slash.
On the next page is a possible example for the usage of this kind of pro-
gram manipulation shown.

Section 2 Program jumps and skip blocks
Notes :
The following example is used to illustrate the usage of optional blocks:
Studs with a thread size M24 are to be produced, some of which have a
thread relief as per DIN 76-A. You will now create a single program and
manipulate the machining using the optional “skip block” technique.
Stud with thread relief
The function “Skip block” is de-

activated; optional blocks will be
executed.
Block N200 will be executed.
Program section without roughing

N140 G96 S200 F0.15 M4 D1
N150 G00 G42 X14 Z2.5 M8
N160 G01 X24 Z-2.5 ; Finishing
N170 Z-30
N180 X32
N190 G00 G40 Z2
/N200 CYCLE96(24,-30,"A",3) ; Optional block thread relief
N210 G00 X200 Z300
N220 T4 ; Thread cutting tool
N230 G97 S1500 M3 M8 D1
N240 CYCLE97(3,24,0,-27,24,24,10,2,1.84,0.03,30,0,6,3,3,1,2)
N250 G00 X200 Z300
N260 M30
Stud without a thread relief
The function “Skip block” is acti-

vated; optional blocks will not be
executed.
Block N200 is not executed.

Repetitions of parts of the program Section 3
Notes :
If a certain number of NC-blocks is to be repeated at another part of the
program, the instruction REPEAT is available.
The instruction requires a start marker as a jump destination. An end

marker can possibly be included for a better overview.
The end marker is only really necessary if the repeat instruction is not di-
rectly in the succeeding block of the part of the program to be repeated
(see Section 4).
Example without end marker (single repeat):

N40 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N50 G00 X82 Z0 M8
N60 G01 X-1.6
N70 Z3
N80 G00 X80; blank dimension
N90 LBL10: Single repetition of
N100 G00 G42 X=IC(-4) Z1 the program section
Jump to start N110 G01 Z-20
label N120 X=IC(6)
N130 G00 G40 Z4
N140 G01 X=IC(-6) Program continua-
N150 REPEAT LBL10 tion after the repeti-
N160 G00 X200 Z300 tion
After the blocks N90 to N140 have been repeated the program will be con-
tinued with block N160.
Note:
The program section (N90 to N140) is already executed once during the
normal run of the program. With the “REPEAT”-instruction this will be car-
ried out a second time.
If a program section is to be repeated several times, the number of repeti-

tions must be stated with the address “P” (see page 7).

Section 3 Repetitions of parts of the program
Notes :
Example with end label and multiple repeat:
N80 G00 X80; blank dimension

N90 LBL12:
N100 G00 G42 X=IC(-4) Z1
N110 G01 Z-20 Repetition
N120 X=IC(6)
N130 G00 G40 Z4 4 times
N140 G01 X=IC(-6)
N150 EBE12:
N160 G00 X200 Z300
N170 T7; Roughing tool 2
N180 G96 S180 F0.25 M4 D1
N190 G00 G42 X74 Z4 M8
N200 REPEAT LBL12 EBE12 P4
N210 G00 X200 Z300
With the instruction “REPEAT LBL12 EBE12 P4” the program blocks N90
to N150 are repeated a total of 4 times. After that the program will be con-
tinued with block N210.
Note:
Make sure at all times that the markers are written correctly. The control
unit treats these labels as a character chain, an incorrect input can lead to
considerable interruptions in the program.

Calculation variables R Section 4
Notes :
Calculation variables provide a large number of means for flexible pro-
gramming of the numerical values of instructions.
In the program no actual values are assigned to the addresses, instead

variable numbers are assigned to which the respective values have been
assigned previously.
Exception: The addresses “N”, “G” and “L” can be programmed with an
“R variable”.
Normally the variables “R0” to “R99” are available.

Control specifically the this number can also be set to a greater number.
The “R variables” can be assigned with values in the range of 8 places and
a decimal point as well as a sign.
Example: ± 0.000 0001 to ± 9999 9999
The value assignment to the variables can be achieved manually in the

variable list, automatically in the program or by programmed calculation
operations.
In the following editor extracts the two variants of programming the ad-
dress values can be compared.
Addresses directly with values: Indirect address values by means

of “R variables”:
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=3000 N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=3000
N20 G00 X200 Z300 N20 G00 X=R1 Z=R2
N30 T1; Roughing tool N30 T1; Roughing tool
N40 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1 N40 G96 S=R10 F=R11 M4 D1
N50 G00 X82 Z0 M8 N50 G00 X=R3+2 Z=R0 M8
N60 G01 X-1.6 N60 G01 X-1.6
N70 Z3 N70 Z3
N80 G00 X80; Raw dimension N80 G00 X=R3; Raw dimension
N90 LBL12: N90 LBL12:
N100 G00 G42 X=IC(-4) Z1 N100 G00 G42 X=IC(R4) Z1
N110 G01 Z-20 N110 G01 Z=R5
N120 X=IC(6) N120 X=IC(R6)
N130 G00 G40 Z4 N130 G00 G40 Z4
N140 G01 X=IC(-6) N140 G01 X=IC(-R6)
N150 EBE12: N150 EBE12:
N160 G00 X200 Z300 N160 G00 X=R1 Z=R2
Note:
The respective numerical values that have been assigned to the variables
“R0” to “R11” will be found in the variable list on the following page.

Section 4 Calculation variables R
Notes :
Value assignment manually: (via variable list)
The “R-variables”-window can be accessed via:
1. Press the button “MENU SELECT” on the

operator panel (OP).
2. The yellow horizontal and vertical softkey-bar
appears.
3. Press the yellow HSK 2 “Parameter”.
4. Press the HSK 6 “User variable”
5. If not selected before press the VSK 1

“R variables“.
6. The “R variables”-window opens up (like dis-

played below).
7. Assign a “R variable“-value.
Note:
The values of the variables must have been assigned before they are
called in the program.
Value assignment in the program block:
In an NC-block several assignments can be made, however, not in blocks
with other instructions.
N1; *** Value assignment to the R-Variable ***
N2 R0=0 R1=200 R2=300
N3 R3=80 R4=-4 R5=-20 R6=6
N4 R10=160 R11=0.2
N5; *** End of value assignment ***

Calculation variables R Section 4
Notes :
Value assignment by means of calculation operations:
The use of calculation variables and their linkage in mathematical functions

provides many means in programming.
Since the control evaluates a certain number of blocks in advance, errors

can occur when mathematical operations are carried out.
For this reason program the code “STOPRE” before the calculation of vari-
ables as shown in block N120. This command stops the advance evalua-
tion until all stored blocks have been completed.
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=3500

N20
N30 R1=20 R2=50 ; Value assignment
N40
N50 STOPRE ; Advance evaluation stop
N60
N70 ; Calculation instruction
N80 R10=R1+R2 ; R10 derives from R1+R2 (value 70)
N90 R11=SIN(45) ; R11 results in the sin of 45° (value 0.707)
N100 R12=R1+2 ; R12 results in 22
N110 R13=R1 ; R13 takes over the value of R1
N120 R13=R13/10 ; The new R13 derives from the old
N130 ; R13 divided by 10 (value 2)
Note:
The editor extract shown here demonstrates only a small selection of the
possible calculation operations.
Refer to the manual of your control unit regarding the available functions.
In order to maintain a clear overview it is sensible to describe a variable
only once.
For the use of the calculation functions the usual mathematical rules apply.
Values in parenthesis take priority in calculation.
Without a parenthesis, multiplication/division is always carried out before
the addition/subtraction.

Section 5 Program loops and block skip
Notes :
Contrary to the “REPEAT” command “GOTOB/GOTOF“ provides the pro-
grammer with greater flexibility.
The commands GOTOB/GOTOF can be used along with conditional state-
ments for evaluation of program loops.
If a condition is satisfied, a certain sections of the program will be re-
peated.
In this case the number of loop executions is counted and evaluated with
the instruction “IF”.
The following comparison operators can be evaluated with “IF”:
== equal <> not equal

< larger than > smaller than
<= larger or equal >= smaller or equal

N40 R20=0 ; Counter = 0
N50 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N60 G00 X82 Z0 M8
N70 G01 X-1.6
N80 Z3
N90 G00 X80 ; Blank dimension
N100 LBL14:
N110 STOPRE ; Advance evaluation stop
N120 R20=R20+1 ; Counter is increased by 1
N130 G00 G42 X=IC(-4) Z1
N140 G01 Z-20
N150 X=IC(6)
N160 G00 G40 Z4
N170 G01 X=IC(-6)
N180 IF R20==4 GOTOF LBL16 ; Comparison of the counters
N190 GOTOB LBL14 ; Jump back to the marker LBL14
N200 LBL16:
N210 G00 X200 Z300
Example:
Explanation of the situation directly after the program start:
N40 Counter for number of repeats set to 0

N100 First run without jump instruction
N120 Counter increases to 1
N130 to N170 technological motion sequence
N180 Comparison operation: Counter is not = 4, hence carry on to
block N190
N190 Jump back to block N100, the second run starts
Situation in the fourth run:
N120 Counter receives the value 4

N180 The counter comparison is positive, hence jump to marker LBL16:
N200 Marker LBL16:
N210 Regular continuation of program

Programmable messages Section 6
Notes :
Certain information that appears on the display while programs are being
executed could be of special interest to the operator of the machine.
With the code MSG(“character chain“) a message can be programmed

such that it will appear on the screen while the program progresses.
Example:
The message programmed in block N30 will be displayed as shown below
(Monitor extract).
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=3000

N20 G00 X200 Z300
N30 MSG("Caution, jump to finishing operation!")
N40 GOTOF LBL18
N60 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N70 G00 X82 Z0.2 M8
N80 G01 X-1.6
N90 Z2
N100 G00 X200 Z300
N110 LBL18:
N130 G96 S200 F0.15 M4 D1
N140 G00 G42 X0 Z2 M8
N150 G01 Z0
N160 X78 CHR=1
N170 Z-20
N180 X82
N190 G00 G40 X200 Z300
N200 M30
The display will remain until a newly programmed message replaces it or

the existing one is cancelled.
The message can be cleared using the code “MSG(““)” or by means of the
end of program M30.

Notes :

B510 Mirror, offset, rotate, scale for turning
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to offset the active work piece zero point in the program, scale the coordi-
nate system and insert dwell times into the program sequence.
This module describes the programmable manipulation of the coordinate system and the usage of
dwells.
Content:
General information about offsets
Offset of the coordinate system
Scaling of the coordinate system
Dwell time
Summary
B510
B510

B510
Mirror, offset, rotate, scale: Description

Mirror, offset, rotate,
scale:
This module describes the programmable manipu- START
lation of the coordinate system and the usage of
dwells.
General
information
about offsets
Offset of the
coordinate
system
Scaling of the
coordinate
system
Dwell time
Summary
Mirror, offset, rotate,

scale:
END
Notes :

Section 2 General information regarding offsets
Notes :
The term “Frame” refers to a calculation rule that permits the coordinate
system on the machine to be manipulated.
By means of a programmed instruction the user can, for instance, offset or

scale the specified coordinate system.
Example: N150 TRANS Z-10 Absolute offset

…
N200 ATRANS Z-5 Incremental offset
…
N240 ASCALE X0.5 Scaling of the X-axis
Incremental Scaling factor for the axis

A = Additive
For the programming of frames the following guidelines apply:

 Programmed frames refer always to the last work piece zero point acti-
vated in the program, e.g. G54.
 The instruction must be included in a single block.
 They will be executed in the sequence in which they appear in the pro-
gram.
 Instructions that are not preceded by an “A” (e.g. TRANS Z-10) are re-
placing Frames, i.e. they clear all other Frame-instructions used previ-
ously in the program.
 The preceding “A“ specifies the additive instructions. They enhance all
active Frame-instructions used so far in the program, in other words,
they do not cancel any frame instructions (e.g. ATRANS Z-5).
 All frame-instructions are modally active.
 To reset active Frames (that is a return to the original work piece zero
point) simply program a replacing Frame (e.g. TRANS ), or “M30” or
manually with “RESET”.

Offset of the coordinate system Section 3
Notes :
To permit recurring machining operations to be carried out at various work
piece locations, a zero point offset can be programmed in all the available
axes.
Z
e.g. G54
Zero point offset absolute, as

referred to the presently valid
work piece zero point Code TRANS [X...] Z…

N10 G18 G54 Turning plane G18 and Zero point G54 active
...
N80 TRANS Z-10 Zero point shifted (offset) to Z-10
N90 G00 X0 Z2 Rapid traverse motion to the now valid
... coordinate point X0 and Z2
Zero point offset additive,

referred to the presently valid
work piece zero point or to possibly
previously activated Frames Code ATRANS X... Z…

N10 G18 G54
...
N80 TRANS Z-10
N90 G00 X0 Z2
…
N200 ATRANS Z-5 The point already offset in block N80 is now
offset by a further -5 mm in Z
N210 G00 X0 Z2 Rapid traverse motion to the now valid
coordinate point X0 and Z2,
N250 TRANS Cancel all frames, G54 is again active
N260 G00 X200 Z300
...

Section 3 Offset of the coordinate system
Notes :
The manufacture of washers from a bar is taken as a programming exam-
ple. In order to reduce the clamping times, three washers are to be ma-
chined in one setting after which the bar is to be pushed forward and the
program repeated.
The protruding part has a blank diameter of 40 mm. The clamping over-
hang length is to be at least 45 mm. The width of the parting tool is 3 mm.
Washer 1
The following technology is being employed:
1. Facing to Z0.1.
2. Finish turning of the planar face and the di-
ameter 38 with R1,5.
3. Drilling the diameter 16 using a core drill.
4. Parting-off the washer.
5. Additive offset of the zero point in Z by -8 mm.
6. Repeat of the whole procedure 2 times.
7. Resetting the offset and end of program.
8. Feeding of the bar to an overhang of 45 mm
and renewed program start.
The following editor

extract shows the
lower part of the program.
N160 T10 ; Core drill Dm. 16
N170 G97 S2500 F0.15 M4 D1
N180 G00 X0 Z3 M8
N190 G01 Z-7
N200 G00 Z3
N210 G00 X200 Z300
N220 T3 ; Parting tool 3.1 wide
N230 G96 S140 F0.1 M4 D2 ; Right hand cutting edge activated
N240 G00 X40 Z-4
N250 G01 X14
N260 G00 X40
N270 ATRANS Z-8 ; Offset additive
N280 REPEAT LBL14 P2 ; Repeat
N290 TRANS ; Cancel the frame
N300 G00 X200 Z300
N310 M30
The offset in block N270 must be additive, since it always refers to itself
due to the repeating of the loop.
Note:
In the summary of this section the whole of the program is shown.

Scaling of the coordinate system Section 4
Notes :
In certain cases it may be important to alter the scale of the coordinate
system.
With this feature geometrically similar shapes of work piece can be pro-
grammed in various sizes, e. g. groups of parts or for mould construction
with different contraction allowances.
Scaling of the coordinate system

absolute, as referred to the active
work piece zero point Code SCALE X… Z…
Here the values of “X” and “Z” are factors by which the coordinate system
is to enlarge or diminish.
If the scaling factors are entered differently for each axis a distorted co-
ordinate system will result.
Note:
Please note that the turning of tolerance dimensions after the scaling can
create difficulties since the tool wear correction values are not any longer
operative 1:1.

N10 G18 G54 Turning plane G18 and zero point G54
activated,
N20 G00 X200 Z300
...
N40 SCALE X0.5 Z0.5 The scale is halved for both axes,
N50 G00 X44 Z0 Rapid traverse motion to contour point X44
Z0, ...
Caution!
Physically the tool moves to X22!!!
Scaling of the coordinate system additive,

as referred to the active work piece zero point,
or to the currently valid coordinate system
selected with Frames Code ASCALE X… Z…

N10 G18 G54
N20 G00 X200 Z300
N30 TRANS Z-10 Zero point offset to Z-10
...
N40 ASCALE X0.5 Z0.5 The scale halving in both axes from N30
remains operative

Section 4 Scaling of the coordinate system
Notes :
For the explanation of the scaling instruction the machining of similar
washers as in section 2 is being used.
These are smaller in both axes. The evaluated scaling factors are 0,737 in
diameter and 0,75 for the Z-axis.
Generally valid formula: Scaling factor = Dimension after scaling,

divided by dimension before scaling
28 / 38 = 0,737
Note:
The blank material is a protruding part with a diameter of 30 mm.
The overhang is to be at least 40 mm. Again the parting tool of width 3 mm
is used.
Washer 2
The technology remains the same as for washer 1,

only the scaling is added to the program.
In the editor extract the scaling takes place already before the tool change.
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=4000

N20 SCALE X0.737 Z0.737 ; Scaling
N30 LBL14:
N40 G00 X300 Z400
N60 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N70 G00 X44 Z0.2 M8
N80 G01 X-1.6
N90 Z3
N100 G00 G42 X14 Z2
N110 G01 Z0
N120 X38 RND=1.5
N130 Z-8
N140 X42
N150 G00 G40 X200 Z300
N160 T10 ; Core drill Ø16
Note:
Care must be taken that the tool carrier now no longer traverses to the
same physical point as in the unscaled coordinate system, since the scal-
ing acts in all directions.
The complete program extract is shown in the summary.

Offset of the coordinate system Section 5
Notes :
If, for example, the chips are to be broken or the tools are to be relieved, a
dwell period can be inserted between the blocks.
Dwell time in seconds Code G4 F…

(“F” is the dwell time conjunction with G04)
Dwell time in revolutions Code G4 S…

(“S” is the number of spindle revolutions in
conjunction with G04 )
To demonstrate the programming of dwell times the already familiar pro-

gram “WASHER2.MPF” has been extended.
The switch from block N250 to block N270 takes place only after a waiting
period of 0,5 sec; the chip breaks.
N210 G00 X200 Z300

N220 T3 ; Parting tool 3mm wide
N240 G00 X40 Z-4
N250 G01 X30
N260 G04 F0.5 ; Dwell time 0,5 sec
N270 G01 X22
N280 G04 S5 ; Dwell time 5 revolutions
N250 G01 X14
N260 G00 X40
In case of relatively small diameters this time is sufficient for chip breaking.
This becomes evident if the high number of revolutions is compared to the
time of dwell.
In the case of large diameters a time-independent switching of blocks may

be more advantageous.
If the tool remains stationary at the destination point for a certain number
of revolutions the tool relief can be ascertained.
Note:
The previously programmed values of the addresses “F” for feed and “S”
for speed or constant cutting speed remain activated in any case.
The complete program is shown in the summary.

Section 6 Summary
Notes :
Program for the washer 1
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=4000

N20 ;.Without scaling
N30 LBL14:
N40 G00 X200 Z300
N60 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N70 G00 X42 Z0.1 M8
N80 G01 X-1.6
N90 Z3
N100 G00 G42 X14 Z2
N110 G01 Z0
N120 X38 RND=1.5
N130 Z-8
N140 X42
N150 G00 G40 X200 Z300
N160 T10 ; Core drill Ø16mm
N170 G97 S2500 F0.15 M4 D1
N180 G00 X0 Z3 M8
N190 G01 Z-7
N200 G00 Z3
N210 G00 X200 Z300
N240 G00 X40 Z-4
N250 G01 X14
N260 G00 X40
N270 ATRANS Z-8 ; Additive offset
N290 TRANS ; Cancel all Frames
N300 G00 X200 Z300
N310 M30

Summary Section 6
Notes :
Program for the washer 2
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=4000

N30 LBL14:
N40 G00 X300 Z400
N60 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N70 G00 X44 Z0.2 M8
N80 G01 X-1.6
N90 Z3
N100 G00 G42 X14 Z2
N110 G01 Z0
N120 X38 RND=1.5
N130 Z-8
N140 X42
N150 G00 G40 X200 Z300
N170 G97 S2500 F0.15 M4 D1
N180 G00 X0 Z3 M8
N190 G01 Z-7
N200 G00 Z3
N210 G00 X200 Z300
N240 G00 X40 Z-4
N250 G01 X14
N260 G00 X40
N300 G00 X200 Z300
N310 M30

Section 6 Summary
Notes :
Program for the washer 2 with dwell time
N10 G18 G54 G64 LIMS=4000

N30 LBL14:
N40 G00 X300 Z400
N60 G96 S160 F0.2 M4 D1
N70 G00 X44 Z0.2 M8
N80 G01 X-1.6
N90 Z3
N100 G00 G42 X14 Z2
N110 G01 Z0
N120 X38 RND=1.5
N130 Z-8
N140 X42
N150 G00 G40 X200 Z300
N170 G97 S2500 F0.15 M4 D1
N180 G00 X0 Z3 M8
N190 G01 Z-7
N200 G00 Z3
N210 G00 X200 Z300
N240 G00 X40 Z-4
N250 G01 X30
N260 G04 F0.5 ; Dwell time 0,5 sec
N270 G01 X22
N280 G04 S5 ; Dwell time 5 revolutions
N250 G01 X14
N260 G00 X40
N300 G00 X200 Z300
N310 M30

B515 Basics
1 Brief description
Objective of the module
In this module you learn about the functions of the different components of a machine tool and how
they work together.
In this module you get to know the basic concepts and basic logic functions of the control unit, the
possibility of extending the peripherals and common abbreviations.
Content:
Types of machine tools
Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool
Basic concepts - basic logic functions
Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate
Drive system - example Machining centre
Shortcuts and abbreviations
B515
B515

B515
Basics: Description
Basics:
In this module you get to know the basic concepts START
and basic logic functions of the control unit, the
possibility of extending the peripherals and com-
mon abbreviations.
Types of
machine tools
Advantages
of the CNC
controlled
machine tool
Basic
concepts -
basic logic
functions
Sample con-
figurations of
the Sinumerik
Operate
Drive system -
example Ma-
chining centre
Shortcuts and
abbreviations
Basics:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Types of machine tools
Notes :
2.1 The conventional machine tool
Screw-, cutting- and bar lathe; Source: Wikipedia, 2008
2.2 The CNC controlled machine tool
CNC Turning Center

Advantages of the CNC controlled machine tool Section 3
Notes :
 Low waste costs
 Low control costs
 Smaller optimal batch sizes
 Shorter cycle times
 Multi-shift work
 Multi-machine operation
 Higher efficiency
 Increase of the manufacturing capacity
 Rationalisation of the organisation
 Shortening of the delivery time
 Reduction of the set-up time
 Repetition accuracy does not depend on the operator
The CNC technology should not replace the worker or put more load on
him, rather it shall:
 efficiently use the machine and the cutting tools

 shorten the ancillary time and waiting period
 produce better quality much faster.
 cover the constantly rising demand
 make detailed changes faster
 insure the competitiveness of the company on the market

Section 4 Basic concepts - basic logic functions
Notes :
4.1 Definition of main components:
NC – Numerical Control
control in numerical form
CNC – Computerized Numerical Control, numerical control with one
or several microcomputer
DNC – Direct Numerical Control, one or several CNC‘ s receive their
part programs from a central computer over a cable or
network.
PLC – Programmable Logic Controller, a programmable logic circuit.
is used in the machine tools for adjusting the control.
4.2 CNC basic functions:
 A big colour monitor for the display, programming, simulation, opera-

tion and diagnosis.
 Operation with interactive dialogue with at least two switchable for-
eign language options.
 A bus-linked-, or integrated PLC to control the switching functions.
 Software end switches as a substitution of mechanical end-switches.
 Operational-/machine data logging, e.g. temperature error compen-
sation, variable space encoding of the tools, tool failure– and service life
monitoring
 Additional functions:
 Axis block
 Powered tools
 Data interface
 Manual input
 Correction values
 Position set
 Program test
 Block masking/block search
 Re-approaching the contour

Sample configurations of the Sinumerik Operate Section 5
Notes :
The following two graphics show sample configurations of the Sinumerik
Operate, their optional components an their communication paths.
Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 840D sl:
Sample configuration of the SINUMERIK 828D:
Factory network (Industrial Ethernet)
PLC E/A-Interface
2 x Handwheels based upon PROFINET
Synchronos motor 3
Synchronos motor 2
Asynchronos motor
Synchronos motor 1

Section 6 Driving mechanisms/positioning actions
Notes :
A typical machining center with feed drives, main spindle drive and auxil-
iary drive is shown below.
Feed drives Auxiliary drive
Main spindle drive
According to the drive tasks planed, controlled electrical drives for NC-
machines are divided into the following:
 Feed drives for all axis, e.g. X, Y, Z.
 Main spindle drive, e.g. for the milling spindle of a machining centre,
the spindle drive of turning machines or a grinding wheel drive.
 Auxiliary drive, e.g. for the tool changer, the circular table or the pallet
switcher.
Operation diagram of the position-regulated axis:

Shortcuts and abbreviations Section 7
Notes :
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
AS Automation System
AT Advanced Technology
BA Mode of Operation
BCD Binary Code Decimals
BCS Basic Coordinate System
CAD Computer Aided Design
COM Communication Module
COR Coordinate Rotation
CNC Computerized Numerical Control
CPU Central Processing Unit
CRC Cutter Radius Compensation
CUTOM Cutter Radius Compensation (Tool Radius Comp)
DAC Digital Analogue Converter
DB Data Block in the PLC
DBB Data Block-Byte in the PLC
DBW Data Block-Word in the PLC
DBX Data Block Bit in the PLC
DDE Dynamic Data Exchange
DIR Directory
DOS Disk Operating System
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DRV Driver Module
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
ENC Encoder
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
ESD Electro Static Discharge
FC Function Call
FDD Feed Drive
FPU Floating Point Unit
FST Feed Stop
GIA Gear Interpolation Data
GUD Global User Data
HD Hard Disk
HHU Handheld Unit
HMI Human Machine Interface
IM Interface Module
IM-Adress Interface Module-Address
INC Increment
INI Initializing Data
I/O Input- / Output
ISA Industry Standard Architecture
JOG Jogging
K-Bus Communication Bus
LED Light Emitting Diode
LF Line Feed
MB Mega Byte (Million Bytes)
MD Machine Data
MCP Machine Control Panel
MCS Machine coordinate system
MCU Machine Control Unit
MDA Manual Data Automatic

Section 7 Shortcuts and abbreviations
Notes :
MM Millimetre
MMC Man machine communication = HMI
MPI Multi Point Interface
MPF Main Program File
MSD Main Spindle Drive
MSTT Machine Panel
NC Numerical Control
NCK Numerical Control Kernel
NCU Numeric Control Unit
NMI Non Mask able Interrupt
OI Operator Interface
OP Operator Panel
OPI Operator Panel Interface
P-Bus Peripheral-Bus
PC Personal Computer
PCU Personal Computer Unit. Component of the NC-control,
which allows communication between operator and ma-
chine.
PCMCIA Personal Computer Memory Card International Associa-
tion
PG Programming Device
PLC Programmable Logic Control
PRAL Process Alarm
PS Power Supply (SIMATIC S7-300)
PTP Point to Point
P2P Point to Point
RAM Random Access Memory (read write memory)
REF Reference Point Approach Function
ROV Rapid Override
SBL Single Block
SK Softkey
SKP Skip Block
SW Software
SPF Sub Programm File
SYF System Files
T Tool
TC Tool Change
TLC Tool Length Compensation
TO Tool Offset
TRC Tool Radius Compensation
UFR User Frame
VGA Video Graphics Adapter
WCS Workpiece Coordinate System
WPD Work Piece Directory
ZO Zero Offset

B516 Operating elements
1 Brief description
With help of this module you learn to recognise general operating elements of the Sinumerik Operate,
and how to differentiate them from one another.
The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will be described.

Depending on the machine manufacturer the following operating elements can be used:
 Operator panels (OP)
 CNC-full keyboard
 Machine control panel (MCP)
Content:
Operator panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate
CNC-full keyboard (QWERTY - type)
Machine control panel (MCP)
B516
B516

B516
Operating elements: Description

Operating elements:
The general operation of a Sinumerik Operate will START
be described.
Depending on the machine manufacturer the fol-
lowing operating elements can be used: Operator
panel layouts
 Operator panels (OP) of the Sinu-
merik Operate
 CNC-full keyboard
 Machine control panel (MCP)
CNC-full key-
board
Machine
control panel
Operating elements:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate
Notes :
The operator panel (OP) consists of the following operating elements:
 Membrane keyboard with 8 + 4 horizontal and 8 vertical softkeys
 Colour display (10.4” Display on 828D, 15” Display on 840D sl)
 Front-USB-plug on operator panel front (840D sl),
 USB, CF-card, Ethernet on operator panel front (828D)
 Fully integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (828D)
2.1 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 840D sl:

5
2
3
1 Horizontal softkey strip (HSK) with 4 screen keys (2 each located

on the left and right side)
2 Vertical softkey strip (VSK)
3 15“ TFT-colour display

4 Front-USB-plug (Sinumerik 840D sl) , e.g. for connection of exter-
nal memory media, mouse or keyboard
5 Status-LED: Power
Status-LED: Temp
2.2 Operator panel layout of the Sinumerik 828D
5
3
4
1
2
5 6
3 6
4

Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate Section 2
Notes :
1 Horizontal softkey strip with 4 screen keys (2 each located on the
left and right side) (HSK)
2 Vertical softkey strip (VSK)
3 10,4“ TFT-colour display
4 USB, CF-card and Ethernet on panel front behind removable
cover
5 Ready-LED (Status red/green), NC-LED (Status LED of the NC)
and CF-LED (write/read access on CF-card) behind lockable and
removable cover
6 Integrated QWERTY CNC-keyboard (for reference see section 3)
2.3. Horizontal and vertical Softkey bar (HSK/VSK)
Softkeys are buttons, which are dynamically linked with programmed func-
tions. These functions are presented on the monitor above the softkey bar
(HSK) or to the left of the softkey bar (VSK) as a strip of icons.
 The 8 horizontal softkeys are used to access the individual operation
sectors including further menu layers. There is an associated vertical
menu strip/Softkey strip for each of the horizontal menu points.
 The 8 vertical Softkeys are functions associated with the presently se-
lected horizontal Softkey.
The function will be called up when the vertical softkey is pressed.
The content of the vertical softkey bar can therefore change once again
if a sub-function to the selected function is chosen.
The horizontal softkey bar consists furthermore of:

 4 screen keys (see pictures below)
“MACHINE”-key:
Calls-up the operating area “MACHINE” (in operat-
ing mode “JOG”, “MDA” or “AUTO”).
“Recall”-key:
Jumps to the next highest menu level.
“Extend”-key:
Extends the horizontal softkey bar.
“MENU SELECT”-key:
Calls the main menu for operating area selection.

Section 2 Operator Panel layouts of the Sinumerik Operate
Notes :
2.4 Screen area
The screen is laid out as follows:
1 4 12
2 9
3 5
8
6
10
11
1 8
Operation sector Display of:
2
Program path and name  T = Active tool
3
Status, program influence and  F = Present feedrate
program name  S = Actual spindle revolution
4
Alarm and message line  Spindle load factor in percent
9
5
Canal operation messages Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
10
6
Position readout for the axes Working window
11
7
Display of the active zero point Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)
and rotation 12
Date and Time

CNC-full keyboard Section 3
Notes :
According to the model of operating panel that is used, a CNC-keyboard
can be integrated for operation and programming.
The keys that are described here can also be located directly on the opera-
tor panel.
The layout of the operating panel is described in the documentation of the
machine manufacturer.
Below follows a description of the basic keys of the CNC-Full keyboard.
CNC-Full keyboard “KB 483”:
Alpha-Block Hotkey-Block Cursor-Block Number-Block.
Alpha-Block: The alpha-block features the letters A, ..., Z, the

space key and the special character for the input of
text.
Hotkey-Block: The hotkey-block serves the direct selection of op-
eration areas.
Cursor-Block: The cursor-block is used for navigation around the
screen display.
Number-Block: The number-block features the numbers 0 ... 9, the
decimal point and special characters for the input of
numerical characters and operators.
Keys in the Alpha-Block

BACKSPACE
Clears a value in the input field.
If in edit mode, the character in front of the cursor
will be cleared.
TAB
Indent the cursor by several characters.
SHIFT
If the Shift-key is held depressed, the upper charac-
ter on keys with double usage will be entered.
CTRL
With the following key combinations navigation in the
work plan and the G-Code-Editor is carried out:
 Ctrl + NEXT WINDOW: Jump to the beginning.
 Ctrl + END: Jump to the end.
ALT
ALT-Key

Section 3 CNC-full keyboard
Notes :
INPUT
 Accepts an edited value
 Opens / closes a directory
 Opens a file
Keys in the Hotkey-Block
MACHINE
Opens up the operating area "Machine" (JOG, MDA,
Auto). Corresponds to the yellow HSK 1 “Machine”
PROGRAM
Opens up the operating area "Program".
The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 3 “Program”.
OFFSET
Opens up the operating area "Parameter” (Tool list,
Tool wear, Magazine, Work offset, User variable,
Setting data). The key corresponds to the yellow
HSK 3 "Parameter".
PROGRAM MANAGER
Opens up the operating area "Program manager“.
The key corresponds to the yellow HSK 4 "Program
Manager".
ALARM
Opens up the actual Alarmlist-window.
The key corresponds to the VSK 1"Alarm list" in the
operating area “Diagnostics”.
CUSTOM
This key can be customized by the machine manu-
facturer.
See the machine manufacturer’s documentation .
Keys in the Cursor-Block
ALARM CANCEL
Clears an active alarm shown in the alarm and mes-
sage line that is identified with this symbol.
CHANNEL
Selects a channel from 1 - n.
HELP
Opens the context-sensitive help window in a split-
screen view. In case of the G-Code editor the help
documentation with intelligent support for program-
ming instructions is called up.
NEXT WINDOW
Activates the next subwindow in the actual working
window. By pressing “CTRL + NEXT WINDOW“ in
the G-Code editor window you can jump to the first
line of the program code.
PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN
Paging up or down in a directory or the work plan.

CNC-full keyboard Section 3
Notes :
Further keys in the Cursor-Block
END
Locates the cursor in the last input field of a parame-
ter mask. In the G-code editor the cursor will be set
to the end of the active line and by pressing STRG +
END the cursor jumps to the end of the last line of
the program.
Cursor-Keys
Navigates through the various fields or lines on the
screen.
While in a program listing, the “cursor-to-the-right”-
key opens a directory or a program. To change to
the next level above the present level press the
“cursor-to-the-left”-key.
SELECT
With this key you can select amongst several given
alternatives.
Keys in the Number-Block

BACKSPACE
Clears a value in the active input field.
While in the edit mode, just the character in front of
the cursor will be cleared.
DEL
Deletes the value in the parameter field.
While in the edit mode, just the character behind the
cursor will be deleted.
INSERT
Activation of the insertion mode or the pocket calcu-
lator. Opens a parameter menu in an input field if
available.
INPUT
 Accepts an edited value
 Opens/closes a directory
 Opens a file

Section 4 Machine control panel
Notes :
Depending on the type of operating panel the machine manufacturer may
be using either a SIEMENS or his own machine control panel for the op-
eration of the machine.
This section describes the standard-keys of the Siemens machine control
panel.
Depending on the machine further keys may be used; such information
should be taken from the documentation by the machine manufacturer.
Machine control panel “MCP 483”:
Below follows a description of the keys of the machine control panel and
their function:
EMERGENCY-STOP-key
Press this key in the case of an emergency, i.e. if
human life is endangered or if the machine or work
piece could be damaged.
All drives will be braked to a standstill with the great-
est possible braking torque.
Note:
For further reactions that may be caused by pressing
the EMERGENCY-OFF key please refer to the docu-
mentation by the machine manufacturer.
RESET
 Stops the machining from executing the presently
running program. The NC-control unit remains
synchronized with the machine. It is now in the
basic condition ready to commence a new pro-
gram run.
 Clears an active alarm.
JOG
Selection of the operating mode “JOG”.
TEACH IN
Creation of programs in interactive mode with the
machine.
MDA
Selection of the operating mode “MDA” (Machine
Data Automatic).
AUTO
Selection of the operating mode “Machine Auto”.

Machine control panel Section 4
Notes :
SINGLE BLOCK
Runs a program block-by-block (single block).
REPOS
Repositions and re-approaches a contour.
REF. Point
Approaches a reference point.
VAR (Variable JOG step)

Traverse through an incremental dimension with
variable step lengths.
Inc (Incremental JOG step)

Traverse through an incremental dimension with a
given step size of 1, ..., 10000 increments.
The actual length of an incremental step depends on
a machine datum.
Note:
Read the machine manufacturer’s documentation.
CYCLE START
Starts a program run.
CYCLE STOP
Stops a program run.
Axis keys
Axis (X, Y, Z, 4, 5, 6) selection.
to
Direction keys
For traversing an axis either in the positive or nega-
tive direction.
RAPID
For traversing an axis at rapid traverse rate (fastest
speed).
WCS MCS
Toggling between the work piece coordinate system
(WCS) and the machine coordinate system (MCS).

Section 4 Machine control panel
Notes :
Feed / Rapid traverse override
For increasing or reducing the programmed
feedrate. The programmed feedrate is represented
by 100% and can be varied within the range of 0%
to 120%, in rapid traverse only up to 100%. The new
adjusted value appears as an absolute and percent-
age value in the feed status display on the screen.
FEED STOP
Stops the machining of the currently running pro-
gram, in order to stop the axes.
FEED START
Continuation of the program as from the present
block and to increase the feedrate to the pro-
grammed value.
Spindle override
For increasing or reducing the programmed speed.
The programmed speed corresponds to 100% and
can be varied within the range of 0% to 120%. The
new value thus selected appears as an absolute
value and as a percentage in the speed status dis-
play on the screen.
SPINDLE STOP
To stop the spindle.
SPINDLE START
To start the spindle.
Key switch
Position 0 Lowest access
No key stage
Access stage 7
Position 1
Key 1 black
Access stage 6 Increasing access
rights
Position 2
Key 1 green
Access stage 5
Position 3 Highest
Key 1 red access right
Access stage 4 (Key switch)
Further access rights (Access stage 3 - 0) are possi-

ble by means of passwords.

B517 Switching on the machine / control unit -
reference point
1 Brief description
Objectives of the module:
In this module you learn how to switch on the machine and / or the control unit and how to approach
the reference point of the axes.
Both the machine and the control unit must be switched on before any work can be done on the ma-
chine. Following this all axes with incremental measuring systems must be referenced in order to en-
able the control unit to establish the position of the axes within the machine coordinate system.
There is no need to reference any axes equipped with absolute measuring system. In this case the
control unit recognizes the position of the axes automatically.
Content:
Switching on the machine and the control unit
Approaching the reference point of the axes
B517
B517

B517
Switching on the machine: Description

Switching on the
machine:
Both the machine and the control unit must be START
switched on before any work can be done on the
machine. Following this all axes with incremental
measuring systems must be referenced in order to Switching on
enable the control unit to establish the position of the machine
the axes within the machine coordinate system. and the con-
trol unit
There is no need to reference any axes equipped
with absolute measuring system. In this case the
control unit recognizes the position of the axes Approaching
automatically. the reference
point of the
axes
Switching on the
machine:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Switching ON the machine and the control unit
Notes :
Switching ON sequence
Please note the explicit switching ON rules as
stated by the machine manufacturer.
1. Turn on the main switch of the machine.
Note:
Normally the main switch will be found on the switchgear cabinet.
2. All EMERGENCY-STOP keys of the machine must be released

(operating panels, switchgear cabinet, etc.).
Note:
The locations of the EMERGENCY-STOP keys are shown in the machine
manufacturer’s documentation.

Switching on the machine and the control unit Section 2
Notes :
3. Switch on the control unit. Depending on the individual machine this
switch can be found on the operating desk or the switchgear cabinet of
the machine or else the control unit is switched ON automatically when
turning the main switch.
Note:
For more information see the documentation of the machine manufacturer
The control unit boots.

While booting a welcome image is displayed, followed by the basic screen
of the SINUMERIK HMI (displayed below):
4. Any fault messages that might be displayed can be cleared by means of

the “RESET“-key on the machine control panel.

Section 3 Approaching the reference point of the axes
Notes :
3.1 Referencing sequence
Before referencing the axes a check must be car-

! ried out to ensure that there is no danger of colli-
sions during the approach.
Machines with incremental measuring systems must be referenced after
switching ON in order to synchronize the measuring system with the ma-
chine coordinate system.
Press the “JOG”-button on the machine control
panel.
Press the “REF.POINT”-button on the machine con-

trol panel.
The respective LED’s above the keys are illuminated.
The referencing screen 1 opens up with all the axes that need referenc-
ing (see image below).
3.2 Approaching the reference point
Depending on the commissioning of the machine there are various ways of

referencing.
Note:
For further details see the machine manufacturer’s documentation.
3.2.1. Automatic referencing
Press the “CYCLE START”-button on the machines

control panel.
The axes will be referenced one after the other.

Approaching the reference point of the axes Section 3
Notes :
3.2.2 Manual referencing
Press the “FEED START“-button on the machine
control panel.
Select an axis for referencing.
Press or .
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer's documentation.
Select all other axes one after the other and start the reference point ap-
proach by pressing either “+“ or “-“.
While referencing confirm the feed override setting,

since the axes are traversed at the feed rate that has
been preset by means of a machine datum.
Axes that have been referenced are shown on the

display with a “Reference point symbol“ preceding
the axis name.
See the screen below.
The axis is referenced as soon as the reference point is reached. The ac-
tual value display is set to the reference point value.
From now on, path limits, such as software limit switches, are active.
End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating
mode “AUTO” or “JOG”.

Section End
Notes :

B518 Basics of operation
1 Brief Description
In this module you learn about the screen layout of the display panel of the Sinumerik Operate, as
well as the the basic operation of the control using softkeys and buttons.
This module describes the relevant parts of the main screen with help of the basic screen layout.
In addition to the topic above, this module covers the selection of parameters with respect to units
(mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator within the input masks.
Content:
Basics of operation
Considerations for the input masks
B518
B518

B518
Basic operations: Description

Basic operations:
This module describes the relevant parts of the START
main screen with help of the basic screen layout.
In addition to the topic above, this module covers
the selection of parameters with respect to units
(mm/inch) used and the usage of the calculator Basics of
within the input masks. operation
Considera-
tions for the
input masks
Basic operations:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Basics of operation
Notes :
2.1 Main screen of the HMI in the operating mode “JOG”
In this section the parts of the main screen will be declared.
1 4 6
2 12
3 5
7
8
10
11
1 8
Active operating area and Position readout for the axes
mode 9
Display of the active zero
2
Program path and name point, rotation, mirroring and
3
Status, program influence and scaling
10
chanel name Working window
4 11
Alarm and message line Horizontal softkey bar
5 12
Chanel operation messages Vertical softkey bar
6
Date and time
7
Display of:
 T = Active tool
 F = Present feedrate
 S = Spindle
 Spindle load factor in percent

Basics of operation Section 2
Notes :
1
Active operating area and operating mode
(The display mode depends on the selected operating mode on the ma-
chine control panel (MCP)).
Display area Description
The operating mode “Machine Manual” (setup mode)

can be selected by pressing the “JOG”-button on the
machine control panel.
Functions adjusted under “T,S,M“ like tool selection,
work offset and spindle control affect all movements
in the manual operating mode.
Another function using the “JOG“-Mode is the ap-
proaching of the reference point (REF.POINT).
Hint:
If you use a mouse to operate the HMI Sinumerik
Operate, a click in the upper left corner of the display
area (here the upper case “M“ with over line and un-
derline) opens the yellow horizontal- and vertical
softkey bar, from which you can access comfortably
all the main functions of the control unit.
2
Program path and name
NC programs can be created, modified and selected in the three main di-
rectories on the NC of the type DIR.
 Folder “Part programs”

Part programs have the file extension MPF and are stored in a sepa-
rate part programs folder.
Display in editor Description
The shown program path to the left indicates that
the selected program “TEST.MPF” can be found on
the NC. The “MPF” in the program path refers to
the directory “Part programs“.
 Folder “Subprograms”
Subprograms have the file extension SPF and are stored in a separate
subprogram folder
The selected program “TEST.SPF“ is stored on the
NC in the SPF subprogram folder as the folder path
to the left points out.
 Folder “Workpieces”
Workpiece programs have the file extension WPD and are stored in a
separate workpiece folder.
The selected program “TEST.MPF” is stored on the
NC in the created workpiece directory “TEST.WPD“
The “WKS” in the program path refers to the direc-
tory “Workpieces“.
Notes :
3
Status, program influence and channel name
Reset
Interrupted
Activated
4
Alarm and message line
In case of a syntax error in the program code or a hardware malfunction

(e.g. emergency stop) an alarm number with explaining text shows up.
MCP Display Description

area
After correcting the error (correction of the hard-

ware malfunction) you can reset the error message
with the “RESET“-button.
CNC-keyboard
By pressing the “ALARM“-key on the keyboard the
“Alarm list”-window shows up, with a list of all active
alarm messages.
After correcting the error (correction of the syntax

error) you can reset the error message with the
“ALARM CANCEL“-key on the keyboard.

5
Notes :
Chanel operation messages
Display of operation messages with symbols.
Attention: In case of conditions with this sym-
bol a manual operation is required.
 Operation in case of the message “Stop“:
After the fault remedy the machining program will

be continued after pressing “NC-Start“.
 Operation in case of the message “Wait“:
After a successful acknowledgement of the fault the

machining program will be continued automatically.
 Stop: No NC-Ready
 Stop: BAG-Ready (mode-of-operation group)
 Stop: EMERGENCY-STOP activated
 Stop: Alarm with Stop activated
 Stop: M0/M1 activated
 Stop: Block completed in single block mode
 Stop: Cycle-Stop activated
 Wait: Read-in release missing
(Part program is not further processed by NC)
 Wait: Feed enable missing
 Wait: Axis enable missing
 Wait: for Feed override
 Stop: NC-block erroneous
 Wait: for external NC-blocks
 Wait: Spindle enable missing
 Wait: Axis feed rate is 0
 Stop: No channel ready
 Stop: SERUPRO has reached the search desti-
nation and the NCK has stopped. SERUPRO is
the abbreviation for „Search Run by Program
test“ and represents a new kind of block search.
In case of conditions with this symbol, a manual

operation is usually not necessary.
 Wait: Remaining dwell time in seconds or in
spindle revolutions
 Wait: HiFu-acknowledgement missing
 Wait: Exact stop not reached
 Wait: for positioning axis

Notes : Display area Description (continuation)
Note:
In case of conditions with this symbol a manual op-
eration is usually not required.
 Wait: for spindle
 Wait: for another channel
 Wait: due to a SYNACT-instruction
 Wait: Block advance activated
 Wait: for tool change acknowledgement
 Wait: for gear change
 Wait: for closed loop
 Wait: for tapping start
 Wait: for safe operation
 Halt: oscillation activated
 Wait: during access to a system variable
6
Date/Time
Current date and time are shown in the upper right corner of the screen.
7
Display of T,F,S and spindle-value

T: (Tool) Name of the active tool. The op-
tional display of “TC“ is only available if
a swivel head table is present.
F: (Feed) Display of the active feed rate
for the current machining (top: actual
feed rate, large digits during machin-
ing), as well as the display of the pro-
grammed feed rate (bottom) and the
feed override in %.
S: (Spindle) Display of the active spindle
speed for the current machining (top:
actual speed, large digits during ma-
chining), as well as the display of the
programmed spindle speed (bottom)
and the speed override in %.

8
Notes :
Position display for the axes
MCP/Display area Description
With the key “WCS MCS” on the MCP or
the VSK 7 “Act. vls. MCS” it is possible to
switch between the machine coordinate
system (MCS) and the workpiece coordi-
nate system (WCS).
Display of the available axes with axis as-

signment and position data in the machine
coordinate system (Mach).
Display of the available axes with axis as-

signment and position data in the work
piece coordinate system (WCS). However,
programmable zero offsets are not taken
into consideration in the display.
9 Display of the active zero point offsets, rotation, mirroring and

scaling
The machine coordinate system (MCS) does not consider zero point off-
sets in comparison to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).

Name of the currently active work offset,
rotation, mirroring, rotation and scaling for
the present machining sequence.
10
Work window
Depending on the pressed horizontal softkey the associated parameter

fields and help pictures are displayed. Here the “T,S,M”-mask is shown.

Notes : 11
Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)
The user interface consists of different subsections. At the bottom of the

screen is the horizontal softkey bar (HSK) containing 8 softkeys (see Sec-
tion 2.2.1 in this module). The selection of a new window is made by
pressing the buttons just under the softkeys. If the number of functions
exceeds the representation capacities of the maximum of 8 softkeys than
a partitioning in two different horizontal softkey bars occurs.
The change over forth and back takes place with

the “Menu extend“-key on the operator panel.
12
Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
The available functions and operating modes can be selected from the
keys right beside the vertical softkey bar (VSK) on the right hand side of
the screen. If the number of functions exceeds the representation possi-
bility capacity of the maximum of 8 softkeys than a partitioning in two dif-
ferent vertical softkey bars occurs.
The changeover takes place with the:

“Forward“-key or the
“Backward“-key (VSK 8).
2.2 Operating with softkeys and buttons
The Sinumerik Operate separates into 6 different operating areas

(“Machine“, “Parameter“, “Program“, “Program Manager“, “Diagnostics“,
“Start-up”), 3 operating modes (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) and 2 functions
(“REPOS”, “REFPOINT”).
By pressing the button “MENU SELECT“ on the

operator panel the active screen will be overlaid
with the display of a yellow horizontal softkey bar at
the bottom and a yellow vertical softkey bar on the
left side of the screen. They consist of 6 operating
area softkeys in the HSK and 3 operating mode-, as
well as 2 function softkeys in the vertical softkey
bar.

Notes :
2.2.1 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)

By pressing HSK 1 “Machine“ the operating are
“Machine“ will be called up.
See module B569 - “Operating area machine“.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Parameter“ the operating

area “Parameter“ will be called up.
See module B573 - “Operating area Parameter“.
By pressing the HSK 3 “Program“ the operating

area “Programm“ will be called up.
See module B574 - “Operating area Programm“.
By pressing the HSK 4 “Program-Manager“ the op-

erating area “Program-Manager“ will be called up.
See module B575 - “Operating area Program-
Manager“.
By pressing the HSK 5 “Diagnose“ the operating

area “Diagnose“ will be called up.
See module B576 - “Operating area Diagnose“.
By pressing the HSK 6 “Start-up“ the operating area

“Start-up“ will be called up.
See module B577 - “Operating area Start-up“.
2.2.2 Vertikale Softkey-Leiste (VSK)

By pressing the VSK 1 “AUTO“ the operating mode
“AUTO“ will be called up
See module B572 - “Operating mode AUTO“.
By pressing the VSK 2 “MDA“ the operating mode

“MDA“ will be called up.
See module B571 - “Operating mode MDA“.
By pressing the VSK 3 the operating mode “JOG“

will be called up.
See module B570 - “Operating mode JOG“.

By pressing the VSK 4 „REPOS“ the function

„REPOS“ will be called up.
See module B569 - “Operating area Machine“.
By pressing the VSK 5 „REF POINT“ the function

“REF POINT“ will be called up.
See module B569 - “Operating area Machine”.

Notes for the input masks Section 3
Notes :
3.1 Measurement units [metric/imperial]
The measurement units of all parameters used in the entire documentation

are defined in the metrical system (mm). The following table compares the
equivalent imperial measuring units (inch and foot) with the metric system.
Note:
A description how to change between metric (mm) and imperial system
(inch) can be found in the module B570 - “Operating mode JOG“.
Metric Inch/foot
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min
3.2 Parameter selection
The following described selection of parameters in an input mask can be

called in every entry field where parameter selection is possible and nu-
merical input is not possible.
A list of possible parameters is displayed by press-

ing "INSERT"-key on the keyboard
Navigation through the menu occurs with the blue
cursor-keys.
Hint:
Navigation in long lists can be short cutted by
pressing the initial letter or number of the parameter
directly on the keyboard. Each additional pressed
letter continuous to restrict the selection.
If the selected entry is orange highlighted (actual

cursor position) then with pressing on of the yellow
“INPUT“-keys on the keyboard the chosen value is
taken over into the input field.
Alternatively you can switch through a list of possi-

ble choices in the input field by pressing the blue
“SELECT“-key repeatedly.

Section 3 Notes for the input masks
Notes : 3.3 Pocket calculator
The calculator can be called-up from every part of the operating area.
If a numerical entry is necessary in an input field

you can open the pocket calculator by pressing the
equal sign (=) on the keyboard.
If their is already a value existing in the input filed
e.g. 100 , then the value will be captured into the
calculator window.
Softkeys Description
By pressing the softkey “Delete“ every input or out-
come value in the calculator will be deleted.
For calculating values the four basic arithmetical

operators are available,
as well as…..
square root (R) and….
Square (S).
If you enter the letter “R“ with a following number in

the calculator and press the “Calculate“ button than
the square root of the entry will be calculated. If you
place first a “S“ instead of a “R“ in front of the num-
ber, the square will be calculated.
A mathematical function with values in parenthesis

allows the calculation of complex mathematical ex-
pressions.
The softkey “Accept“ transfers the result to the input

field and closes the pocket calculator independ-
ently.
The button “Cancel“ closes the pocket calculator.

B519 Operating area "Machine"
1 Brief Description
In this module you learn how to work with the different options of the operating area "Machine".
In this module the basic menu is explained, with respect to each operating options. The basic menu
consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar (with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yellow vertical
softkey bar (with 3 operating modes and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the screen. Depending
on the elective operation mode (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) a different window option (HSK) and function
option (VSK) is displayed in the operating area "Machine".
Content:
Operating area "Machine"
B519
B519

B519
Operating area machine: Description

Operating area
machine:
In this module the basic menu is explained, with START
respect to each operating options. The basic
menu consists of a yellow horizontal softkey bar
(with 6 operating areas) at the bottom and a yel-
low vertical softkey bar (with 3 operating modes Operating
area
and 2 functions) at the right hand side of the "Machine"
screen. Depending on the elective operation mode
(“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”) a different window option
(HSK) and function option (VSK) is displayed in Operating area
the operating area "Machine". machine:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Operating area "Machine".
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the operating area "Machine"
The operating area "Machine" can be selected as follows:
Press the button "MENU SELECT" on the operator

panel .
The actual operator interface will be overlaid with the display of a basic
menu containing the yellow horizontal softkey bar (with the 6 operating ar-
eas: “Machine”, “Parameter”, “Program”, “Program manager”,
“Diagnostics” and “Start-up”) and the yellow vertical softkey bar (with 3 op-
erating modes: “JOG“, “MDA“, “AUTO“ and 2 functions: “REPOS,
“REFPOINT).
By pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" depending on the

formerly chosen operation mode:
 JOG (see module B520)
 MDA (see module B521)
 AUTO (see module B522)
there will be different window options (HSK) and
function options (VSK) available in the operating
area "Machine",
After pressing the HSK 1 "Machine" (selecting the operating area

"Machine") in the operating mode "JOG" the "Machine" operator interface
opens up (see the following image).

Operating area "Machine" Section 2
Notes :
You can switch to the operating modes "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO" in the
operating area "Machine" immediately by pressing the respective button
on the machine control panel, or by pressing the button “MENU SELECT“
first and then the corresponding VSK.
2.2 Vertical softkey (VSK) bar of the main menu
Display section Description
By pressing the VSK 1 "AUTO" in the operating

area "Machine", the operation mode "AUTO" will be
called up.
See module B572 - Operating mode "AUTO".
By pressing the VSK 2 “MDA“ in the operating area

"Machine" the operation mode “MDA“ will be called
up.
See module B571 - "Operating mode MDA"
By pressing the VSK 3 “JOG“ in the operating area

“Machine“ the operating mode "JOG" will be called
up.
See module B570 - "Operating mode JOG".
After a program interruption (“CYCLE STOP“) and

after traversing the axis you can reposition the axis
to a saved position by pressing the VSK 4
“REPOS“.
By pressing the VSK 5 "REF POINT" in the operat-

ing mode "JOG" or "MDA" you can approach the
reference points.

Section End
Notes :

B520 Operating mode “JOG“
1 Brief description
In this module you get to know the different options of the operating area "Machine" in the operating
mode "JOG".
In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Operate, available in the manual mode (setup- and basic
functions), will be described.
Content:
Operating mode "JOG"
Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M)
Set Work offset (“Set WO”)
Measure workpiece
Measuring a tool
Position
Handwheel
Settings
B520
B520

B520
Operating mode jog: Description

Operating mode
jog:
In this module the softkeys of the Sinumerik Oper- START
ate, available in the manual mode (setup- and ba-
sic functions), will be described.
Operating
mode "JOG"
Tool-, spindle-
and machine
commands
(T,S,M)
Set Work
offset
(“Set WO”)
Measure
workpiece
Measuring a
tool
Position
Handwheel
Settings
Operating mode
jog:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Operating mode “JOG“
Notes :
Operation mode “JOG” is used, for setting up the machine for program run-
off or if you simply want to traverse the axes on the machine:
 Reference point approach, i.e. calibration of the position measuring sys-
tem
 Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e.
measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining
the work offsets used in the program
 Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
 Positioning axes
2.1 Selecting the operating mode “JOG“
The operating mode "JOG" can be selected as follows:
Press the “JOG“ button on the machine control

panel (MCP).
The operating mode “JOG” opens directly.
- OR -
Press the button “MENU SELECT“ on the machine
control panel.
Press the VSK 1 “JOG“ in the yellow vertical softkey
bar on the right hand side of the screen to switch
directly to the operating mode “JOG“.
Then Switch to the operating area “Machine” by

pressing the “MACHINE” key on the operator panel
or on the keyboard, or press the “MENU SELECT“-
key on the operator panel and the yellow HSK 1
“Machine“.
The following screen opens:

Operating mode “JOG“ Section 2
Notes :
The following functions are offered in the horizontal and vertical softkey bar
of the operating area "Machine" ( see section 2.2 and 2.3).
2.2 Vertical softkey bars 1 and 2

The most important G-functions are displayed by
pressing the VSK 1.1 "G functions".
Available auxiliary functions are displayed by press-

ing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary functions" at the time
of the output.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coor-

dinate system will be toggled between the machine
coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coor-
dinate system (WCS).
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer„s documenta-
tion.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Extend" on the operator

panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on
the vertical softkey-bar 2 is possible
By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all

G-functions will be shown.
By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual

axes positions in the selected coordinate system as
well as the currently active feed rate and feed over-
ride of each individual axis are displayed full
screen. In addition all active zero point offsets,
transformations and the T,F,S data is being dis-
played in the foot line.
Note:
If the machine is in the sub-mode “REPOS”, then
the in manual mode traversed path difference is
also being displayed.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator

panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to
the menu of the VSK 1.

Section 2 Operating mode “JOG“
Notes : 2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2

By pressing the HSK 1.1 "T,S,M" the input screen
"T,S,M" will be activated.
By pressing the HSK 1.2 "Set WO" the input screen

for setting the work offset will be activated.
By pressing the HSK 1.3 "Meas. workp.“ the input

mask for measuring a workpiece will be activated.
By pressing the HSK 1.4 "Meas. tool" the function

"Measure tool" will be activated and the extended
options "Manual", "Automatic", and "Calibrate" will
be available in the vertical softkey bar.
By pressing the HSK 1.6 "Position" the input

screen "Position" will be activated.
By pressing the "Menu extend"-button on the op-

erator panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK will be
available.
This symbol on the right of the dialogue line indi-

cates that more options on the HSK are available.
This symbol indicates that you are in the extended

softkey bar.
By pressing the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" the input

mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate
system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system
(WCS) will be available.
By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window

opens up where you can adjust the settings for
manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Section 3
3.1 Selecting the function "T,S,M" Notes :
(Tool, spindle and machine commands)
By pressing the HSK 1 "T,S,M" in operation area

“Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the follow-
ing input mask will be displayed on the screen .
3.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
By pressing the VSK 2 "Tool" the tool list opens on

the screen.
See module B573 - "Operating area Parameter".
By pressing the VSK 3 "Work offset" a list with the

zero point offsets will be displayed.
Refer to “Work offset” section 4 in this module and

module B573 - "Operating area Parameter".
By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" switch back to the

main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.

Section 3 Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M)
Notes :
3.3 Parameters of "T,S,M" (Tool, spindle and machine commands)
Input mask for tool-, spindle- and machine commands:

Values can be entered directly in the orange marked input fields or by se-
lecting predefined parameters with the “SELECT”-key.
Alternatively the “INSERT”-button in the marked cursor field opens a select
menu of all possible parameters, in which you can navigate with the “Tab”-
key as well as the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-down buttons. The
button “INPUT” takes over the selected values.
In order to be independently of country specific measuring units [metric/
imperial] not all units are displayed in the input masks.
See module B518 - "Basic operations".
In this documentation the measuring units are always metric.
Parameter Meaning
T Tool name:
e.g. T1 or Roughing _55 (alphanumerical).
D Cutting edge number of the tool.
Spindle:
 S1 Work spindle
Note:
 S2 Tool spindle The display of the spindles S2 and S3 is optional.
Follow the machine manufacturer‟s instructions.
 S3 Counter spin-
dle
rpm Spindle speed (revolutions per minute, numerical).
Spindle M-function: Spindle M function (Make a selection using the

"SELECT"-key on the keyboard).
 Empty field No selection is made.
 Right (M 3) Clockwise rotation of the spindle.
 Left (M 4) Counter clockwise rotation of the spindle.
 Off (M 5) Spindle is stopped.
 Positioning Spindle positioning: Spindle is positioned to the de-

(SPOS) sired position.

Tool-, spindle- and machine commands (T,S,M) Section 3
Parameter Unit Meaning (continuation) Notes :
Other M funct. Manufacturer defined M functions.

By inserting the number of the function, a
corresponding M-function is selected.
Refer to the machine manufacturer„s table for

the correlation between the meaning and the
function.
Work offset: Alternative parameter options:

The actual value of the work offset refers to
 None the machine zero point, after approaching
 Basic reference the reference point.
In contrast a machining program refers to the
 G54 workpiece zero point. This offset is to be en-
 G55 tered as zero point offset.
 G56 You can select work offsets from the tool list
of settable work offsets via the "Work offset"
 G57 softkey.
See module B523 - "Operating area Parame-
ter".
Unit of measure: Alternative parameter options:
 none
Note:
 mm [mm] The setting made here has effect on the pro-
gramming.
 imperial [inch]
Gear stage Specification of the gear stage

(none, auto, I - V).
Stop position [Deg] Input of the spindle position.
Note:
This parameter shows up by selecting the
spindle M-function .
Note:
With “CYCLE START“ the inserted values will be executed. The entries in
the option fields will be deleted.

Section 4 Set work offset (WO)
Notes :
4.1 Selecting the function "Work offset"
By pressing the HSK 2 "Set WO" in operation area

“Machine” under operation mode “JOG” the input
field for the programming of a work offset will be
opened, like displayed below.
Input value: By selecting an axis you can insert a value for the
zero point offset in the orange marked field (see the
picture above).
The navigation through the axis-fields can be ac-

complished by pressing the blue “cursor-up“ and
“cursor down“ keys on the keyboard.
The slider on the right side of the subwindow indi-
cates that there are more axis values available, that
can be reached by using the “cursor-down“ key.
Important: The horizontal softkey 2 "Set WO" is only select-

able if the workpiece coordinate system is selected
and a zero point offset (in this example G54) is ac-
tive.
The entered values for a zero point offset of the
axis will be accepted and displayed in the work-
piece coordinate system (WCS).
The difference between the original position to the
new entered value will be written to the active zero
point offset.

Set work offset (WO) Section 4
4.2 Vertical softkey bar Notes :

By pressing the VSK 1 "Z=0" the position of the Z-
axes will be reset to zero.
By pressing the VSK 2 "X=0" the position of the X-
axis will be reset to zero.
By pressing the VSK 5 "Delete active WO" the
zero point offset of all axes is set back to zero.
By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you switch back to
the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate.
Note:
After setting a position or deleting a zero point offset a automatic switch
back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate happens.
4.3 Setting the "Work offset"
Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to activate the

“T,S,M“ (Tool-, spindle- and machine) -mode.
In the input mask select the input field "Work off-

set".
By pressing the "INSERT"-key on the keyboard, an

option menu opens where you can make the de-
sired selection of possible zero point offsets.
You can navigate through this menu by means of
the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-keys on
the keyboard.
Hint:
Navigation in long lists can be easier by pressing
the initial letter or number of the parameter directly.
Each additionally pressed letter continuous to re-
strict the selection.
When the desired zero point offset is marked or-

ange, you can accept this value by pressing the yel-
low “INPUT”-key on the keyboard.
Alternatively you can toggle through all possible

options by pressing the "SELECT"-key repeatedly.
By pressing the button "CYCLE START" on the

machine control panel the chosen zero point offset
is activated.

Section 4 Set work offset (“Set WO”)
Notes :
4.4 Deactivating the "Work offset"
Press the HSK 1 "T,S,M" to select the operation

mode “T,S,M”.
The “T,S,M” subwindow opens (see picture above).
In the "T,S,M" input mask select the input field

"Work offset". By using one of the two selection
methods select the empty input field (see previous
page).
Press the button "CYCLE START“ on the machine

control panel (MCP) and the "Work offset" will be
deactivated.

Measure workpiece Section 5
5.1 Selecting the function “Measure workpiece“ Notes :
In the operating area “Machine“ under the operating

mode “JOG“ press the HSK 3 "Meas. workp." to
open the “Set edge“ input mask.
The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece

zero. To determine this zero point, measure the length of the workpiece
and save the position of the surface of the cylinder's face in the direction Z
in a work offset.
This means that the position is stored in the coarse offset and existing val-
ues in the fine offset are deleted.
The tool must approach the workpiece manually.

Another option is to either use an edge probe or dial gauge with a known
radius and length.
Alternatively an arbitrary tool with known radius and known length can also
be used .
When measuring a workpiece zero manually there are input parameters
that depend on the type of tool used and therefore are only accessible in
this special case.
The measuring tools may not be of the type 3-D probe.

Section 5 Measuring workpiece
Notes : 5.2 Vertical softkey bar

By pressing the VSK 2 "Work offset" the input
mask "Work offset" will be selected.
See module B523 - "Operating area "Parameter"".
By pressing the VSK 7 „Set WO“ the chosen work

offset values are accepted.
5.3 Measuring the workpiece with "Set edge"
5.3.1 Parameters for "Set edge"

Parameter Unit Explanation
 Work offset Select ”Work offset” and a corresponding

offset value (G54...G57),
or
 Measuring only choose “Measuring only” if the measured
values should only be shown.
Work offsets: Alternative parameter selection.
Several Work offsets are possible.
 G54
 G55 Note the machine manufacturer„s documen-
tation.
 G56
 G57
Z0 [mm] Reference point.

Measuring workpiece Section 5
Notes :
5.3.2 Measuring the workpiece zero with “Set edge”
1. Select the HSK 3 “Meas. workp.” in the operating

mode “JOG“ of the main screen.
The “Set edge” window opens.
2. Select "Measuring only" if you only want to display

the measured values.
- OR-
2. Select "Work offset" and the work offset number
(G54...G599) in which you want to store the zero
point in the associated selection box.
Note:
The selection of work offsets can differ. Please refer
to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
- OR -
2. Select "Basic reference" if the zero point is to be
saved in the active system offset.
- OR -
2. Select "Global basic" and the desired basic offset
(No.1...No.9) in which the zero point is to be saved.
- OR -
2. Select "Channel-specific basic" and the desired
basic offset (No.1...No.9) in which the zero point is to
be saved.
- OR -
2. Press the VSK 2 "Work offset" and then the VSK 4
“G54...G57”. Select the work offset in which the zero
point is to be saved in the "Work Offset - G54 …
G57" window and press the VSK 1 "In manual".
To return to the "Set edge" window again.
Note:
The selection of work offsets can differ.
Refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
3. Traverse the tool in the Z-direction and scratch.
4. Enter the position setpoint of the workpiece edge

“Z0” and press the VSK 7 "Set WO" softkey.
The workpiece zero point and as a result the zero offset are computed.
The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.
5. With the VSK 8 “Back” switch back to the operating

area “Machine”.

Section 6 Measuring tool
Notes : 6.1 Selecting the function "Measure tool"
By pressing the HSK 4 "Meas. tool" the measure

tool VSK-bar opens on the left side of the screen.
The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration

when executing a part program. These are stored as tool offset data in the
tool list. Each time the tool is called, the control considers the tool offset
data.
When programming the part program, you only need to enter the work-
piece dimensions from the production drawing. After this, the controller in-
dependently calculates the individual tool path.
You can determine the tool offset data, i.e. the length and radius or diame-
ter, either manually or automatically with tool probes.
Measuring a tool manually
When measuring manually, traverse the tool manually to a known refer-

ence point in order to determine the tool dimensions in X– and Z-direction.
The Sinumerik Operate then calculates the tool„s offset data from the posi-
tion of the tool carrier reference point and the reference point.
Either the workpiece edge or the chuck of the main or sub-spindle can be
used as a reference point for measuring in Z-direction. The position of the
workpiece is shown during the measurement. The position of the chuck, in
contrast, must be known before the measurement.
When measuring the tool dimension in X-direction, the workpiece always
serves as the reference point.
Note:
Note the machine manufacturer„s instructions.

Measuring tool Section 6
Notes :
Measuring tool automatically
During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the di-
rections “X” and “Z” with the aid of a probe. The tool offset data is then cal-
culated from the known position of the tool carrier reference point and the
probe.
If you wish to measure your tools with a tool probe, the machine manufac-
turer must parameterize special measuring functions for that purpose.
Enter the cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the
tool list before performing the actual measurement.
The probe has to be calibrated first.
By pressing the VSK 1 "Manual" the input mask

"Length manual" opens.
(see section 6.3).
By pressing the VSK 2 "Automatic" the Input mask
"Length auto" opens.
(see section 6.4).
By pressing the VSK 6 "Calibrate probe" the input
mask "Probe calibration" opens.
(see section 6.5).
By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" switch back to the

main screen.

Notes : 6.3 Measuring a tool manually
By pressing the VSK 1 "Manual" the input mask

“Length manual” opens.
6.3.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)
By pressing the VSK 2 "Tool" the tool list opens.

See module B523 - "Operating area Parameter".
By pressing the VSK 3 "X" the input mask for the

manual length measurement of the X-axis is called
up.
By pressing the VSK 4 "Z" the input mask for the

manual length measurement of the Z-axis is called
up.
By pressing the VSK 7 "Set length" the input val-

ues inserted are accepted.
By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you switch back to


Notes :
6.3.2 Parameters for measuring a tool manually with "X"
Parameter Meaning
T Tool name
(Alternatively select a tool from the tool list)
D Cutting edge number (1 to 9).
ST Replacement tool (01 to 99).
X0 Workpiece edge Diameter in direction “X”
6.3.3 Parameters for measuring a tool manually with "Z"
Parameter Meaning
T Tool name
Alternatively: Select a tool from the tool list.
D Cutting edge number (1 to 9)
ST Replacement tool (01 to 99)
Z0 Workpiece edge measured in direction "Z"
6.3.4 Measuring a tool manually with reference point on the work

piece edge
1. In the operating mode „JOG“ select the HSK 4

“Meas. Tool” and then the VSK 1 “Manual”.
2. Press the VSK 2 "Tool”.
3. Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. A

approximate tool length in “X” and “Z”, cutting edge
length and radius or diameter have to be already
predetermined and entered into the tool list.
4. Press the VSK 1 “In manual”.

The selected tool is accepted in the “Length manual”
window.
5. Press the VSK 3 for “X” or VSK 4 for “Z”, depending
in what direction the tool length is to be measured.
6. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number

of the replacement tool “ST” of the tool.
7. Traverse the tool towards the workpiece in the direc-

tion that is to be measured and scratch it.
8. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in “X0” or
“Z0”. If no value is entered for “X0” or “Z0”, the value
is taken from the actual value display.
9 Press the VSK 7 "Set length".
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
Whereby the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are auto-
matically taken into consideration as well.

Notes :
6.3.4 Measuring a tool manually with reference point on the chuck
1. In the operating mode “JOG“ select the HSK 4

“Meas. Tool” and then the VSK 1 “Manual”.
The “Length manual” window opens.
2. Press the VSK 4 "Z".
3. Press the VSK 2 "Tool”.
4. After opening the tool list, select the tool that has to
be measured.
The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter
of the tool must already be entered in the tool list.
5. Press the VSK 1 “In manual”.
The selected tool is accepted in the “Length manual”
input mask.
6. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the number
of the replacement tool “ST” of the tool.
7. Put a distance gauge on the chuck, traverse the tool
towards the chuck and scratch it.
8. Press the VSK 7 "Set length".
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
Whereby the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are auto-
matically taken into consideration as well.
6.4 Measuring a tool automatically
By pressing the VSK 2 "Automatic" the input mask

“Length auto“ is displayed on the screen.

6.4.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Notes :

By pressing the VSK 3 "X" the screen area for the
automatic tool measurement of the X-axis will be
selected.
By pressing the VSK 4 "Z" the screen area for the

automatic tool measurement of the Z-axis will be
selected.

main screen “measuring tool”.
6.4.2 Parameter for measuring tool automatically with "X" and "Z"
Parameter Meaning
D Cutting edge number (1 to 9).
6.4.3 Measuring a tool automatically with “Length auto“
1. Change to the tool that you wish to measure.
2. Select “JOG” mode and press the HSK 4 “Meas.

Tool”
3. Press the VSK 2 “Automatic”.
4. Press the VSK 3 “X” or VSK 4 “Z” softkey, depend-

ing on which tool length you want to measure.
5. Select the cutting edge number “D” of the tool.
6. Select, if the tool probe on the main spindle or on the

sub spindle is to be used, in case of two available
tool probes on the machine.
7. Manually position the tool nearby the tool probe such

that any collisions can be avoided when the tool
probe is being traversed in the corresponding direc-
tion.
8. Press the "CYCLE START" button on the machine

control panel (MCP).
The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed at the
measurement feedrate to the probe and back again.
The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. Whereby the cut-
ting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into
consideration as well.

Notes : 6.5 Calibrate the tool probe
By pressing the VSK 6 "Calibrate probe" the

"Probe calibration" input mask is displayed on the
screen.
To be able to measure the tools automatically, the position of the tool

probe in the machine area in relation to the machine zero must be deter-
mined first.
The probe must be approached from four directions (+X, -X, +Z, -Z) for
calibration purposes.
To do this, a calibrating tool must be used, which you can use to approach
the tool probe in all the required directions.
The calibrating tool must be a turning tool type (roughing or finishing tool).
Cutting edge positions 1 - 4 can be used for the tool probe calibration.
You must enter the length and the radius or diameter of the calibrating tool
in the tool list.
Note:
If a second probe is installed on the sub-spindle, the machine manufac-
turer must have been set up in a machine datum in a machine datum.
Refer to the machine manufacturer„s specifications.

6.5.1 Vertical softkey bar (VSK) Notes :
By pressing the VSK 3 “X” the screen area for the

function “Probe calibration” in the X-axis will be se-
lected.
By pressing the VSK 4 “Z” the screen area for the
function “Probe calibration” in the Z-axis will be se-
lected.
the “Measure tool” screen.
6.5.2 Parameters for “Probe calibration”
Measuring Parameter
direction
6.5.3 Precedure for “Probe calibration”

1. Change the calibrating tool.
2 Select “JOG” mode and press HSK 4 “Meas. Tool”
3 Press the VSK 6 “Calibrate probe”.
4. Press the VSK 3 “X” or the VSK 4 “Z”, depending on

which point of the tool probe is meant to determined
first.
5. Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like
to approach the tool probe.
6. Manually position the calibrating tool nearby tool
probe such that any collisions can be avoided when
the first point of the tool probe is being approached.
7. Press the “CYCLE START” button on the machine

The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is automatically
traversed with measurement feedrate to the probe and back again. The
position of the tool probe is determined and saved in an internal data area.
8. Repeat the process for the other three points of the
tool probe.

Section 7 Position
Notes : 7.1 Selecting the function “Position“
In order to implement simple machining sequences, you can traverse the

axes to certain positions in manual mode.
Note:
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is active during traversing.
By pressing the HSK 6 “Position” the input mask

“Target position” will be shown on the screen.
By pressing the VSK 5 “Rapid” the parameter “F” is

set to rapid.
Note:
The VSK 5 “Rapid” can also be pressed if the input
field parameter “F” is not the active input field
(highlighted in orange)


Position Section 7
Notes :
7.3. Parameters of "Target position"
Parameter Unit Description

F [mm/min] Feed
[mm/rev]
X [mm] Target position [abs/inc]
Y
Note:
Z The number of the axes is depending on
the machine configuration.
Z2 Note the machine manufacturer„s docu-
mentation.
C [Degree] Target angle [abs/inc]

AWZ
SP2
7.4. Precedure for “Target position“
1. If required, select a tool.
2. Select the “JOG” operating mode and press the

HSK 6 “Position”.
3. Enter the target position or target angle for the axis

or axes to be traversed.
4. Specify the desired value for the feedrate “F”.
- OR -
5. Press VSK 5 "Rapid".
*Rapid tr.* is displayed in the input field “F”.
6. Press the "CYCLE START" button on the machine

The axis is traversed to the specified target position.

If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are traversed
simultaneously.
Caution:
Pay attention to a collision free approach of the target position.

Section 8 Handwheel
Notes :
8.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel”
You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or in
the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) via the handwheel.
All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment:
 Geometry axes (X, Y, Z)
 Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1)
By pressing the HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the ex-

tended horizontal softkey bar the following input
mask will be shown on the screen.
An input field for the assignment of the axes is offered for every hand-
wheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described
in the module B518 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to
assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corresponding softkey on
the VSK.

The number of softkeys for the axis assignment is limited. For the assign-
ment of all other axes refer to the module B518 - "Basic operations", Sec-
tion 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all avail-
able axes by repeatedly pressing the blue "SELECT"-key on the key-
board.
Geometry axes
By pressing the VSK 1 "X" the X-axis is assigned to
the selected handwheel.
By pressing the VSK 2 "Y" the Y-axis is assigned to
By pressing the VSK 3 "Z" the Z-axis is assigned to

Handwheel Section 8
Display area Description (continuation) Notes :
Machine axes
By pressing the VSK 4 "X1" the X1-axis is assigned
to the selected handwheel.
By pressing the VSK 5 "Y1" the Y1-axis is assigned
By pressing the VSK 6 "Z1" the Z1-axis is assigned
By pressing VSK 7 "C1" the C1-axis is assigned to
By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can switch back
to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with
extended HSK-bar.
8.3 Handwheel assignment
1. In the operating mode “JOG“ (or “MDA” or “AUTO”)

select the operating area “Machine”, then press the
HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the extended horizontal
softkey bar.
2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis as-
signment will be offered for every connected hand-
wheel.
3. Place the cursor in the field next to the handwheel
with which you wish to assign the axis (e.g. no. 1).
4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the de-
sired axis (e.g. "X").
- OR -
To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT"
key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the
"INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the
handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1
and is activated immediately).
5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again.
- OR -
Press the VSK 8 "Back" .
The "Handwheel" window closes.
8.4 Deactivate handwheel
The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment

should be cancelled.
By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again the assignment is can-
celled.
Alternatively with pressing the “INSERT”-key, the selection menu with all
available axes can be opened.
By using the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-keys on the keyboard,
switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press one of the yellow
"INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted.
The corresponding handwheel is now deactivated.

Section 9 Settings
Notes : 9.1 Selecting the function “Settings”
By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Settings” the following

input mask will be shown on the screen.

By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the
measuring units are converted from the metric to
the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values
have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key
the key function switches to "Changeover metric".
By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the

measuring units are converted from the imperial
(inch) to the metric dimension system. New values
have to be metric. By pressing this key the key
function switches to "Changeover inch".
Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or

cancel by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Note:
All Inputs and calculation parameters are converted, as well as positioning
displays, tool data (length, radius, wear), zero point offsets, tool zero point
and setting data (workspace limitation).

Settings Section 9
Notes :
9.3 Measuring unit [metric/inch]
Regional settings of the units are not being displayed inside the input
masks. The following table compares the imperial system (inch) with the
metric system (mm).
Switching between the units is done in the operation area „T,S,M“ in the
inputfield “Unit of measure“, or with the HSK 2.8 „Settings“ and VSK
"Changeover metric/inch".
Metric Inch
mm in
mm/tooth in/tooth
mm/min in/min
mm/rev in/rev
m/min ft/min
9.4 Parameters for "Settings"
In the “Settings for manual mode“ window all configurations for manual
operation can be done.
Parameter Unit Meaning
Type of feed:
Axis feedrate/linear feedrate
G94
Revolutional feedrate
G95
Setup feedrate G94 mm/ Feedrate in mm/min

min
Setup feedrate G95 mm/rev Feedrate in mm/rev
Variable increment Enter the desired increment for axis traversal

by variable increments
Spindle speed rpm Spindle speed in rpm
After inserting the values in the input fields, press the VSK 8 “Back“ to
switch back to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the extended
view.

B521 Operating mode “MDA”
1 Brief description
In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode “MDA” in the operating area
“Machine“.
This module describes how a program can be loaded directly from the program manager into the
MDA-buffer and how the processing of the program is started.
It will be explained how an edited program, created in the working window, is written from the MDA-
buffer to any directory on the control unit.
You learn how to create a directory and a workpiece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory.
Furthermore the functions “Program control” and “Handwheel” will be explained.
Content:
Operating mode “MDA“
“Load MDI“
“Save MDI“
Program control
Handwheel
Synchronized actions
B521
B521

B521
Operating mode MDA: Description

Operating mode
MDA:
This module describes how a program can be START
loaded directly from the program manager into the
MDA-buffer and how the processing of the pro-
gram is started.
It will be explained how an edited program, cre- Operating
mode “MDA“
ated in the working window, is written from the
MDA-buffer to any directory on the control unit.
You learn how to create a directory and a work-
piece file of the type *.WPD (workpiece directory.
Furthermore the functions “Program control” and “Load MDI“
“Handwheel” will be explained.
“Save MDI“
Program
control
Handwheel
Synchronized
actions
Operating mode
MDA:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Operating mode “MDA”
Notes :
In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic), you can enter G-code com-
mands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the
machine.
You can load an MDA program straight from the Program Manager into the
MDA buffer. You may also store programs which were rendered or
changed in the MDA operating window into any directory of the program
manager.
2.1 Selecting the operating mode “MDA“
The operating mode “MDA“ can be selected as follows:

Press the “MDA”-key on the operator panel (OP).
The operating mode “MDA“ will be opened

immediately.
- OR -
Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator
panel.
Press the VSK 2 “MDA“ in the yellow vertical softkey

bar on the right side of the screen and the operating
mode “MDA” will be opened immediately.
Now switch to the operating area “Machine” by
pressing the “MACHINE” key on the operator panel
or on the keyboard or press the “MENU SELECT“-
“Machine“. The following screen opens:
In the operating mode “MDA“ the following softkeys are shown in the hori-
zontal and vertical softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate:

Operating mode “MDA” Section 2
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “G functions“ the most

important G-functions are displayed in a window.
Available auxiliary functions are displayed in a sub-

window by pressing the VSK 1.2 "Auxiliary func-
tions" at the time of the output.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Delete blocks” entered

program blocks can be deleted.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 "Act. vls. MCS", the coor-

dinate system will be toggled between the machine
coordinate system (MCS) and the workpiece coor-
dinate system (MCS).
Note the machine manufacturer‘s documentation.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Forward" on the operator

panel (OP) the selection of additional softkeys on
the vertical softkey bar 2 is possible
By pressing the VSK 2.2 "All G functions" all G-

functions will be shown.
By pressing the VSK 2.6 "Zoom act. val." all actual

values are displayed full screen.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 "Back" on the operator

panel (OP) the vertical softkey bar switches back to
the menu of the VSK 1. The VSK-bar 1 is active
again.

Section 2 Operating mode “MDA”
Notes :
2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2
By pressing the HSK 1 “Load MDI” the “Load into
MDI” with the program manager window opens.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Save MDI” the “Save from
MDI : Select storage location” with the program
manager window opens.
By pressing the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program

control” subwindow opens on the screen.
By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator

panel (OP) more softkeys on the HSK will be avail-
able.

cates that more options on the HSK are available.
Press the “Extend”-button on the OP to open the
extended HSK.
This symbol indicates that you are in the extended

softkey bar.
Press the “Extend”-button on the operator panel to
switch back to the main HSK.

mask for traversing the axis in machine coordinate
system (MCS) or workpiece coordinate system
(WCS) will be available.
By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the

screen which shows the current synchronized ac-
tions is displayed.

“Load MDI” Section 3
3.1 Selecting the function “Load MDI” Notes :
By pressing the HSK1 “Load MDI” the “Load into MDI”

window with the Program Manger is displayed as below:
To navigate in the program manager window use the blue cursor-keys

The following operation options are available in the vertical softkey bar to
the right:
3.2 Vertical softkey bar
Press the VSK 7 “Cancel“ to close the “Load into

MDI” window.
By pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the marked program will
be opened after closing the window “Load into MDI”
and taken over in the MDI-window.
If a program is already in the MDI-buffer, you will be
asked to overwrite. Accept with “OK” or refuse with
“Cancel”. A program loaded in the MDI-buffer can
be edited or can be executed by pressing the
“CYCLE START“-button on the MCP
3. 3 Loading a MDI-program
1. Switch to operating mode “MDA“ (see section 2.1).

2. Press the VSK 1 “Load MDA”.
The “Load into MDI” Program manger window
opens.
3. Mark the program you want to load with the orange
cursor-keys.
4 Press the VSK 8 “OK“.
The window closes and the program is ready for machining.

Section 4 “Save MDI“
Notes : 4.1 Selecting the function “Save MDI”
By pressing the HSK2 “Save MDI” the “Save from

MDI : Select storage location” window with the
Program Manger is displayed as below:
Navigate through the program manager window by means of the blue

cursor-keys.
The following softkeys are available in the vertical softkey bar.

By pressing the VSK 1 “New directory“ a new di-
rectory can be created in the “Local drive” folder.
An input window opens where a name can be en-
tered for the new directory that is to be created.
Create a new directory by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”
or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
The “New directory”-softkey is not active if you have

placed the cursor on or in the “NC data” directory.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Workpiece” a new work-
piece of the type WPD (workpiece directory) can be
created. The current cursor position determines the
location of the folder. An input window opens, where
a name can be entered. By pressing “OK” the win-
dow “New G-Code program” is being opened. After
selecting the file type (Main program: MPF/
Subprogram: SPF) and entering the filename, the
program is saved from the MDA-Buffer into the cre-
ated directory. The “Workpiece”-softkey only be-
comes active if the cursor is placed on or in the
“Workpieces” folder of the “NC data” section.

“Save MDI“ Section 4
Notes :
Display area Description (continuation)
By pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” the “Save from

MDI” window will be closed without saving.
By pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, with the cursor on a

folder, the “New G code program” window opens.
Select the file type (Main program: MPF/
Subprogram: SPF) that you wish to create. After in-
put of the filename the program will be written from
the MDI-buffer to the new created file or the file that
is marked with the cursor.
4.3 Saving a MDI-program
1. Select the operating mode “MDA” (see section 2.1)

The “MDI” editor opens.
2. Create the MDI program by entering the G-code commands

using the keyboard.
3. Press the VSK 2 "Save MDI”.
The "Save from MDA : Select storage location" window

opens. It shows you a view of the program manager.
4. Select the drive to which you want to save the MDI program
you have created, and place the cursor on the directory in
which the program is to be stored.
5. Press the VSK 8 “OK“.
Note:
When you place the cursor on a folder, a window opens which
prompts you to assign a program name.
When you place the cursor on a program, you are asked
whether the file should be overwritten or not.
7. Enter a name for the program and press the VSK 8 “OK“.
The program will be saved under the specified name in the selected
directory.

Section 5 Program control
Notes :
5.1 Selecting the function “Program control“
By pressing the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program

control” window will be opened, as displayed below.
Navigate with the blue cursor-up and cursor-down

through the option fields.
To activate or deactivate a “program control” option

press the “SELECT”-key on the machine control
panel.
The following program control options are available:
Abbreviation/
Program control Scope
PRT The program is started and executed with auxiliary
no axis motion function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the
axes are not traversed.
The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary
function outputs are controlled this way.
Note: Program processing without axis motion can
also be activated with the function "Dry
run feedrate".
DRY The traversing velocities programmed in conjunc-
Dry run feedrate tion with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a
defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also
applies instead of the programmed revolutional
feedrate.
Caution:
Workpieces should not be machined when "Dry run
feedrate" is active, because the altered feedrates
might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be
exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could
be damaged.

Program control Section 5
Notes :
Abbreviation/ Scope (continuation)
Program control
RG0 In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of

Reduced rapid trav. the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered
in RG0.
(Please refer to chapter 9.1 in module B572)
M01 The processing of the program stops at every block

Programmed stop 1 in which supplementary function “M01” is pro-
grammed. In this way you can check the already ob-
tained result during the processing of a workpiece.
Note:
In order to continue executing the program, press
the "CYCLE START" key again.
Programmed stop 2 The processing of the program stops at every block

(e.g. M101) in which the "Cycle end" is programmed
(e.g. with M101).
Note:
This function must be projected via a machine da-

tum. Refer to the machine manufacturer‘s documen-
tation.
DRF Enables an additional incremental zero offset while

Handwheel offset processing in automatic operation mode
with an electronic handwheel.
This function can be used to compensate for tool

wear within a programmed block.
SB Individual blocks are configured as follows:

 SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The machining stops
only after blocks that perform a machine function
(exept for cycles).
 SB 2 - Data block: The machining stops after
each block; also for data blocks (except for cy-
cles).
 SB 3 - Single block, fine: The machining stops
after each machine block (also in cycles).
Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key.

The activation of the function “Single block” takes
place by pressing “SINGLE BLOCK” on the machine
control panel.
SKP Skip blocks are skipped during machining.

Notes :

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you can switch back
to the “Program control” window in “MDA” mode.
5.3 Controlling the program run

1. In the operating mode “MDA” select the HSK 4
„Progr. cntrl.“.
The “Program control” window opens.
2. Select the desired program control (see Section 5.1

in this module).
3. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to switch back to the main

screen of the Sinumerik Operate in “MDA”-operating
mode.

Handwheel Section 6
6.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel“ Notes :
 Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, C1)
wheel parameterised on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made
like described in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is
the possibility to assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the corre-
sponding softkey on the VSK.
tion 3.2 "Parameter selection". Generally you can switch through all avail-
board.

Geometry axes



Section 6 Handwheel
Notes :
Machine axes



By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can switch back

to the main screen of the Sinumerik Operate with
extended HSK-bar.
1. In the operating mode “MDA“ (or “JOG” or “AUTO”)

select the operating area “Machine”, then press the
HSK 2.6 “Handwheel” in the extended horizontal
softkey bar.
2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis

assignment will be offered for every connected
handwheel.

4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the de-

sired axis (e.g. "X").
- OR -
To open the "Axis" selection box using the
"INSERT" key, navigate to the desired axis, and
press the "INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also acti-
vates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to hand-
wheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).
5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again
- OR -
Press the VSK 8 "Back".

Handwheel Section 6
Notes :
6.4 Deactivating the handwheel
1. The cursor must be placed on that handwheel

whose axis-assignment should be cancelled.
2. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again

the assignment is cancelled.
-OR-
Alternatively with pressing the “INSERT”-key, the

selection menu with all available axes can be
opened.
3. By using the blue “Cursor-up”- and “Cursor-down”-

keys on the keyboard, switch to the empty field on
top of the menu and press the yellow "INPUT"-keys
on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted.

Section 7 Synchronized actions
Notes :
7.1 Selecting the function “Synchronized actions”
By pressing the HSK 2.7 “Synchronized actions” on

the extended horizontal Softkey-bar, in the opera-
tion area “Machine” in operation mode “MDA” , the
following mask will be shown on the screen.
You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in

the “Synchronized actions” window. You get a list with all currently active
synchronized actions.
In this list the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same
form as in the part program.
You can see the status of the synchronized action in the “Status” column.
 Waiting
 Active
 Blocked
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer‘s documentation for further in formation
about the programmed synchronized actions.

B522 Operating mode “AUTO”
1 Brief description
In this module you learn the different options of the operating mode "AUTO" in the operating area
"Machine".
This module describes, how to overstore technological parameters (for example, auxiliary
functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) for a program run in the
main memory of the NCK.
It is described among other things, how the execution of a program can be stopped at a specific part
of the program run with the function “Program control“ (programmed stop).
The differences between the two block search modes (with or without calculation) will be explained in
detail as well as the function “Simultaneous recording”.
The handwheel assignment and the functions “Settings” and “Synchronized actions”
complete this module.
Content:
Operating mode “AUTO“
Overstore
Program control
Block search
Simultaneous recording
Program correction
Handwheel
Synchronized actions
Settings
B522
B522

B522
Operating mode AUTO: Description

Operating mode
AUTO:
This module describes, how to overstore techno- START
logical parameters (for example, auxiliary Settings
functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable
instructions, etc.) for a program run in the
main memory of the NCK. Operating
It is described among other things, how the execu- mode “AUTO“
tion of a program can be stopped at a specific part Operating mode
AUTO:
of the program run with the function “Program con- END
trol“ (programmed stop).
The differences between the two block search
modes (with or without calculation) will be ex- Overstore
plained in detail as well as the function
“Simultaneous recording”.
The handwheel assignment and the functions
“Settings” and “Synchronized actions”
Program
complete this module. control
Block search
Simultaneous
recording
Program
correction
Handwheel
Synchronized
actions
Notes :

Section 2 Operating mode “AUTO”
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the operating mode “AUTO”
The operating mode “AUTO” can be selected as follows:

Press the “AUTO“ button on the machine control
panel (MCP).
The operating mode “AUTO” opens directly.
- OR -
Press the button “MENU SELECT“ on the machine
control panel.
Press the VSK 1 “AUTO“ in the yellow VSK-bar on
the right hand side of the screen to switch directly to
the operating mode “AUTO“.
Next, switch to the operating area “Machine” by
pressing the “MACHINE”-key on the operator panel
or the keyboard else press the “MENU SELECT“-
“Machine“.
The following screen opens:
The following softkeys will be shown in the vertical and horizontal softkey
bars:
2.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “G functions“ the most
important G-functions will be displayed.
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Auxiliary functions“,
available auxiliary functions will be displayed at the
time of the output.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Basic blocks“ all G-code
commands that trigger a function on the machine
will be displayed. The display updates both in the
test operation and in the actual machining of the
workpiece at the machine.

Operating mode “AUTO” Section 2
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Time counter“ the pro-

gram run time, the rest of the program run time and
the amount of machined workpieces will be dis-
played.
Note: Refer to the machine manufacturer‟s docu-
mentation.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Program levels“ you can
display the current program level during the execu-
tion of a large program with several subprograms.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Act vls. MCS” you can

switch over from the machine coordinate system
(MCS) to the workpiece coordinate system (WCS).
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer‟s documenta-
tion.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 "Extend" on the operator

panel (OP) you switch to the vertical softkey bar 2
with additional softkeys displayed.
By pressing the VSK 2.2 “All G functions” all G-

functions will be displayed.
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Zoom act. val.“ all actual

values will be displayed full-screen.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back” on the operator

panel you can switch back to the vertical softkey
bar 1.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 and 2

Pressing the HSK 1.2 “Overstore” allows you to
overstore technological parameters (for example,
auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, pro-
grammable instructions, etc.) for a program run in
the main memory of the NCK.
By pressing the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.” the working

window for controlling the program run will be
opened.
By pressing the HSK 1.5 “Block search” the block

search window opens.
By pressing the HSK 1.7 “Simultaneous re-

cording“ you can graphically display the execution
of the program on the screen before or during ma-
chining of the workpiece, to monitor the result of the
programming.

Section 2 Operating mode “AUTO”
By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Prog. corr.“ (program

correction) the program editor opens.
By pressing the "Extend"-button on the operator

panel you can switch between the normal and the
extended horizontal softkey bar.

cates that more softkeys are available on the ex-
tended horizontal softkey bar.
This symbol indicates that the extended horizontal

softkey bar is shown on the screen. You can switch
back to the HSK 1 again by pressing the “Extend”-
key.

mask for assigning axes to all parameterized hand-
wheels is displayed.
By pressing the HSK 2.7 "Synchr. Action." the

screen which shows the current synchronized ac-
tions is displayed.
By pressing the HSK 2.8 "Settings" a window

opens up where you can adjust the settings for
manual operation on the Sinumerik Operate.

Overstore Section 3
3.1 Selecting the Function “Overstore“ Notes :
By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Overstore“ the

“Overstore” window opens (see picture below).
The program to be corrected has to be in the STOP or RESET mode.

In the “Overstore” editor view you can overstore technological parameters
(for example, auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable
instructions, etc.) for a program run in the main memory of the NCK.
The programs in the part program memory are not changed while using
the function “Overstore”.
You cannot change the operating mode while you are in overstore mode.

By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Delete blocks” you can
delete the blocks you have entered before.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Back“ the window is being
closed. A change of the operation mode is now pos-
sible. Press “CYCLE START“ to continue running
the previously selected program.
3.3 Procedure for „Overstore“
1. Open a program in the operating mode “AUTO” then press the
HSK 1.2 “Overstore”. The “Overstore” window opens.
2. Enter the required data and NC block.
3. Press the “CYCLE START” key. The blocks you have entered
are stored. You can observe execution in the "Overstore" win-
dow. After the entered blocks have been executed, you can ap-
pend blocks again.
4. Press the VSK 8 "Back". The "Overstore" window closes.
5. Press the “CYCLE START” key again.

The program selected before overstoring continues to run.

Notes : 4.1 Selecting the function “Program control”

By pressing the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.“ the “Program
control” window opens like displayed below:
Navigation through the option menu takes place by

pressing the blue Cursor keys on the keyboard.
You can activate or deactivate an option by selecting

the entry first and then pressing the blue “SELECT“
key.
The following program control options are selectable:

Abbreviation/ Scope
Program control
PRT The program is started and executed with auxiliary
No axis motion function outputs and dwell times. In this mode, the
axes are not traversed.
The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary
function outputs are controlled this way.
Note:
Program processing without axis motion can also be
activated with the function "Dry run feedrate".
DRY The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction
Dry run feedrate with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are replaced by a de-
fined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also ap-
plies instead of the programmed revolutional
feedrate.
Caution:
Workpieces must not be machined when "Dry run
feedrate" is active because the altered feedrates
might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be
exceeded and the workpiece or machine tool could
be damaged.

Program control Section 4
Notes :
Abbreviation/ Scope (Continuation)
program control
RG0 In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of
Reduced rapid trav. the axes is reduced to the percentage value entered
in RG0.
(Please refer to chapter 9.1 in this module)
M01 The processing of the program stops at every block

Programmed stop 1 in which supplementary function “M01” is pro-
grammed. In this way you can check the already ob-
tained result during the processing of a workpiece.
Note:
Programmed stop 2 The processing of the program stops at every block

(e.g. M101) in which the "Cycle end" is programmed (e.g. with
“M101”).
Note:
The display can be changed. Please also refer to the
machine manufacturer's instructions.
DRF Enables an additional incremental zero offset while

Handwheel offset processing in automatic operation mode with an
electronic handwheel.
This function can be used to compensate for tool
wear within a programmed block.
SB Individual blocks are configured as follows:

 SB 1 - Single block, coarse: The program stops
only after blocks which perform a machine func-
tion.
 SB 2 - Data block: The program stops after each
block.
 SB 3 - Single block, fine: The program stops also
in cycles after blocks, which perform a machine
function.
Select the desired setting using the "SELECT" key

on the keyboard.
The selection of the function “Single block” takes
place by pressing the “SINGLE BLOCK”-key on the
machine control panel (MCP).
SKP Skipped blocks are skipped during machining.

Notes :
By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” you return to the win-

dow “Program control”.
4.3 Controlling the program run
1. In the operating mode “AUTO“ and the operating

area “Machine” press the HSK 4 “Prog. cntrl.“.
The “Program control” window opens and shows a

list of program control options.
2. Select the desired program control (see section 4.1

in this module).
3. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to go back to the main

screen of the Sinumerik Operate in the operating
mode “AUTO” and operating area “Machine”.
Hint:
The orange selection cursor disappears, if a skip
block is confirmed with the yellow “INPUT”-key.
With the blue “cursor to the left” or “cursor to the

right” you return again to the selection mode.

Block search Section 5
5.1 Selecting the function “Block search” Notes :
By pressing the HSK 1.5 “Block search” the “block

search” window opens as shown below.
If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the ma-
chine, then you don’t have to start the program from the beginning. You
can also start the program from a specified program block.
Applications of this function are to stop or interrupt program execution and
to specify a target position (e.g. during machining).
Determination of search targets per:

a. Comfortable search target definitions (search positions)
 Direct specification of the search target by positioning the cursor in the
selected program (main program).
 Search target via text search.
 The search target is the interruption point (main program and subpro-
gram). The function is only available if there is an interruption point. Af-
ter a program interruption (“CYCLE STOP” or “RESET”), the controller
saves the coordinates of the interruption point.
 The search target is the higher program level of the interruption point
(main program and subprogram). The level can only be changed if it
was previously possible to select an interruption point in a subprogram.
It is then possible to change the program level up to the main program
level and back to the level of the interruption point.
- OR -

Section 5 Block search
Notes :
b. Search pointer
 Direct entry of the program path in the “Search pointer“ window.
If a search target was found, it is possible to start another search run im-
mediately. This can be done many times after every successful search
run.
Attention:
Pay attention to a collision-free starting position as well as accurate active
tools and other technological values. If necessary move the tool to a save
starting position. Select the target block considering the selected block
search type.
Navigation through the program blocks takes place
by using the blue cursor-keys on the keyboard.
The following functions are available in the vertical softkey bar:

By pressing the VSK 1 “Start search“ the search run
starts depending on the search mode you have se-
lected before. Press the VSK 1 several times, until the
found target (z.B. with search text) corresponds to the
searched program block.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Blk. sear. mode“ the “Block
search mode” window opens.
Two different block search modes are selectable:
With calculation:
 Without approach:
It is used in order to be able to approach a target
position in any circumstance (e.g. tool change po-
sition). The end position of the target block or the
next programmed position is approached using the
type of interpolation valid in the target block. Only
the axes programmed in the target block are
moved.
 With approach:
It is used to be able to approach the contour in any
circumstance. The end position of the block prior to
the target block is found with "CYCLE START".
The program runs in the same way as in normal
program processing.

Without calculation:
 For a quick search in the main program. Calcula-
tions will not be performed during the block
search, i.e. the calculation is skipped up to the
target block. All settings required for execution
have to be programmed from the target block
(e.g. feedrate, spindle speed, etc.).
Pressing the VSK 3 “Higher level“ changes the

program level to one level higher.
Pressing the VSK 4 “Lower level“ changes the pro-

gram level to one level lower.
By pressing the VSK 5 “Search for text“ the

“Search” window opens. After entering the search
direction in the “Direction” field and the search text
in the “Text” field and by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”
the search run starts. After a successful search
you can search for the same search parameter
again, by pressing the VSK 8 “Continue search”.
The search can be cancelled by pressing the VSK 7
“Cancel”. A new search run with new search pa-
rameters can be initiated with the VSK 4 “Search”.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Interrupt point” the pro-

gram that was interrupted before, by pressing the
“RESET” key, will be executed again.
By pressing the VSK 7 “Search pointer“ you can

jump directly to a desired part of the program.
The following options are available in a list in the
“Search pointer” window:
 Program
The name of the currently loaded program is
automatically entered
 Ext.
File extension
 P
Pass counter: If a program section is performed
several times, you can enter the number of the
pass here at which processing is to be continued
 Line
Is automatically filled for an interruption point

Section 5 Block search
 Type
 N no.: Block number
 Label: Jump label
 Text: Text string
 Subprg.: Subprogram call
 Line: Line number
 Search target
Search target point in the program at which ma-
chining is to start
By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” the “Search” window

closes.
5.3 Starting a block search
1. A desired program is selected and the machining

was discontinued with pressing “RESET” or
“CYCLE STOP“ or the control unit is generally in
RESET state.
2. In the operating mode “AUTO“ and the operating

area “Machine” press the HSK 5 “Block search”.
For further steps see below:
Simple search target definition:
1. – 2. Steps 1 and 2 (see above).
3. Place the cursor on a particular program block.

- OR -
Press the VSK 5 "Search for text", select the
search direction, enter the search text and confirm
with the VSK 8 "OK".
4. Press the VSK 1 “Start search“.
The search starts.

Your specified search mode will be taken into ac-
count (indicated in the upper blue title bar of the
search target window). The current block will be
displayed and marked in the "Program" window as
soon as the target is found.
5. If the located target (for example, when searching

via text) does not correspond to the program block,
press the "Start search" softkey again until you find
your target.
6. Press the "CYCLE START"-key twice.

Processing is continued from the defined position.

Notes :
Interruption point as search target:
1. - 2. Steps 1 and 2 (see above).
3. Press the VSK 6 “Interrupt point“
The interruption point is loaded.
4. If the VSK 3 "Higher level" and the VSK 4 "Lower

level" are available, use these to change the pro-
gram level.
5. Press the VSK 1 "Start search".
The search starts.

The specified search mode will be taken into ac-
search target window).
The search screen closes.

The current block will be displayed and marked in
the "Program" window as soon as the target is
found.
6. Press the "CYCLE START"-key on the machine

control panel (MCP) twice.
The execution will continue from the interruption

point.
Search target via search pointer:
Steps 1 and 2 (see above).
3. Press the VSK 7 “Search pointer”.
The “Search pointer” window opens.
4. Enter the full path of the program as well as the

subprograms, if required, in the input fields.
5. Press the VSK 1 “Start search”.
The search starts.

The specified search mode will be taken into ac-
search target window).
The search screen closes.

The current block will be displayed and marked in
the "Program" window as soon as the target is
found.
6 Press the "CYCLE START" key on the machine

control panel twice.
Processing is continued from the defined location.

Section 6 Simultaneous recording
Notes : 6.1 Selecting the function “Simultaneous recording”
Pressing the HSK 1.7 “Simult. Record.“ opens the

simultaneous recording window.
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically dis-
play the execution of the program on the screen to monitor the result of the
programming. You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run
feedrate to influence the speed of execution.
Simultaneous record can also be turned on, if machining is already run-
ning. You can also use simultaneous recording during machining of a
workpiece. This helps if the view towards the inside of the cabin is ob-
structed by coolant. In each different view of the “Simultaneous recording”
window you can adjust the view by using the blue cursor keys and zoom in
or out by using the plus (“+”) and minus (“-”) keys on the keyboard.
The traversing paths of the tool in the “Simultaneous recording” window
are displayed in different colours: red for rapid traverse and green for feed
motion.
The following softkeys, each representing a different view on the simulated
workpiece, are available on the vertical softkey bars.

By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Top view” the work
piece will be shown in a plan view from the top.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “3D view“ the work piece

will be shown in a 3-D view.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views“ the verti-

cal softkey bar 3 opens with options to change to
different views of the workpiece (see section 6.3).

Simultaneous recording Section 6
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the vertical soft-

key bar 4 opens (see section 6.4 in this module).
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Extend” on the operator

panel the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar 2 will
be shown.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Back” you switch back to

the main screen of the operating area “Machine” in
the operating mode “AUTO”.
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Show tool path” the ani-

mated path display that follows the programmed
tool path of the selected program is shown on the
screen. Press this softkey again to turn off the func-
tion. The traversing paths are shown in two different
colours: red colour for rapid traverse and green col-
our for feed motion.
By pressing the VSK 2.2 “Delete tool path” all tool

paths so far generated, including tool paths gener-
ated in the background, are deleted.
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Blank“ the “Blank input”

window opens. Here, the zero offset, the form and
the dimensions of the blank can be entered,.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ on the operator

panel you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
6.3 Vertical softkey bar 3 (from VSK 1.5 “Further views“)

By pressing the VSK “2 windows“ the screen is
split into two different views of the workpiece. The 2
-windowed view contains a side view (left-hand win-
dow) and a front view (right-hand window) of the
workpiece. The viewing direction is always from the
front to the cutting surface even if machining is to
be performed from behind or from the back side.
The active view is shown with a white background.
You can switch between both windows by pressing
the “NEXT WINDOW” key on the keyboard.
6.4 Vertical softkey bar 4 (from VSK 1.6 “Details“)

By pressing the VSK 4.1 “Autozoom“ the work-
piece will be aligned in an optimal way on the
screen, so that it fits the whole window.
By pressing the VSK 4.2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in to
magnify the graphical representation of the work-
piece in the window. Alternatively you can press the
plus (“+”) key on the number block of the keyboard.
Section 6 Simultaneous recording
By pressing the VSK 4.3 “Zoom -“ you zoom out of

the window to reduce the graphical representation
of the workpiece.
Alternatively you can press the minus (“-”) key on
the number block of the keyboard.
By pressing the VSK 4.4 “Zoom” a zoom window in

the shape of a right angled frame is placed on the
screen.
With the VSK “Zoom +” and the VSK “Zoom -” you
can increase or decrease the size of the right an-
gled frame and therefore the zoom-factor. Alter-
natively you can use the plus (“+”) or minus (“-”) key
on the keyboard. The blue cursor keys on the key-
board are used to pan the frame on the screen, ad-
justing the fragment you wish to magnify. After
pressing the VSK 8 “OK” the screen will be zoomed
in to the extend of the frame window. You can exit
the Zoom function with the Softkey “Cancel”
By pressing the VSK 4.5 “Rotate view” the vertical

softkey bar 5 opens (see section 6.5).

6.5 Vertical softkey bar 5 (from VSK 4.5 “Rotate view“)
By pressing the VSK 5.1 the workpiece will be

turned right around its own vertical centre line.

turned left around its own vertical centre line.

turned upwards around its own horizontal centre
line.

turned downwards around its own horizontal centre
line.

turned left (counter clockwise) around the centre of
the screen.

turned right (clockwise) around the centre of the
screen.
By pressing the VSK 5.8 „Back“ on the operator


Simultaneous recording Section 6
Notes :
6.6 Simultaneous recording of a program run
Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece
1. Load a program in the operating mode “AUTO”.
2. Press the HSK 1.4 “Prog. cntrl.“ and activate the

checkboxes "PRT No axis motion" and "DRY Dry
run feedrate".
The program is executed without axis movement.
The programmed feedrate is replaced by a dry run
feedrate.
-OR-
Let the “DRY Dry run feedrate” box unchecked.
Simultaneous recording is performed with the pro-

grammed feedrate.
3. Press the HSK 7 “Simultan. record“.

The “Simultaneous recording” window opens.
4. Press the “CYCLE START” key on the machine con-

trol panel (MCP).
The execution of the program on the machine is
started and displayed graphically on the screen.
5. Press “CYCLE STOP” to stop machining and the

HSK 7 "Simultan. record" again to close the
“Simultaneous recording” window.
Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
1. Load a program in the operating mode “AUTO”.
2. Press the HSK 7 “Simultan. record“.

The “Simultaneous recording” window opens.
3. Press the “CYCLE START”-key on the machine con-

trol panel (MCP).
The machining of the workpiece is started and
graphically displayed on the screen.
4. Press the “CYCLE STOP”-key and the HSK 7

"Simultan. record" again to stop the recording and
to close the “Simultaneous recording” window.

Section 7 Program correction
Notes :
As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the controller,
program execution is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the
alarm line.
Depending on the state of the control, you can make the following correc-
tions using the “Program correction” function:
 STOP mode: Only program lines that have not yet been executed can
be edited.
 RESET state: All program lines can be edited
Note:
The "Program correction" function is only available for part programs in
the NC memory, not for external execution (e.g. on USB media).
7.1 Selecting the function “Program correction”
By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Prog. Corr.“ the program

editor window opens for correction of the program.
See modules B600 and B604 “Basics of program-

ming”.
A precise description of the vertical softkeys can be found in the modules

B600 and B604 “Basics of programming”.

Program correction Section 7
Notes :
7.3 Correcting a program
1. The program to be corrected is in the STOP or

RESET mode.
2. Press the HSK 8 “Prog. corr.“.

The selected program is opened in the editor.
The program pre-processing and the current block
are displayed. The current block is also updated in
the running program, but not the displayed program
section, i.e. the current block moves out of the dis-
played program section.
If a subprogram is executed, it is not opened auto-
matically.
3. Make the necessary corrections.
4. Press the HSK 8 "NC Execute".

The system switches back to the "Machine" operat-
ing area and selects operating mode "AUTO".
5. Press the “CYCLE START“ key on the machine con-

trol panel (MCP).
The program execution is resumed.
Note:
Leaving the program editor via the VSK 2.7 “EXIT“,
opens the operating area “Program Manager”.

Section 8 Handwheel
Notes : 8.1 Selecting the function “Handwheel“
 Channel machine axes (X1, Y1, Z1, Z2)
wheel on the machine. The axis-assignment can be made like described
in the module B568 - "Basic operations". Besides there is the possibility to
assign an axis directly to a handwheel using the VSK 1 - 8.
tion 3.2 "Parameter selection. Generally you can switch through all avail-
board.
Geometry axes



Handwheel Section 8
Machine axes:
By pressing the VSK 8 "Back" you can close the
window for the “Handwheel”
1. In the operating mode “AUTO“ select the operating

area “Machine”, then press the HSK 2.6
“Handwheel” in the extended horizontal softkey bar.
2. The “Handwheel” window opens. A field for axis as-
signment will be offered for every connected hand-
wheel.
4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired
axis (e.g. "X").
- OR -
To open the "Axis" selection box using the "INSERT"
key, navigate to the desired axis, and press the
"INPUT" key. Selecting an axis also activates the
handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to handwheel no. 1
and is activated immediately).
5. Press the HSK 2.6 "Handwheel" again.
- OR -
Press the VSK 8 "Back" .
8.4 Deactivating the handwheel
The cursor must be placed on that handwheel whose axis-assignment

should be cancelled. By pressing the corresponding axis-softkey again
the assignment is cancelled. Alternatively with pressing the “INSERT”-
key, the selection menu with all available axes can be opened.
By using the blue “cursor-up”- and “cursor-down”-keys on the keyboard,
switch to the empty field on top of the menu and press one of the yellow
"INPUT"-keys on the keyboard. The empty value will be accepted.

Section 9 Synchronized actions
Notes : 9.1 Selecting the function “Synchronized actions”
By pressing the HSK 2.7 “Synchronized actions”

the following mask will be shown on the screen:
You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in

the “Synchronized actions” window. You get a list with all currently active
synchronized actions.
In this list the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same
form as in the part program.
You can see the status of the synchronized action in the “Status” column.
 Waiting
 Active
 Blocked
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer„s documentation for further in formation
about the programmed synchronized actions.

Settings Section 10
10.1 Selecting the function “Settings” Notes :
By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Settings” the following

input mask with the settings for automatic mode is
shown on the screen.

By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover inch" the
measuring units are converted from the metric to
the imperial (inch) dimension system. New values
have to be entered in inches. By pressing this key
the key function switches to "Changeover metric".
By pressing the VSK 5 "Changeover metric" the

measuring units are converted from the imperial
(inch) to the metric dimension system. New values
have to be metric. By pressing this key the key
function switches to "Changeover inch".
Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or

cancel by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.


Section 10 Settings
Notes :
10.3 Parameters for "Settings for automatic mode"
In the “Settings for automatic mode“ window all configurations for auto-
matic operation can be done.
Parameter Unit Meaning

Dry run feedrate [mm/ The feedrate defined here replaces the pro-
DRY min] grammed feedrate during execution if you
have selected „DRY dry run feedrate“ under
program control.
Reduced rapid trav- [%] This value entered here reduces the rapid
erse RG0 traverse to the entered percentage value if
you have selected “RG0 reduced rapid trav-
erse” under program control.
Display result of Using a MMC command, you can display

measurement measurement results in a part program:
When the control reaches the command, it

automatically jumps into the “Machine” oper-
ating area and the window with the measure-
ment results is displayed.
The window with the measurement results is

opened by pressing the softkey
“Measurement result”.

B523 Operating area “Parameter”
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to use the tool management with the Sinumerik Operate. You learn about
the programming philosophy of the adjustable and programmable work offset, the function of the user
variables and how to modify the “working area limitation”.
In the tool management area all tool data relevant for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction,
tool wear and magazine configuration) can be viewed and modified.
The tool management contains the following sub-functions:
 the tool list
 the tool wear
 the magazine management
In addition to these sub-functions a machine specific list can be configured by the machine manufac-
turer. Refer to the machine manufacturers documentation.
In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable
work offset (WO).
The working range in which a tool can proceed, can be restricted in all axes with the function
“Working area limitation”.
Hereby safety zones can be installed in the workspace, where tool movement is prohibited.
This function limits the traversing area of the axes, in addition to the limit switches.
Content:
Operating area “Parameter“
Tool list
Tool wear
Magazine management
Zero offset basics
Work offset
User variable
Setting data
B523
B523

B523
Operating area Parameter: Description

Operating area
Parameter:
In the tool management area all tool data relevant START
for machining (e.g., tool length, radius correction,
tool wear and magazine configuration) can be
viewed and modified. Operating
The tool management contains the following sub- area
functions: “Parameter“
 the tool list

 the tool wear
Tool list
 the magazine management
In addition to these sub-functions a machine spe-

cific list can be configured by the machine manu-
facturer. Refer to the machine manufacturers Tool wear
documentation.
In the "Work offset" menu the linear and rotational
offsets can be viewed and modified in the settable
work offset (WO).
The working range in which a tool can proceed, Magazine
can be restricted in all axes with the function management
“Working area limitation”.
Hereby safety zones can be installed in the work-
space, where tool movement is prohibited.
This function limits the traversing area of the axes, Zero offset
in addition to the limit switches. basics
Work offset
User variable
Setting data
Operating area
Parameter:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Operating area “Parameter“
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the operating area “Parameter”
In the Operation area “Parameter” you have a choice of selecting between
various lists (e.g. Tool list, tool wear, magazine list, offsets, user variables
and setting data). For example in the tool management area, all tools and
if configured also the magazine locations are being displayed. Both lists
display the same tools in the same order. When switching between lists,
the position of the cursor on a particular tool in the current screen is carried
over to the same tool in a new screen. The lists differ from each other by
the displayed parameters and the Softkey functions.
Switching between lists is a specific change from one topic to the next.
 Tool list (HSK 1): All parameters and functions required to create and
set up tools are displayed.
 Tool wear (HSK 2): All parameters and functions that are required dur-
ing operation, e.g. wear and monitoring functions, are listed here.
 Magazine (HSK 3): Magazine and magazine location-related parame-
ters and functions for the tools and magazine locations are listed here.
The operating area “Parameter“ can be opened from every operating

modes (“JOG”, “MDA”, “AUTO”).
Press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.

The operating area “Parameter“ respectively the
“Tool list” opens directly.
- OR -
Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator
panel. The yellow horizontal and vertical softkey bar
opens.
Then switch to the operating area “Parameter” by

pressing the HSK 2 “Parameter” on the operator
panel.
The operating area “Parameter” opens, with the

“Tool list”, “Tool wear”, “Magazine”, “Work offset”,
“User variables” and the “Setting data”.
These functions are made available in the following

described horizontal softkey bar.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar (HSK)

By pressing the HSK 1 “Tool list” the tool list win-

dow opens.
See section 3 “Tool list”.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Tool wear“ the tool wear
list opens.
See section 4 “Tool wear”.

Tool list Section 3
By pressing the HSK 4 “Magazine“ the Magazine

management is opened.
See section 5 “Magazine“.
By pressing the HSK 5 “Work offset“ a list with all

Work offsets is opened.
See section 7 “Work offset”.
By pressing the HSK 6 “User variable“ a list with all

R variables is opened.
See section 8 “User variable”.
By pressing the HSK 8 “Setting data” a list with all

setting data is opened.
See section 9 “Setting data”.
3.1 Selecting the “Tool list”
By pressing the HSK 1 “Tool list“ the “Tool list“

window opens.
(Note the screen below.)
In the tool list all parameters and functions that are required to create and
set up the tools are displayed, regardless weather the tools are assigned
or not assigned to a magazine location. Each tool is uniquely identified by
the location number, the tool name and the replacement tool number.
The most common tools and probes for turning, drilling and milling are
offered in the tool list.
Geometrical and technological tool data can be assigned to each tool type.
Depending on the tool type different correction data are necessary.

Section 3 Tool list

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Tool measure” the
“Measuring tool” window opens.
(See section 3.7 in this module)
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New tool” a new tool can
be created. This function is only available, if the
cursor is positioned on a filed that does not yet has
a tool assigned to it.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Edges” the vertical soft-
key bar for assigning new cutting edges and delet-
ing existing cutting edges opens to the right side of
the screen. If a tool has several cutting edges each
edge gets its own set of correction data.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Further data” more infor-
mation about a tool will be displayed. This function
is only available for tools which have additional in-
formation.
(See section 3.5, page 17 in this module)
By pressing the VSKs 1.5 ”Unload” or “Load” the

actual selected tool wil be unloaded from or loaded
to the magazine. Unloaded tools are being dis-
played on the bottom of the magazine list.
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool” the selected
tool will be deleted from the tool list.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Magazine selection”

Softkey multiple times you can jump between buffer
location (spindle and gripper), Magazine and NC-
memory (unloaded tools) and back to the buffer lo-
cation. The cursor is always positioned at the be-
ginning of each group.
panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens on
the right hand side of the screen.
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Sort” you can sort the
tools in the tool list according to the following crite-
ria:
 Magazine
 Name
 Type
 T-Number
The suitable softkeys are offered in the vertical soft-
key bar.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
Pressing the VSK 2.2 “Filter” opens the screen to
set the filter options.
Pressing the VSK 2.4 „Details“ opens a new softkey
bar with the functions
 Tool Data
 Cutting edge data
 Monitoring data
The details of the tool which is selected by the cur-
sor position are listed in the screen.
Pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ on the operator panel
you switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1.
Pressing the VSK 3.3 “Tool data” opens the screen

“Tool details - all parameters”.
By pressing the VSK 3.5 “Cutting edge data” the cut-

ting edge data for the selected edge is being dis-
played.
In case of tools with several cutting edges you can
switch with VSK 3.1 “Cutting edge +” or VSK 3.2
“Cutting edge - ” between the individual cutting
edges.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
By pressing the VSK 3.6 “Monitoring data” you can

select the monitoring data of the selected tool.
In case of tools with several cutting edges you can

switch with VSK 3.1 “Cutting edge +” or VSK 3.2
“Cutting edge - ” between the individual cutting
edges.
Alternately you can also navigate with the cursor keys “cursor left” and
“cursor right” between the masks “Tool data”, “Cutting edge data” and
“Monitoring data”.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3.3 Tool parameters
Column header Meaning
Loc. Magazine/location number
Spindle location as an icon
Location for gripper 1 and 2 as icons:

(Applies only when a spindle with dual gripper is
used.)
Magazine number:
If more than one magazine is available, first the loca-
tion number and then the magazine number is dis-
played separated by a slash. E.g.:
Location number 1 in magazine 1
Location number 1 in magazine 2
Tools in the tool list not assigned to a magazine are

displayed without a location number at the end of the
window.
You can manage tools that are not changed auto-
matically, by hands (hand tools).
If the orange selection cursor is placed in the type

field on a tool icon you can change the tool type by
pressing the “SELECT”-key.
Type Tool type

Tools can be created on a free tool position or by pressing the VSK 1.2
“New tool” in the tool list. The following tool windows can be opened by
pressing the corresponding vertical softkeys.
Press the VSK 1

“Favourites” to open the
“New tool - favourites”
list. In the favourite list
the most often used tools
are saved as favourites
for a fast access.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
Press the VSK 2

“Cutters 100-199” to
open the “New tool -
milling cutter” list.
A list of all available
milling cutters opens.
Press the VSK 3

“Drill 200-299” to
open the “New tool -
drill” list.
A list with all available
Drilling tools opens.
Press the VSK 4

“Turntools 500-599”
to open the “New tool
- turning tools” list.
A list with all available
Turning tools opens.
Press the VSK 5

“Spec.tool 700-900”
to open the “New tool
– special tools” list.
A list with all special
tools opens.
Press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to reject the tool selection

and to jump back to the “Tool list” window in the op-
erating area “Parameter”.
Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to accept the selected tool
and to jump back to the “Tool list” window in the op-
The selected tool will be loaded into the tool list

Tool list Section 3
Column header Meaning (continuation) Notes :
Tool name Name of the tool:

To identify a tool you can enter a tool name as text
or a T-number. If a new tool is created, tool names
are pre-assigned as default.
ST Replacement tool number:

(for replacement tool strategy) As default “1” is being
entered here. If a new tool with the same name, as a
already existing tool, is being created, then the new
tool gets the Index “2”. This way it is possible to de-
fine a replacement tool.
D Cutting edge number:

For tools with multiple cutting edges, each tool re-
ceives it’s own correction data field. Up to 9 edges per
tool can be managed. The max. Number depends
upon the control configuration.
Length X/Z Tool length:

Geometry length of the tool in X and Z direction.
Radius/diameter Tool radius/diameter

 Radius of the cutting edge in case of turning tools
Type 500 - 560
 Radius or diameter in case of rotating tools
 Radius or diameter of the ball in case of probes
type 580 and 711
Reference direction Holder angle for roughing and finishing tools
The reference direction for the holder angle specifies
the cut direction.
N Number of teeth:
 for all milling tools
 with the exception of saw type 151
Holder angle Holder angle of turning tools for

 Roughing tool type 500
 Finishing tool type 510
(refer to the cutting tip angle)
Width Width of
 Side mill type 150
 Saw type 151
Loc width Width of the cutting edge of
 Plunge cutter type 520
 Cutting tool type 530
Tip angle or Pitch  Tip angle for

Type 200 - twist drill
Type 220 - center drill
Type 230 - countersink
 Pitch for
Type 240 - tap

Section 3 Tool list
Notes : Column header Meaning (continuation)
Drill rad. Drill radius for

 Rotary drill type 560
(Holder angle and cutting edge angle are set by de-
fault settings)
Cutting edge angle Cuttting edge angle for turning tools
 Roughing tools type 500
 Finishing tools type 510
(refer to holder angle)
Loc. len Tip length for
 Roughing tools type 500
 Finishing tools type 510
 Plunge cutter type 520
The tip length is required for displaying the tools dur-
ing the simulation of the program processing.
Direction of spindle rotation
 Turning tools and non-driven tools:
direction of the main spindle
 Powered tools for milling and boring:
direction of the tool spindle
Coolant 1 and 2 can be switched off and switched on.
3.4 Icons in the toolbar and their meaning
Icons Meaning
Red X The tool is disabled
Yellow triangle The pre-warning limit has been reached

pointing downward
Yellow triangle The tool is in a special state

pointing upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tool
tip will provide a brief description
Green frame The tool is preselected.
Magazine/location number:
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the

change position
Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the

loading position
Red X The magazine location is disabled

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3.5 Additional data
The following tool types require geometry data that is not included in the
tool list display.
Tool type Additional parameters
111 Conical ball Corner radius

head cutter
121 End mill with Corner radius

corner rounding
130 Angle head Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)

cutter Wear length (Δlength X, Δlength Y, Δlength Z)
Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z)
V (direction vector 1 - 6)
Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
131 Angle head Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)

cutter with Corner radius
corner rounding Wear length (Δlength X, Δlength Y, Δlength Z)
Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z)
V (direction vector 1 - 6)
Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
140 Face milling External radius

Tool angle
155 Bevel cutter Taper angle
156 Bevel cutter Corner radius

with corner Taper angle
rounding
157 Conical die Taper angle

milling cutter
Note:
You can use the configuration file to specify the data to be displayed for
specific tool types in the "Additional Data" window.
The VSK “Further data” is only available for those tool types which will
support this function.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes : 3.6 New tool
In the window “New tool - favourites” you can choose a new tool from a
list of favourite tools (VSK 1 “Favourites”). If the desired tool type should
not be available in the Favourite list, you can simply select a tool from a
group of cutting, drilling, turning or special tools by pressing the corre-
sponding VSKs 2 - 5.
3.6.1 Selecting the function “New tool”
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New tool“ the

“New tool - favourites“ window opens.
3.6.2 Vertical softkey bar

For the softkeys see section 3.3.
3.6.3 Creating a new tool
1. In the operating mode “JOG“, “MDA“ or “AUTO“ se-

lect the operating area “Parameter” by pressing the
“MENU SELECT“-key on the keyboard and the
HSK 2 “Parameter”.
1. -OR-
Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the key-

board, to get directly to the tool list.
2. Press the VSK 1 “Tool list” to open the tool man-

agement screen.
The “Tool list” window opens directly.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3. Place the cursor in the tool list at the position where
the new tool should be stored. For this, you can se-
lect an empty magazine location or the NC tool
memory outside of the magazine. You may also
place the cursor on an existing tool in the NC tool
memory region. Data from the displayed tool will not
be overwritten, but the new tool is created below.
4. Press the VSK 1.2 “New tool“
The "New tool - favourites" window opens.
- OR -
5. If you want to create a tool that is not in the
“Favourites” list, press the VSK 2 "Cutters 100-199",
VSK 3 "Drill 200-299" or the VSK 5 "Spec. tool 700-
900" .
The corresponding tool window opens.
6. Select the tool by placing the cursor on the corre-
sponding tool type.
7. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to create the new tool.
The tool is added to the tool list with a predefined

name. If the cursor is located on an empty magazine
location in the tool list, then the tool is loaded to this
magazine location.
Multiple loading points:

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the
"Select loading point" window appears when a tool is created directly in
an empty magazine location or when the "Load" softkey is pressed.
Select the required load point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK" or abort
with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
Additional data:
If configured proper, the "New tool" window opens after the required tool
has been selected and confirmed with the VSK 8 "OK".
You can define the following data in this window:

 Names
 Tool location type
 Size of tool

Note:
For further information see the commissioning manual of the Sinumerik
Operate.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
3.7 Tool measure
You can measure the tool offset data for the individual tools directly from
the tool list.
Note:
Tool measurement is only applicable with an active tool.
3.7.1 Selecting the function “Tool measure”
With an active tool selected press the VSK 1.1 “Tool

measure” to switch to the “Length manual” window
in the operating mode “JOG”.
For the softkeys see module B520 “Operating mode JOG“, section 6.3.
3.7.3 Measuring a tool
1. Either press the “OFFSET“-key on the keyboard or

press “MENU SELECT“ on the operator panel, then
the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 1 “Tool list” to
switch to the tool list.
-OR-
board, to get directly to the tool list.
2. Press the VSK 1 “Tool list” to open the tool man-
agement screen.
The “Tool list” window opens directly.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3. Select the active tool that you want to measure in
the tool list and press the VSK 1.1 "Tool measure".
You jump to the "JOG" operating mode and the tool
to be measured is entered in the "T" field in the
"Length manual" screen.
4. Select the cutting edge number “D” and the replace-
ment tool number “ST”.
5. Approach the workpiece in Z direction, scratch it with

a rotating spindle and enter the set position of the
workpiece edge in the “Z0” field.
6. Press the VSK 7 "Set length".

The tool length is calculated automatically and
entered in the tool list.
3.8 Managing cutting edges
In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of off-
set data is assigned to each cutting edge. For every tool up to 9 edges can
be installed. No gaps in the assignment of edges are allowed. If a tool has
3 cutting edges then edge numbers 1 to 3 have to be assigned.
Tool cutting edges that are not required can be deleted.
3.8.1 Selecting the function “Edges”
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Edges“ the following verti-

cal softkey bar opens on the right hand side of the
“Tool list”- window.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
Pressing the VSK 1 “New cutting edge” installs a

new cutting edge for a tool in the tool list.
Pressing the VSK 2 “Delete cutting edge” deletes a

selected cutting edge of a tool.
3.8.3 Installing a new cutting edge

2. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for

which you would like to store more cutting edges.
Press the VSK 1.3 “Edges”.
3. Press the VSK1 “New cutting edge”.
A new data set is stored in the list.

The cutting edge number is incremented by 1 and
the offset data is assigned to the values of the cut-
ting edge on which the cursor is positioned.
4. Enter the offset data for the new cutting edge.
5. Repeat the steps 3 - 4 if you wish to create more tool

edge offset data.
3.8.4 Deleting a cutting edge

the HSK 2 “Parameter”,
2. Then press the HSK 1 “Tool list” to switch to the

tool list.
3. In the tool list, position the cursor on the tool for

which you would like to delete cutting edges,
then press the VSK 1.3 “Edges”.
4. Press the VSK 2 “Delete cut. edge”.
The data set is deleted from the list.
The first tool cutting edge cannot be deleted.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3.9 Delete tool
To keep the tool list short and clear, unused tools can be deleted from the
tool list.
3.9.1 Selecting the function “Delete tool”
Pressing the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool” the “Delete tool”

dialogue window opens.
3.9.2 Deleting a tool

2. In the tool list window place the cursor on the tool

that you would like to delete.
Press the VSK 1.6 “Delete tool“.
A safety prompt is displayed asking for confirmation.
3. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to delete tho tool or press the
VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort.
The tool is deleted from the tool list.
If the tool is in a magazine location, it is unloaded
and then deleted.
Several load points:

"Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 6 "Delete
tool".
Select the required load point and press the VSK 8 "OK" to unload and de-
lete the tool.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
3.10 Loading or unloading a tool
You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list.
When a tool is loaded, it is taken to a magazine location. When it is
unloaded, it is removed from the magazine and stored in the tool list.
When you are loading a tool, the application automatically suggests an
empty location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location.
You can unload tools from the magazine that you are not using at present.
The Sinumerik Operate then automatically saves the tool data in the tool
list in the NC memory outside the magazine.
Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the
tool data into the corresponding magazine location again. Then the same
tool data does not have to be entered more than once.
3.10.1 Selecting the function “Load” or “Unload”.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Load” the following “Load

on ...” window opens.
The softkey is only active if the cursor is located on a
tool that is not assigned to the magazine.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Unload“ the selected tool

will be unloaded from the magazine. The softkey is
only active if the cursor is placed on a tool that is as-
signed to a magazine location.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3.10.2 Loading a tool

2. In the tool list press the VSK 1.5 “Load”.
The “Load on ...” window opens.
The field “... loc." is reallocated with the first empty

place in the magazine.
3. Press the VSK 8 “OK“ to accept the suggested loca-

tion number.
- OR -
3. Insert another location number and press the VSK 8

“OK”.
- OR -
3. Press the VSK 4 “Spindle“.
The tool is loaded into the specified magazine loca-

tion or spindle.
Several magazines:
If you have configured several magazines, the "Load on ..." window ap-
pears after pressing the VSK 1.5 "Load".
If you do not want to use the suggested empty location, then enter your
desired magazine and magazine location. Confirm your selection with the
VSK 8 "OK".
Several loading points:

"Select loading point" window appears after pressing the VSK 1.5
"Load". Select the required loading point and confirm with the VSK 8 "OK".

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
3.10.3 Unloading a tool

2. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to

unload from the magazine and press the VSK 1.5
"Unload".
3. Select the required loading point in the "Select load-

ing point” window.
4. Confirm the selection with pressing the VSK 8 “OK“

or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel“.
3.11 Selecting a magazine
You can directly select the buffer memory, the magazine, or the NC mem-
ory.
Press the VSK 1.7 “Magazine selection”.

If there is only one magazine, you will move from
one area to the next (i.e. from the buffer to the
magazine, from the magazine to the NC memory
and from the NC memory back to the buffer) each
time you press the softkey. The cursor is positioned
at the beginning of the magazine each time.
If there is more than one magazine, the "Magazine

selection" window opens. Position the cursor on the
desired magazine in this window and press the
"Go to" softkey.
The cursor jumps directly to the beginning of the
specified magazine.
Magazines can be hidden in the magazine list:

Uncheck the checkbox alongside the corresponding magazine in the
“Magazine selection” window, by pressing the “SELECT”-key on
the keyboard.
Note:
The magazine selection behaviour with multiple magazines can be config-
ured in different ways.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
3.12 Sort
With the help of this function “Sort” you can sort and view the tools in the
tool list depending on different sorting criteria.
3.12.1 Selecting the function “Sort”
Pressing the VSK 2.1 “Sort“ opens the following

softkeys in the vertical softkey bar.

The tools in the tool list are sorted numerical by their
positions in the magazines.
Tools with identical magazine location will be sorted
by tool type and tools of the same type are sorted
depending on their radius value.
The tools are sorted alphabetical by name.
The tools are sorted by tool type.

Similar types will be sorted by radius.
The tools are sorted by tool number.
3.12.3 Sorting tools
1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel,

then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 1 “Tool list”
to switch to the tool list.
The “Tool list” window opens.
2. Press the VSK 2.1 “Sort”.
A vertical softkey bar with all available sort criteria

opens to the right (see section 3.12.2).
3. In order to sort the tool list depending on the “tool

name”, “magazine location”, “tool type” or “T-number”
press the corresponding softkey (VSK 1 - 4)
(see section 3.12.2).
The tool list will be sorted following the chosen search

criteria.

Section 3 Tool list
Notes :
3.13 Filter
The filter function allows you to filter-out tools with specific properties in the
tool management lists.
3.13.1 Selecting the function tool “Filter”

Pressing the VSK 2.2 “Filter” the “Filter” dialogue
window for “the tool list”, “tool wear” and “magazine”
list is opened. Following selection window is dis-
played.
Filter criteria:
Only display the first Only tools with the cutting edge number D1 are
cutting edge listed.
Only tools that are Only tools that are ready to use are listed.
ready to use
Only tools that have Only tools that have reached the pre-warning limit
reached the pre- are displayed.
alarm limit
Only locked tools Only locked tools are displayed.
Note: You have the option of selecting several criteria. You

Multiple selection will receive an appropriate message if conflicting fil-
ter options are selected.

Tool list Section 3
Notes :
The following shows the filter setting “only tools with pre-warning limit
reached”.

Section 4 Tool wear
Notes : 4.1 Selecting the function “Tool wear“
All parameters and functions that are required during operation are con-
tained in the tool wear list.
Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can meas-
ure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. The Sinumerik Operate then
takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or ra-
dius compensation.
This ensures a consistent level of accuracy during workpiece machining.
You can automatically monitor the tools' working times via the workpiece
count, tool life or wear.
In addition, you can disable tools when you no longer wish to use them.
Note:
Depending on the control configuration, the input of the tool wear can be
additive. Please refer to the machine tool manufacturer documentation.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Tool wear“ the “Tool wear”

screen input mask opens.
By pressing the VSK 1 “Sort” and “Filter” you can

sort and filter the tools in the tool list according to
different parameters.
(See section 3.12 and 3.13)
By pressing the VSK 6 “Reactivate“ locked tools,
and tools that have reached their pre-warning limit
can be made operational again.
(See section 4.7)

Tool wear Section 4
4.3 Parameters for “Tool wear” Notes :
Parameter Meaning
Location Magazine/location number:

(Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list”)
Type Tool type:

(See section 3.3 “Tool list”)
Tool name Tool name:

(See section 3.3 “Tool list”)
ST Replacement tool number:

D Cutting edge number

ΔLength X Wear of length in X direction and Z direction

ΔLength Z are entered in these fields.
ΔRadius Radius wear
The Sinumerik Operate checks the entered values

whether they exceed an absolute or incremental
threshold or not.
The incremental threshold is the maximum difference
between present wear and new wear.
The absolute threshold is the maximum total wear
value that can be entered.
Note:
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
T  Tool monitoring by tool life:

With the tool life T (Time), the service life for tool
with machining federate is monitored in minutes.
C  Tool monitoring by count
With the count C, the number of workpieces ma-
chined by the tool is counted.
W*  Tool monitoring by wear
With wear W, the greatest value in the wear pa-
rameters ΔLength X, ΔLength Z, ΔRadius or ΔØ
in the wear list is monitored.
* The wear monitoring is configured via a machine
data item.
Note:
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instruc-
tions.

Section 4 Tool wear
Notes : Parameter Meaning (continuation)
Tool life (T) Tool life
Quantity (C) Number of workpieces
Wear (W) Tool wear:

The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data
item. Please refer to the machine manufacturer`s in-
structions.
Prewar limit Prewarning limit:

Specification of the tool life, workpiece count or wear
at which a warning is displayed.
Set val Setpoint value for tool life, workpiece count, or wear.
Note:
If the adjusted rest life of the tool, quantity or the wear
is reached, the tool will be disabled.
This tool will not be selected for the next tool change.
If present, an adequate replacement tool will be used
instead.
The monitoring refers in each case to the selected
cutting edge.
It is possible to reactivate a disabled tool.
D Single tools can also be disabled by hand, if these
tools are not in use anymore or if the tools life ran off.
(The tool is disabled if the checkbox is activated).
4.4 Icons in the tool wear list and their meaning
(See section 3.3, Icons in the tool list, in this module)
4.5 Entering the tool wear or disabling a tool
1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator

panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 2
“Tool wear” to switch to the tool wear list.
2. Enter values for length, radius, setpoint, prewarning

and tool life.
- OR -
2. Activate the “D”-parameter checkbox for disabling
the tool manually.

Tool wear Section 4
Notes :
4.6 Sort and Filter
For the functions “Sort” and “Filter” in the tool list refer to the section 3.12
and 3.13 in this module.
4.7 Reactivating a tool
You can replace disabled tools or make them ready for re-use.
Prerequisite is, that the monitoring function must be active and a setpoint
is stored.
panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the HSK 2
“Tool wear” to switch to the tool wear list.
2. Position the cursor on the disabled tool which you

would like to reuse.
Press the VSK 6 "Reactivate".

The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the
new tool life workpiece count.
The disabled tool is active again.
Reactivating and positioning:

When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, the selected
tool's magazine location will also be positioned at a loading point.
You can exchange the tool.
Reactivation of all monitoring types:

When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all
the monitoring types set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation.
Note:
Refer to the machine manufacturer„s specifications.

Section 5 Magazine management
Notes : 5.1 Selecting the function “Magazine“
Tools are displayed with their magazine-related data in the magazine list.
Here, you can take specific actions relating to the magazines and the
magazine locations. Individual magazine locations can be location-coded
or disabled for existing tools.
By pressing the HSK 4 “Magazine“ the following

magazine list will be displayed on the screen.
In the magazine list, all magazine locations are shown.

It is indicated whether a magazine location is available, disabled or
occupied by a tool.
If a magazine location is defect, this location can be disabled.
If an oversized tool is inserted, which uses more than a half of the
neighbouring magazine locations, then the neighbouring magazine
locations will be disabled.
By pressing the VSK 5 “Relocate“ a tool can be

transferred from one magazine location to another
or, with pressing the VSK 4 “Spindle”, it can be
transferred to the spindle. The selected target loca-
tion must be confirmed with the VSK 8 “OK” or can
aborted with VSK 7 “Cancel”.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Position magazine“ you
can position magazine locations directly on the
loading point. (See section 5.6)
panel the extended vertical softkey bar 2 opens
with the functions “Sort”, “Filter” and “Details”
(see sections 3.12 and 3.13).

Magazine management Section 5
Notes :
5.3 Parameters for “Magazine”
Parameter Meaning
Loc. Number of the magazine location:
(Only display, see section 3.3 “Tool list“)
Type Tool type:
Tool name Tool name:
(See section 3.3 “Tool list“)
ST Sister tool:
D Edge number:
D Magazine location disabled
Z Oversized tool:
Marking a tool as oversized. The tool occupies two
half locations left, two half locations right, one half lo-
cation top and one half location bottom in a magazine.
Only tools that are not loaded yet can be marked as
oversized.
L Fixed location coding.

The tool is fixed to the magazine location.
5.4 Sorting and filtering tools
When you are working with many tools, with large magazines or several
magazines, it is useful to display the tools sorted according to different cri-
teria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.
For sorting tools in the magazine see section 3.12 and 3.13 in this module.

Section 5 Magazine management
Notes :
5.5 Relocate
Tools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine lo-
cation, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the maga-
zine in order to load them into a different location.
When you are relocating a tool, the application automatically suggests an
empty location.
You may also directly specify an empty magazine location.
5.5.1 Selecting the function “Relocate”

By pressing the VSK 5 “Relocate” depending on the
tool type following window opens.
5.5.2 Relocating a tool

panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the oper-
ating area “Parameter”.
board.
2. Press the HSK 4 “Magazine“.
The magazine window opens.
3. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to relo-
cate to a different magazine location.
4. Press the VSK 5 “Relocate”.
The “...move from location...to...” window opens.
The "... loc." field is initialized with the number of the

first empty magazine location.
5. Press the VSK 8 "OK" to relocate the tool to the sug-
gested location.

Magazine management Section 5
Notes :
- OR -
5. Enter the location number you require and press the

VSK 8 "OK".
Several magazines:
If you have set up several magazines, then the "...move from magazine...
location... to..." window appears after pressing the VSK 5 "Relocate" .
Select the desired magazine and location, and confirm your selection with
the VSK 8 "OK" to load the tool.
5.6 Positioning a magazine
You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” and the
HSK 4 “Magazine”.
Alternatively press the “OFFSET”-key on the
keyboard.
2. Place the cursor on the magazine location that you

want to position onto the load point.
3. Press the VSK 6 "Position magazine".
4. Select a loading point in the input mask.
The magazine location is positioned on the loading

point.
Several load points:

"Load Point Selection" window appears after pressing the VSK 6
"Position magazine".
Select the desired loading point in this window and confirm your selection
with the VSK 8 "OK" to position the magazine location at the loading point.

Section 6 Zero offset basics
Notes :
Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis
coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate
system (MCS). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is
based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system
(WCS ).
The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical.
The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in
accordance with the type of tool and the way it is clamped. This zero offset
is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combi-
nation of different offsets.
On the Sinumerik Operate, the position actual value display refers to the
SZS-coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active
tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.
The offsets are added as follows:
W
WCS
Transformation of coordinates
Tool offset SZS
Work offset fine
Work offset coarse
Base offset MCS

M
Base offset The base offset is a zero offset that is always active.
If you have not defined a base offset, its value will be
zero. You determine the base offset via "Measure
workpiece zero” .
See Module B520 - ”Operating mode JOG”, in Sinu-
merik Operate section “Set Work offset” and
“Measure workpiece zero”.
Zero offsets Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) con-
sists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call
the work offsets from any sequence program (coarse
and fine offsets are added together).
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in
the coarse offset,
and then store the offset that occurs when a new
workpiece is clamped between the old and the new
workpiece zero in the fine offset.

Zero offset basics Section 6
Notes :
Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manu-
facturer.
Note:
Also refer to the machine manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Coordinate You always program coordinate transformations for

transformations: a specific sequence program.
They are defined by:
 Offset
 Rotation
 Scaling
 Mirroring
These transformations can work as “new” or they

can work “additive” to the active zero point offset.
Total offset: The total offset is calculated from the sum of all off-
sets and coordinate transformations.

Section 7 Work offset
Notes : 7.1 Selecting the function “Work offset“
By pressing the HSK 5 “Work offset“. The Input

mask of the active work offsets is opened.
The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that
more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited
screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the VSK bar. Move the
orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on the key-
board to the left to reach the additional parameters.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Active“ for all installed axis
all current active offsets will be displayed, as well
as all active system offsets.
Fields in the work offset list with a light blue back-
ground can not be altered.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Overview” the active off-

sets and system offsets are displayed for all set-up
axes. Only fields with a white background can be
edited. (see section 7.4)
By pressing the VSK 3 “Base“ for all installed axis
the channel specific basic work offsets are dis-
played in coarse offset and fine offset.
The values can be changed directly in the “Work
offset - basic” window,

Work offset Section 7
By pressing the VSK 4 “G54...G57“ for all installed

axis the work offsets G54 to G57 are displayed in
coarse offset and fine offset.
offset - G54...G57” window.
By placing the cursor in an offset field in the work

offset list and pressing the VSK 7 “Details“ more
information (fine, coarse, scaling, shifting, mirroring)
about all installed axis for the selected offset type
will be displayed.
Inputs for coarse and fine offset, already entered,
are taken over or can be entered.
offset - details:...” window.
By pressing the VSK 7 “Details” the following softkeys in the vertical soft-
key bar open.
7.3 Vertical softkey bar “Details“

By pressing the VSK 1 “WO +“ within the selected
offset type (“Active“, “Base“, “G54...57“) you can
change to the next work offset in the work offset list
without changing back to the “Work offset” window
first.
By pressing the VSK 2 “WO -“ within the selected

offset type (“Active“, “Base“, G54...57“) you can
change to the previous work offset in the work off-
set list without changing back to the “Work offset”
window first.
By pressing the VSK 7 “Clear offset“ all entered

offsets for the installed axis will be deleted from the
list.
By pressing the VSK 8 “Back“ you switch back to

the “Work offset” window.

Notes :
7.4 Active work offset
The following work offsets are displayed in the “Work offset - active” win-
dow:
 Work offsets, for which offsets are included, or for which values are
entered
 Adjustable work offsets
 Total work offset
This window is generally used only for monitoring. The availability of the
offsets depends on the setting. Please refer to the manufacturer's docu-
mentation.
7.4.1 Selecting the function “Active”
By pressing the VSK 2 “Active“ the “Work offset -

active” window opens.
7.5 Work offset overview
In the “Work offset - Overview” window, all active offsets and system off-
sets are displayed for all set-up axes.
In addition to the offset, the rotation, scaling and mirroring defined using
this are also displayed.
This window is generally used for monitoring.

Notes :
7.5.1 Selection of the function „Work offset - Overview““
By pressing the VSK 2 „Overview“ the window
“Work offset - overview” opens.
7.5.2 Parameters for “Work offset - active”
Parameters Meaning
DRF Display of the handwheel axis offset.
Rotary table ref. Display of additional work offsets programmed with
$P_PARTFRAME .
Basic reference Display of additional work offset programmed with
$P_SETFRAME. Access to the system offsets is
protected via a key switch.
Total base WO Displays all effective basic offsets as well as rota-
tion, scaling and mirroring. Values can not be
changed here.
G500 or Display of all work offsets activated with G500, G54 -
G54 - G57 G57, as well as rotation, scaling and mirroring.
You cannot edit these values here.
Tool reference Displays the additional work offset programmed with
$P_TOOLFRAME..
Workpiece ref. Displays the additional work offset programmed with
$P_WPFRAME.
Programmed WO Displays the additional work offset programmed with
$P_PFRAME.
Cycle reference Display of all additional work offsets activated via
$MC_MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK.
Total WO Display of the active work offset, representing the
sum of all work offsets, as well as rotation, scaling
and mirroring.

Notes :
7.6 Base zero offset
The defined channel-specific and global base offsets, divided into coarse
and fine offsets, are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work offset - ba-
sic" window.
7.6.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - basic”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Base“ the “Work offset - ba-

sic” window with the channel specific and global
basic work offsets opens.
The horizontal scroll bar above the horizontal softkey bar indicates that
more parameters for the work offset are available. Because of the limited
screen area, they are covered by the softkeys of the vertical softkey bar.
Move the orange selection cursor, with the help of the blue cursor keys on
the keyboard to the left, to reach the additional parameters.
7.6.2 Displaying and editing base zero offset

panel, then the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the op-
erating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the
“OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.
2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”

3. Press the VSK 3 “Base”.
The “Work offset - basic” window opens. With the
cursor positioned on the fields with the white back-
ground you can edit the values directly in the table.
Caution:
The entered offset values are active directly.

Notes :
7.7 Settable zero offset
All settable offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed in
the "Work offset - G54...G57" window.
Rotation, scaling and mirroring are displayed.
7.7.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - G54...G57”
By pressing VSK 4 “G54...G57“ the following window

opens.
7.7.2 Displaying and editing settable zero offset

2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset“.
3. Press the VSK 4 “G54…G57“.

The “Work offset - G54...G57” window opens.
4. Values can be edited directly in the table.
Note:
The settable work offsets must first be selected in the program before they
have an impact.

Notes :
7.8 Details of the work offset
For each work offset, you can display and edit all data for all axes.
You can also delete work offsets.
For every axis, values for the following data will be displayed:
 Coarse and fine offsets
 Rotation
 Scaling
 Mirroring
Note:
Settings for rotation, scaling and mirroring are specified here and can only
be changed here.
7.8.1 Selecting the function “Work offset - details:“

By pressing the VSK 7 “Details“ a different work offset win-
dow opens, depending on the work offset (Active, Base,
G54...G57) selected before:
 “Work offset - details: Rotary table ref./Basic reference/
Total basic WO/G54 - G55/Tool reference/Workpiece ref./
Programmed WO/Cycle reference/Total WO“
 “Work offset - details: 1. chan.-sp. Basic WO“
 “Work offset - details: G54 - G57“
7.8.2 Displaying details of the work offset

panel and the HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the oper-
ating area “Parameter”. Alternatively press the
2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”.

Notes :
3. Press the VSK "Active", "Base" or "G54…G57".
The corresponding window appears.
4. Place the cursor on the desired work offset to view its details.
5. Press the VSK 7 “Details”.

A window opens, depending on the selected work offset,
e.g. "Work offset - details: G54...G57".
6. Enter changes of values directly into the table.
- OR -
6. Press the VSK 1 “WO +“ or the VSK 2 “WO -“ to select the next
or previous offset, respectively, within the selected area ("Active",
"Base", "G54 to G57") without having first to switch to the overview
window. If you have reached the end of the range (e.g. G57), you
switch automatically to the beginning of the range (e.g. G54).
- OR -
6. Press the VSK 7 "Clear offset" to reset all entered values.
7. Press the VSK 8 “Back” to close the window.
Note:
The changes become effective immediately in the part program or after
pressing the "RESET"-key.
7.9 Measuring the workpiece zero
1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the

HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the operating area “Parameter”. Alter-
natively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard.
2. Press the HSK 5 “Work offset”
3. Press the VSK 4 ”G54...57”.
4. Select the work offset in which the zero point ist to be saved by
placing the cursor in an axis field right beside the corresponding
work offset G54-57.
5. Press the VSK 1 “Work Measure”.
The operating area “Meas. Workp.” in the operating mode “JOG”
opens.
6. Press the VSK 2 “Set edge”, if not already active.
The “Set edge” window opens
7. Use the softkeys “X”, ”Y, “Z” to select in which axis direction you
want to approach the workpiece first.
7 Select the measuring direction (+ or -) you want to approach the
workpiece in.
The measuring direction cannot be selected for Z0.
8. In X0, Y0, or Z0, specify the setpoint position of the workpiece edge
you are approaching. Traverse the tool up to the workpiece edge.
Press the VSK 7 "Set WO" to measure the workpiece zero.
For more details see module B520 - “Operating mode JOG”, section 5
“Measuring the workpiece zero”.

Section 8 User variables
Notes :
The following variables can be defined:
 Arithmetic parameters (“R variables”):
 These are channel-specific variables that you can use within a G
code program. G code programs can read and write R parameters.
These values are retained after the control is switched off.
 Global user data (Global GUD) are valid in all programs and can be de-
fined as follows:
 Keyword DEF
 Range of validity NCK
 Data type (INT, REAL,….)
 Variable names
 Value assignment (optional)
 Channel-specific user data (“Channel GUD”) can be defined with a dif-
ferent value for each channel.
 Local user data (LUD) are valid in one program.
 Program-global user data (“PUD”) are valid in one program and the
called subroutines.
Local user data (“LUD”) defined in the main program can become
program-global user data (“PUD”) by setting a machine datum.
With that, they are valid in all subprograms, where they can be read and
written. The PUD mode of action is depending on the machine settings.
Only local and program-global user data can be displayed.
Up to 15 decimal places (including the place after the column) are being
evaluated. If a number with more then 15 decimals is being entered, then
exponential number format is used (15 places +EXXX).
8.1 Selecting the function “User variable”
By pressing the HSK 6 “User variable” the “R vari-

ables” window opens like displayed below.

User variables Section 8
8.2 Vertical softkey bar 1 and 2 Notes :

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “R variables“ the “R vari-
ables” window opens. The entered values (R0 -
R999, depending on a machine datum) are retained
after the control is switched off.
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“ a list of

”Global user variables” (UGUD) defined by the user
is displayed. Further selection is possible with
VSK 1.6 “GUD selection”.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” all chan-
nel-specific user variables will be displayed in a list.
Further selection is possible with VSK 1.6 “GUD
selection”.
By pressing VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“ a list with local
user data will be displayed.
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “GUD selection”, depend-

ing on the softkeys pressed before VSK 1.2
“Global GUD” or VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” a new
vertical softkey will be displayed.
 SGUD
 MGUD
Depending on the control configuration a additional
area (UGUD) can be selected.
SGUD: Definition of SIEMENS-system applications

MGUD: Definitions of machine builder applications.
UGUD: Definitions of user applications
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Search” you can search

within all available lists for any user variable by en-
tering an arbitrary character string.
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” a new vertical

softkey bar (VSK 2) with different functions opens.
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Delete” in the extended

vertical softkey bar you can delete R variables in a
defined range (from... to...) from the “R variables”
list. Deleting must be confirmed with the VSK 1.8
OK” or aborted with the “Cancel” Softkey. Alterna-
tively you can delete all R variable with the VSK
“Delete all”.
By pressing VSK 2.8 “Back“ you switch back to the

vertical softkey bar 1.

Notes :
8.3 Arithmetic parameters (R variables)
“R variables” (arithmetic parameters) are channel-specific variables that

can be used within a G code program.
G code programs can read and write “R variables”.
8.3.1 Selecting the function “R variables”
By pressing the VSK 1 “R variables” the following

window opens.
8.3.2 Displaying and editing R variables

panel and the yellow HSK 2 ”Parameter” to open the
operating area “Parameter”.
board to switch to the operating area “Parameter”
directly.
2. Press the HSK 6 “User variable”.
3. Press the VSK 1.1 “R variables“.

The “R variables” window opens
4. Enter the desired “R variable” value in the corre-

sponding “R variable” field.

Notes :
8.3.3 Selecting the function “Delete R variables”
After pressing the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ the following

“Delete R variables” window opens.
8.3.4 Deleting R variables
1-3 Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator

4. Press the VSK 8 “Extend”.

The vertical softkey bar 2 opens.
5. Press the VSK 2.7 “Delete“.
6. Enter the range in which you want to delete “R vari-

ables”. Enter even numbers from the range 0 to 99.
Accept the selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”
or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
The selected “R variables” will be deleted.
- OR -
7. Press the VSK 6 “Delete all” to reset all R variables

to 0 (zero). Accept your choice by pressing the VSK
8 “OK” or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
All “R variables” will be reset to 0 (zero).

Notes :
8.4 Global user data
“Global GUD” are NC global user data (Global User Data) which remain
available after switching the machine off. GUD apply in all programs.
A GUD variable can be defined through:
 Keyword DEF
 Range of validity NCK
 Data type (INT, REAL, ….)
 Variable names
 Value assignment (optional)
Example.: DEF NCK INT COUNTER1 = 10
Note:
GUD are defined in files with the extension *.DEF.
The following file names are reserved for this purpose:

File name Description
SGUD.DEF Definitions for system data (reserved)
MGUD.DEF Definitions for machine manufacturer data
UGUD.DEF Definitions for user data
GUD4.DEF - Definitions for user data
GUD7.DEF
8.4.1 Selecting the function “Global GUD“
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“ the following

window opens.

Notes :
8.4.1 Displaying and editing global GUD

“OFFSET”-key on the keyboard, to directly change
into the operation area “Parameter”.
2. Press the HSK 5 “User variable“.
3. Press the VSK 1.2 “Global GUD“.
4. The “Global user variables” window opens.
A list of the defined “SGUD” variables respectively

the data selected by VSK 6 “GUD selection” are dis-
played.
-OR -
4. By pressing the VSK 6 "GUD selection" further

GUD data are available.
Please refer to the manufacturer`s manual.

Notes :
8.5 Channel specific user data
Like the GUD, channel-specific user data are applicable in all programs for
each channel. However, unlike GUD, they have specific values.
A channel-specific GUD variable is defined with the following:
 Keyword DEF
 Range of validity CHAN
 Data type (REAL or INT)
 Variables names (e.g. X_POS)
Example: DEF CHAN REAL X_POS = 100.5
8.5.1 Selecting the function “Channel GUD“

After pressing the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD“ the fol-
lowing window opens.
8.5.2 Displaying and editing channel GUD

2. Press the HSK 5 “User variable”.
3. Press the VSK 3 “Channel GUD“ and the VSK ´6

“GUD selection“ to select the specific GUD area.

Notes :
8.6 Local user data
LUD are only valid in the program or subroutine in which they were de-
fined. The control displays the LUD after the start of program processing.
The display is available until the end of program processing.
A local user variable is defined with the following:
 Keyword DEF
 Data type
 Variable names
8.6.1 Selecting the function “Local LUD“
After pressing the VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“ a window

with all present local user variables opens.
8.6.2 Displaying local user data

2. Press the VSK 6 “User variable“.
3. Press the VSK 1.4 “Local LUD“.
The window with the local user data opens.

If no local user data are defined the window stays
blank.

Notes :
8.7 Search
You can search for R variables and user data directly.
8.7.1 Selecting the function “Search”
Pressing the VSK 1.7 “Search” opens the

“Find R variables” window.
8.7.2 Searching for R variables and user data.

2. Press the VSK1.1 “R variable”, the VSK 1.2 “Global

GUD”, the VSK 1.3 “Channel GUD” or the VSK 1.4
“Locale GUD” to select the list in which you would
like to search for user data.
3. Press the VSK 1.7 “Search”.

The “Find R variable” or “Find user variable”
window opens.
4. Enter the desired search term in the orange marked

input field and press the VSK 8 “OK” to accept or
press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort the search.
The cursor is automatically positioned on the R vari-
able or user data you are searching for, if they exist.

Setting data Section 9
9.1 Setting data Notes :
With the function “Setting data” you have the option to install safety ar-
eas for the tool movement and to alter parameters for the spindle speed.
9.1.1 Selecting the function “Setting data”
By pressing the HSK 8 “Setting data” the

“Working area limitation” window will be
displayed.
By pressing the VSK 1 “Working area limit.” the

working area limitation window opens, where you
can install safety zones for the tool movement.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Spindle data” the

“Spindles” window opens, where you can set
limitations for the Spindle speed.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Data lists” the window

“Setting data list” opens where you can select
predefined lists of setting dates.
Note:
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's docu-
mentation.

Section 9 Setting data
Notes :
9.3 Working area limitation
The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the tool trav-
erse range in all channel axes (e.g. X1, Y1, Z1, C1, AWZ1, SP2 and Z2).
These commands allow you to set up protection zones in the working area
which are out of bounds for tool movements. In this way, you are able to
restrict the traversing range of the axes in addition to the limit switches.
By marking the checkbox “active” the safety area is activated.
9.3.1 Selecting the function “Working area limitation”
Note:
You can only make changes in "AUTO" operating mode when in the
“RESET” condition. These changes are then immediate.
You can make changes in "JOG" operating mode at any time. These
changes, however, only become active at the start of a new motion.
By pressing the VSK 1 “Working area limit.” the

“Working area limitation” window opens.
9.3.2 Specifying working area limitations
1. Press the “MENU SELECT“-key on the operator panel, then the

HSK 2 “Parameter” to open the operating area “Parameter”. Alter-
natively press the “OFFSET”-key on the keyboard, to directly
change into the operation area “Parameter”.
2. Press the HSK 8 “Setting data”.
The “Working area limitation” window opens.
3. Place the cursor in the required field and enter the new values via
the numeric keyboard.
The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according
to your inputs.
4. Click the checkbox "active" to activate the protection zone.

Notes :
9.4 Spindle data
The speed limits set for the spindles that must not be exceeded, are dis-
played in the "Spindles" window. You can limit the spindle speeds in the
fields "Minimum" and "Maximum" within the limit values defined in the
relevant machine data.
In the field "Spindle speed limitation for G96", the programmed spindle
speed limitation at constant cutting speed is displayed together with the
permanently active limitations. A additional limitation of the Spindle speed
with constant cutting speed can be entered. This speed limitation, for ex-
ample, prevents the spindle from accelerating to the max. spindle speed of
the current gear stage (G96) when performing tapping operations or ma-
chining very small diameters.
9.4.1 Selecting the function “Spindle data”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Spindle data“ the

“Spindles” window opens.
9.4.2 Editing spindle data


board, to directly change into the operation area
“Parameter”.
2. Press the HSK 8 “Setting data”.
3. Press the VSK 3 “Spindle data”

The “Spindles” window opens.
4. If you want to change the spindle speed, place the
cursor on the "Maximum", "Minimum", or "Spindle
speed limitation at G96" and enter a new value.

Section 9 Setting data
Notes :
9.5 Spindle chuck data
The screen “Spindle chuck data” is prepared to define the dimensions of
the spindle on your machine.
9.4.1 Selecting the function “Spindle chuck data”
By pressing the VSK 4 “Spindle chuck data“ the

following window opens.
If you want to use the chuck of the main spindle as a reference point dur-
ing manual measuring, specify the chuck dimension ZC1.
(see module B520 section 6)
9.5.2 Editing spindle chuck data


board, to directly change into the operation area
“Parameter”.
2. Press the HSK 8 “Setting data”
and then press the VSK 4 “Spindle chuck data”
The “Spindle chuck data” window opens.
3. Place the cursor in the field “ZC1” and enter the new
values via the numeric keyboard.

Notes :
9.6 Data list
In the screen “Setting data list” you can select and display prepared set-
ting data lists with configured setting data. Please refer to the machine
manufacturer`s documentation.
9.6.1 Selecting the function “data list”
By pressing the VSK 4 “Data list“ the “Setting data

list” window opens.
In parameter “View” you can select the predefined setting data lists to dis-
play the configured setting data.

B524 Operating area “Program”
1 Brief description
In this module you learn about the structure of the program editor in the operating area “Program“.
The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity to create NC-programs, and also to integrate
comfortably cycles into the program. These programs are created as G-code programs as per DIN
66025, however, elements of the high level language can be included.
This module shows the general structure of a G-code programs.
The creation of G-code programs is explained in detail in the following modules: B634 “Programming
turning”, B633 “Programming contour turning” , B657 “Programming diverse functions” , and B562
“Operating area Program-Manger”.
Content:
Structure of the program editor
Options in the editor
Screen elements and their meaning
B524
B524

B524
Operating area Program: Description

Operating area
Program:
The SINUMERIK Operate provides the opportunity START
to create NC-programs, and also to integrate com-
fortably cycles into the program. These programs
are created as G-code programs as per DIN Structure of
66025, however, elements of the high level lan- the program
guage can be included. editor
This module shows the general structure of a G-
code programs.
The creation of G-code programs is explained in Options in the

detail in the following modules: B634 editor
“Programming turning”, B633 “Programming con-
tour turning” , B657 “Programming diverse func-
tions” , and B562 “Operating area Program-
Manger”. Screen
elements and
their meaning
Operating area
Program:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Structure of the program editor
Notes :
2.1 Opening a program

panel.
The following screen of the Sinumerik Operate will be displayed. This ex-
ample shows the part program NC/WKS/DOKU/DIN_DRILLING_1.
Press the HSK 3 “Program“ or the corresponding

key on the keyboard.
If a program is already loaded into the program edi-

tor, because it was processed or edited before, then
it opens immediately.
If no program was loaded before, then the program

manager opens first, giving you the opportunity to
select a program.
- OR-
Press the HSK 4 „Program-Manager“ or the corre-
sponding key on the keyboard.
The program manager window opens with a view to

the directory structure of the NC-memory.
If the desired program is not on the NC-memory,

then you can switch over to a local drive by pressing
the HSK 2 “Local drive” or to an USB device (such
as an USB stick, or USB hard drive) by pressing the
HSK 3 “USB”.
See module B575 “Operating area Program manager“.

Structure of the program editor Section 2
Notes :
2.2 The NC main memory
The memory structure shown in the picture below, with the 3 main directo-
ries
 Part programs
 Subprograms
 Workpieces
is always available on the NC, and does not have to be created.
1 Here you can see the free available main memory on the NC.
The memory can not be fully used. If less then 0,1 MB is
available, more memory should be freed by:
 deleting unused programs
 moving unused programs to another storage (e.g. memory stick).
Directories:
Directories are displayed with a folder icon in the program manager
window and have the extension *.DIR (Directory) or *.WPD (work
piece directory).
Program/Data:
Programs and data are displayed with a document icon.
Used file extensions:
*.WPD = Workpiece
*.MPF = Main program file
*.SPF = Sub program file
If the workpiece directory contains a part program with the same name as
the directory, this part program is automatically selected for machining
when the workpiece directory is selected. For example, with selecting the
workpiece POCKET.WPD the main program POCKET.MPF is selected
automatically.
If an INI-file of the same name exists (e.g. POCKET.INI), it is executed
once at the start of the part program selected.
Notes :
2.3 Navigation and program selection
Shown below is a directory tree of the opened NC-memory:
With the blue “cursor up” and the “cursor down”

keys the orange cursor is being positioned and you
can navigate through the directory tree in the pro-
gram manager window.
With the blue “cursor to the right” key you can
open a folder or subfolder and select and open a file.
In case of further subdirectories you can also extend
the directory tree with the “cursor to the right”.
Alternatively you can use the yellow “INPUT” key or

the VSK 1.3 “Open”, to load a selected program di-
rectly into the program editor window. A double click
with the mouse also opens the program file.
The VSK 1.1 “Select” loads a selected program into

the main memory of the NC, ready for machining.
With the “cursor to the left” key on the keyboard

you can close the selected folders or subfolders and
step back one level higher in the directory hierarchy.

Structure of the program editor Section 2
Notes :
2.4 The program editor
By pressing the yellow HSK 3 “Program“, or the cor-
responding key on the keyboard the program editor
window opens with the part program selected be-
fore, as long as the program was not closed explic-
itly with the VSK 2.7 “Exit” after editing.
Shown below is the opened program editor with a part program loaded:
With the editor you can go through the program more clearly and make
necessary changes by editing them.
Note: The maximum record length amounts to 512 characters.
The navigation in the editor window takes place with the blue cursor keys
on the keyboard.
NC blocks consist of the following components:
 Commands (instructions) as per DIN 66025 (G-code programs)
 Elements of the NC high-level language
If the editing of the program is finished, you can

take over all changes in the program code with
pressing the HSK 8 “NC Select”. The program is
taken over and loaded to the machine. The screens
switches to the operating area “Machine”.
If the part program is already selected for machining
the HSK 8 “Execute” appears . The screens
switches to the operating area “Machine”.
The program editor is described precisely in the module B600 and B604
“Basics of programming“.

Notes :
3.1 Horizontal softkey bar:
In this section the general functions of programming with the

SINUMERIK Operate will be described.
More information is available in the corresponding modules.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Drill.“ the following cycles

for drilling will be called up:
 Centering
 Drilling and Reaming
 Deep hole drilling
 Boring
 Thread
 Positions
 Positions repetition
See modules B610 and B611 - “Drilling“.
By pressing the HSK 3 “Turning“ the following cy-

cles for turning will be called up:
 Stock removal
 Groove
 Undercut
 Thread
 Cutoff
See module B625, B626, B633 and B634 “Turning”.
By pressing the HSK 4 “Cont. turn.“ the following

cycles for contour turning will be called up:
 Contour
 Stock removal
 Cut residual stock
 Grooving
 Groove residual
 Part
 Part residual
See module B625, B626, B633 and B634 “Turning”.

Options in the editor Section 3
Notes :
By pressing the HSK 5 “Milling“, the following cycles
for milling will be called up:
 Face milling
 Pocket
 Multi-edge spigot
 Slot
 Thread milling
 Engraving
 Contour milling
See module B617 and B618 “Milling“.
By pressing HSK 6 “Various“ the following functions

will be called up:
 Blank
 High-Speed-Settings
 Subprogram
See module B601 an B605 “Basics of programming”.
By pressing the HSK 7 “Simulation“ the program run

and the machining of the workpiece can be simu-
lated.
Different views on the simulated workpiece are avail-
able:
 Side view
 Face view
 Further views
 Details
 Program control
 Show tool path
 Delete tool path
 Blank
See module B601 and B605 - “Basics of program-
ming“.
Press the HSK 8 "Select" or “Execute” to change

over to the operating area “Machine” and to start the
machining of the program.
See module B601 an B605 “Basics of programming”.

Section 4 Screen elements and their meaning
Notes :
4.1 The “Current block display” screen
The following screen shows the actual machined program blocks.
1 Program name/Program path

2 Program code
3 Message bar
4.2 Help menu
By pressing the “HELP“-key on the CNC-keyboard,

the help window with the vertical softkey bar opens .
If there is a specific help item for the current cursor
position the corresponding help screen is shown.

Screen elements and their meaning Section 4
Notes :
If there is no specific help available the following screen is shown:
A message box with the note „No help available for „…“ appears. You can
close this box with VSK 8 „OK“ and afterwards you can call a specific help
directly below the line „Overview of Editor“.
4.3 Vertical softkey bar of the help menu
Orange marked blocks will be taken over into the editor

window.
Shows all G-functions.
Opens a search mask for searching for help topics.
Enlarges the help window to full-screen.
Follows a reference to a help topic selected.
Returns to the table of content.
Closes the help window.

Notes :

B525 Operating area “Program manager“
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to handle programs and files in the program manager of the Sumerik Oper-
ate.
All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinumerik Operate, are stored in the NC-work memory.
These programs can be accessed via the program manager for:
 execution
 alteration
 copying
 renaming
 deletion
The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following means of data transmission of NC-programs to
other storage media depending on the system components:
 NC memory
 Local drive memory
 Its own hard disk (PCU 50.x)
 Network connection
 USB-storage (stick or drive)
Note:
The system components are described in the machine manufacturer documentation.
Content:
Selection and function of the program manager
Storage medium “NC”
Storage medium “Local drive”
Storage medium “USB” drive
B525
B525

B525
Operating area Program Manager: Description

Operating area
Program Manager:
All NC-Programs, which are created with the Sinu- START
merik Operate, are stored in the NC-work mem-
ory.
These programs can be accessed via the program Selection and
manager for: function of the
program
 execution manager
 alteration
 copying
 renaming
 deletion Storage
medium “NC”
The SINUMERIK Operate provides the following
means of data transmission of NC-programs to
other storage media depending on the system
components: Storage me-
 NC memory dium “Local
drive”
 Local drive memory
 Its own hard disk (PCU 50.x)
 Network connection
 USB-storage (stick or drive) Storage me-
dium “USB”
drive
Note:
The system components are described in the ma-
chine manufacturer documentation.
Operating area
Program Manager:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Selection and functions of the program manager
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the function „Program manager“
The program manager can be selected as follows:

panel.
The following horizontal softkey bar of HMI sl will be displayed:
Press the HSK 4 “Program manager“ to open the

program manager window.
- OR -
Press the “PROGRAM MANAGER“-key on the CNC
-keyboard to open the program manager window
directly.
The following functions and softkeys will be available in the horizontal soft-
key bar of the Sinumerik Operate.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar
By pressing the HSK 1 “NC“ all directories, folders

and files of the NC/Hard disc will be displayed in a
directory tree view in the program manager window.
By pressing the HSK 2 “Local drive” all programs

and directories on an allocated network drive or on
an allocated user memory on a CF-Card at the
NCU will be displayed. Prerequisite for this function
is that the "Additional 256 MB HMI user memory on
CF card of NCU" option is activated. For larger CF-
cards also more than 256 MB memory can be en-
abled.
By pressing the HSK 3 “USB“ all programs and di-

rectories on an USB drive will be displayed in a di-
rectory tree view in the program manager window.
Programs created on an external PC can be copied
to an USB drive and transferred to the NC via the
USB interface where they can be processed further.
Direct processing from the USB flash drive is not
recommended. The text on the Softkey e.g “USB”
can also be replaced by a drive letter e.g. “G”.
Note: Refer to the documentation of the machine

manufacturer.

Storage medium “NC” Section 3
3.1 Selecting the function „NC“ Notes :
By pressing the HSK 1 “NC“ the program manager

opens .
The complete NC-memory is displayed along with all workpieces, the main
programs and subroutines.
The directories and programs are listed with the following information:
(For navigation in the directory structure refer to module B574 “Operating
area Program”, Section 2.3)
 Name
The name can contain up to 28 characters (24 characters for the name
+ dot + 3-character extension, e.g. MPF). Permissible characters in-
clude all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and under-
scores.
 Type *.WPD Directory (Workpiece Directory)
Directory/ *.MPF Program (Main program File)
Programs *.SPF Subprogram (Subprogram File)
*.JOB Job list (Job list)
*.TOA Tool data (Tool Offset Active)
*.TMA Magazine (Tool/Magazine data)
*.UFR Zero points (User Frame)
*.RPA R-Parameter (R-Parameter Active)
*.GUD Definitions (Global User Data)
*.SEA Setting data (Setting data)
*.PRO Protection zone (Protection zones)
*.CEC Sag (Sag/angularity)
*.INI Initialization (Initializing Data)
program
 Size
 The size of files of the selected directory is displayed in byte.
 Date/Time
 Date and time of file creation or last change

Section 3 Storage medium “NC”
Notes : 3.2 Vertical softkey bar 1

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Select“ you can select a
program and change over to the operating area
“Machine” in order to start machining the selected
program.
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “New“ you can create a

new directory. In the selected directory you can cre-
ate a new ShopMill- or a programGUIDE-program .
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Open“ the selected pro-

gram (marked with an orange cursor) will be
opened.
Alternatively you can also press the yellow
“INPUT”-key on the keyboard or the blue “cursor to
the right”-key to open a program.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark“ several programs

or directories can be marked for copying or cutting.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” one or several pro-

grams or directories can be copied.
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste” the copied pro-

gram(s) or directorie(s) are inserted into the se-
lected place in the directory tree of the NC, of a lo-
cal drive or an USB drive.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut“ one to several pro-

grams or directories can be cut out and inserted
somewhere else on a location in the directory tree
of the NC, a local drive or on an external USB drive.
By pressing the VSK 8 “Extend” the extended verti-

cal softkey bar 2 with new functions will be dis-
played.
Note:
Files can not be copied under the same name into the same directory.
The files are to be renamed.

3.3 Vertical softkey bar 2 Notes :

By pressing the VSK 2.1 “Archive” a new vertical
softkey bar is opened (see section 3.10 “Archives”)
By pressing the VSK 2.2 “Preview window“ a sub

window opens below the file browser window, with
a preview of the program code of the selected pro-
gram (see picture in section 3.5).
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Properties“ the

“Properties of ...” input mask opens where you can:
 View program path and modify the program
name.
 View the time and date of creation.
 View the time and date of last changing of the
program or folder.
 User rights for execution, writing, listing and
reading of files and folders.
(See section 3.11 “Properties“)
By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ the program or

folder marked with the cursor will be deleted.
(See section 3.8)

panel (OP) you switch back to the vertical softkey
bar 1.

Notes : 3.4 Starting a new NC-program
Press the VSK 1.2 “New“ to start a new G-code

program or workpiece. Depending on the cursor
position the following input masks open.
If the cursor is placed on the folder for part programs or subprograms,

then a new G-code program of the type “*.MPF” (for part programs) or
“*.SPF” (for subprograms) is created by pressing the VSK 1.2 “New”.
In the name field of the input mask, a name for the program with a maxi-
mum of 28 characters (name + point + extension) has to be entered.
 Cursor is positioned on the directory (DIR):
With the VSK 2.2 “Workpiece” you can create a new Workpiece
directory (WPD).
 Cursor is positioned on or in the workpiece directory (WPD):

 Press the VSK 2.3 “ShopTurn” to create a new sequential program.
 Press the VSK 2.4 “programGUIDE G-code” to create a new

G code program. In this case you select between a
main program (MPF) or a subprogram (SPF).

Notes :
 You can create a program of any type in every directory or subdirec-
tory by pressing the VSK 5 “Any”. However in the area “local drive”
and “USB” this does not apply. Only in the area “NC” you can create
a program of different types (see the type list below).
After pressing the VSK 1.2 “New” the following functions in the vertical
softkey bar are available.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Workpiece“ you can create

a new workpiece of the type *.WPD (Workpiece di-
rectory).
The current cursor position determines the folder
where the workpiece is created.
The “New workpiece” window opens.
Note: The softkey is only available if the HSK 1
“NC“ was selected before.
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “ShopTurnl” a new se-

quential program will be created.
By pressing the VSK 2.4 “programGUIDE G code”,

a new main program or subprogram will be created,
depending on the program type selected in the in-
put mask.
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Any“ an arbitrary pro-

gram depending on the file type can be created
(see the picture above).
By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Cancel“ the actual selec-

tion will be discarded and the window closed.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 “OK“ or pressing the

“INPUT”-key on the keyboard the entered values or
selection made will be accepted and the window
closed.
Notes : 3.4.2 Parameters for “New workpiece“
Parameter Meaning
Type: Program type:
 WPD Workpiece directory
Name Program name:

The program name can only consist of a maximum
number of 28 characters (Name + dot + 3-character
extension, e.g. *.WPD).
Permissible characters include all upper-case letters
(without accents), numbers, and underscores (_).
3.4.3 Parameters for „New G code program“
Parameter Meaning
Type: Program type:
 MPF Program (Main program file)
 SPF Subprogram (Subprogram file)
Name Program name

(see section 3.4.2 above)
3.4.4 Parameters for “Any new program“
Parameter Meaning
Template If templates are available, they are shown and select-
able.
Type: Program type:

 JOB Job list
 TOA Tool data
 TMA Magazine assignment
 UFR Zero points
 RPA R-Variable
 GUD Definitions
 SEA Setting data
 PRO Protection zones
 CEC Sag compensation
 INI Initialization program
Name Program name (see section 3.4.2)

3.5 Marking directories / NC-programs Notes :
First open the desired directory in the program manager, like described in
sections 2.1 and 3.1.
1. Place the cursor with the blue “cursor down”-key
on the first program or folder that you want to mark.
2. Press the VSK 4 “Mark“.

The program or directory selected with the orange
cursor is marked.
3. Mark more NC-programs or directories by pressing
the blue “cursor down”-key.
All selected files or directories are marked grey.
Thereafter, the marked NC-programs can stored to the clipboard of the

PCU by pressing the VSK 5 “Copy” or the VSK 7 “Cut” .
The programs stored to the clipboard can then be:
 Copied in a different directory or to a different storage device
 Deleted from a directory (cut) and pasted into a different directory or
storage device.
Tip 1:
To shortcut the marking process place the cursor on the first program or
directory you want to copy.
Now press the “SHIFT”-key on the keyboard, hold it pressed and move
the cursor with the blue “cursor down” key to the last program or directory
you want to copy. Release the “SHIFT”-key.
The files are now marked.
Tip 2:
If you only want to mark a single program or directory place the cursor on
the file and press the blue “SELECT”-key on the keyboard.
The single file is now selected.
Go on with copying, cutting or deleting, like described next.

Notes : 3.6 Copying and pasting directories / NC- programs

section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module.
1. Move the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the directory or file
which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one pro-
gram or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see
section 3.5).
2. Press the VSK 5 “Copy“.
3. If the program is to be copied into another directory on the NC,
move the cursor with the “cursor to the left”-key to the next
higher level of the directory tree.
4. Select the new directory where you want to copy the data with
the “cursor up” and “cursor down”-key and open the directory
by pressing the “cursor to the right” or the yellow “INPUT”-key on
the keyboard.
5. Alternatively you can select another storage medium e.g. local
drive or USB drive on the horizontal softkey bar.
6. By pressing the VSK 6 “Paste“ the program or directory can be
inserted into the selected location.
Accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the
VSK 7 “Cancel”.
The original file remains.
Tip 3:
To shortcut the copying process place the cursor on the program or directory
you want to copy and press the CTRL + C keys on the keyboard at the same
time. In order to paste the file to another location move the cursor to that lo-
cation and press CTRL + V at the same time.
3.7 Cutting out directories / NC-programs

section 2.1 and 3.1 in this module.
which you want to cut out. If you want to cut out more then one
program or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see
section 3.5).
2. Press the VSK 7 “Cut“.
In the message line the message “1 element has been cut. It can
now be pasted” will be displayed.
3. If the program or directory is to be moved to another directory on
the NC, move the cursor with the “cursor to the left”-key to the
next higher level of the directory tree.
4. Select the new directory with the “cursor up” and “cursor
down”-key where you want to insert the data and open the direc-
tory by pressing the “cursor to the right” or the yellow “INPUT”-
key on the keyboard.
5. Alternatively you can select another storage medium (e.g. USB
stick) on the horizontal softkey bar.
Tip 4:
To shortcut the cutting out of a program or directory place the cursor on the
selected file and press the CTRL + X keys at the same time.

Press the VSK 6 “Paste“ to insert the clipped data to the direc- Notes :
6.
tory or storage location of your choice. Accept your selection by
pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort with pressing the VSK 7
“Cancel”. The source file or directory will be deleted.
3.8 Deleting directories / NC-programs

which you want to copy. If you want to copy more then one pro-
gram or directory, mark them first with the VSK 4 “Mark” (see
section 3.5).
2. Press the VSK 2.7 “Delete“ in the extended vertical softkey bar
2. Accept the deletion process with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or
abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
The selected program or directory will be deleted.
3.9 Opening a preview window
1. Press the VSK 2.2 “Preview window” in the extended VSK-bar.

The preview sub window opens directly below the program man-
ager window.
2. Use the blue cursor keys to navigate to the program you want to
preview. The program code of the selected program is now dis-
played in the preview window.
3. To deselect the function press the VSK 2.2 “Preview window”

again.
The preview window disappears.
Note: You cannot edit program code in the “preview window”.

Tip 5: Press the “NEXT WINDOW“-key on the keyboard to activate the pre-
view window. Now you can navigate freely through the program code by us-
ing the blue cursor keys.
Tip 6: The preview window stays active, even if you switch back to the verti-
cal softkey bar 1, in order to copy or cut a program or directory.

Notes :
3.10 Generating archive files of programs and directories
Pressing the VSK 2.1 “Archive” in the extended

VSK-bar, will open the next vertical softkey bar.
After pressing the VSK 3.1 “Generate archive” the
following input mask appears to select the storage
location.
With the VSK 3.7 “Back” you can go back to the pre-
vious vertical softkey bar.
Afterwards the storage location is selected the next

mask appears to enter the name of the archive file.
Pressing the VSK 4.2 “New directory” will open an

input mask “New directory”, where you can define a
new directory at the selected cursor position.
Pressing the VSK 4.7 “Cancel” will abort the gener-
ating of archive files and the first vertical softkey bar
is selected.
Pressing the VSK 4.0 “OK” will start generating the
archive file.

Notes :
3.11 Properties of programs and directories
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Properties” in the ex-

tended vertical softkey bar depending on the cursor
position and the selected program (here TEST.MPF)
the “properties of ....”-window with security options
for the selected program or directory opens.
Note: You can change the program name and the

rights.
Parameters Meaning
Path and name: Program path and Program name;

The program with the name “TEST1.MPF” is located
in the folder NC/Workpieces/DOKU.
Created: Date and time of creation:

On the right side of the field “Created”: Date and
time of creation are displayed here.
Changed: Date and time change:

On the right side of the field “Changed”: Date and
time since the last edit of the program are displayed.
Rights: User rights for executing, writing, listing and reading
of a program or directory.
7 protection levels are possible (level 1 highest pro-
tection level, level 7 the lowest).
 Protection level 1 Manufacturer Protected by password
 Protection level 2 Service Protected by password
 Protection level 3 User Protected by password
 Protection level 4 Programmer Key switch 3
 Protection level 5 Qualified worker Key switch 2
 Protection level 6 Skilled worker Key switch 1
 Protection level 7 Semi skilled worker Key switch 0

Notes : 4.1 Selecting the function “Local drive“
By pressing the HSK 2 “Local drive“ the program

manager shows the directory structure of the local
drive.
A complete listing of all folders and files of the local drive is shown in the
program manager window. For a description of the information of name,
type, length and date/time displayed in this window, see section 3.1.
The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is

available by pressing the HSK 2 “local drive” or HSK 3 “USB” (see sec-
tion 3 in this module).
Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1
“Directory”.
By pressing the VSK 1 “Directory” the “New direc-
tory” input mask opens where you can create a new
directory on the local drive.
Enter a name for the new directory and accept with
pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with the VSK 7
“Cancel”.

Storage medium “USB” drive Section 5
Notes :
5.1 Selecting the function “USB“
By pressing the HSK 3 “USB“ the following direc-

tory tree of the USB drive is displayed.
A complete listing of all folders and files of the USB drive is shown in the
program manager window. For a description of the information displayed in
this window, see section 3.1.
The full functionality available under the NC program manager window is

available by pressing the HSK 2 “local drive” or HSK 3 “USB” (see sec-
tion 3 in this module).
Additional, here you can create a new directory by pressing the VSK 1
“Directory”.
By pressing the VSK 1 “Directory” the “New direc-

tory” input mask opens where you can create a new
directory on the USB drive.
Enter a name for the new directory and accept with
pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with the VSK 7
“Cancel”.

B526 Operating area “Diagnostics”
1 Brief description
Objectives of the module:
With this module you learn to recognize and understand the alarms and messages that can occur
during the operation of the machine.
Furthermore you learn to correct the problems indicated by alarm messages.
Faulty states which can occur during operation are shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate.
If necessary the operation is interrupted, depending on the kind of error. The operator can acknowl-
edge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the
machining progress. Generally they are displayed during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle.
All present alarms and messages are shown in a sequential order of appearance in a alarm protocol.
Content:
Selection and function of the operating area “Diagnostics”
Displaying and handling alarms
Displaying messages
Alarm log
B526
B526

B526
Operating area Diagnostics: Description

Operating area
Diagnostics:
Faulty states which can occur during operation are START
shown in an alarm list on the Sinumerik Operate.
If necessary the operation is interrupted, depend-
ing on the kind of error. The operator can acknowl- Selection and
edge alarms or delete them. Messages give hints function of the
to certain behaviour patterns of cycles and to the operating area
“Diagnostics”
machining progress. Generally they are displayed
during a processing stage or at the end of a cycle.
All present alarms and messages are shown in a
sequential order of appearance in a alarm proto- Displaying
and handling
col. alarms
Displaying
messages
Alarm log
Operating area
Diagnostics:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Selection and function of the operating area “Diagnostics”
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the operating area “Diagnostics“
The operating area “Diagnostics” can be selected as follows:
Press the “ALARM”-key on the CNC-Keyboard.

The operating area “Diagnostics” opens
immediately.
- OR -
Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the CNC-
keyboard.
The following horizontal softkey bar opens on the Sinumerik Operate.
Press the HSK 5 “Diagnostics“ to open the operat-

ing area “Diagnostics”.
The following softkeys and functions are available in the horizontal soft-
key bar of the operating area “Diagnostics“.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar 1 (HSK)

By pressing the HSK 1.1 “Alarm list“ the “Alarms”-
window opens.
See section 3 “Alarm list”.
By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Messages“ the

“Messages” -window opens and PLC or program
massages are being displayed.
See section 4 “Messages”.
By pressing the HSK 1.3 „Alarm log“ a protocol list

with all alarms and messages opened so far, are
being displayed.
See section 5 “Alarm log“.
By pressing the HSK 1.4 “NC/PLC variab.“ a win-

dow opens where you can observe and modify PLC
memory locations and NC system variables.
This function is described in the commissioning
manual of the Sinumerik Operate.
By pressing the HSK 1.6 “Remote diag.“ a window

opens where you can make the settings for remote
diagnostics (RCS).

Selection and function of the operating area “Diagnostics” Section 2
Notes :
By pressing the HSK 1.8 “Version“ als software
components with their version information will be
displayed.
2.3 Horizontal softkey bar 2 (HSK)

By pressing the HSK 2.1 “BUS TCP/IP“ in the ex-
tended horizontal softkey bar, the profibus status
for diagnostic purposes during the configuration or
when errors occur will be displayed.
By pressing the HSK 2.2 “Axis diag.“ in the ex-

tended horizontal softkey bar the “Service over-
view”-window opens.
By pressing the HSK 2.3 “SI diag.” in the extended

horizontal softkey bar the “Safety integrated status”-
window opens.
By pressing the HSK 2.7 “System utiliz.” in the ex-

tended horizontal softkey bar, the “System utiliza-
tion”-window opens where the system resources for
the NC areas are shown.
By pressing the HSK 2.8 “Drive system“ in the ex-

tended horizontal softkey bar the “Overview for the
drive states”-window opens.

Section 3 Displaying and handling alarms
Notes : 3.1 Selecting the function “Alarm list”
Press the HSK 1.1 “Alarm list” to open the

“Alarms”-window like displayed below. All present
alarms are displayed here and can be acknowl-
edged.
If faulty conditions are recognized in the operation of the machine, then an

alarm will be generated and, if necessary, the machining will be inter-
rupted. The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number
gives you more detailed information on the error cause.
 Date and time
- If a faulty condition is determined in the control, the system
time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is monitored
and displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.
 Clearing criterion
- For every alarm an icon shows the key that has to be pressed on the
keyboard to clear the alarm (here the “ALARM CANCEL” -Taste auf
dem Keyboard).
 Alarm number
- The alarms are displayed with an alarm number, in sequence of their
occurrence.
 Alarm text
- The alarm text describes the error in short words.
Attention:
Please check the situation in the plant on the basis of the description of the
active alarm(s). Eliminate the cause/s of the alarm/s and acknowledge it/
them as instructed. Failure to observe this warning will place your ma-
chine, workpiece, stored settings and eventually even your own safety at
risk.

Displaying and handling alarms Section 3
Press the HSK 1.1 „Alarm list“ and select the Alarm with the blue cursor
key on the keyboard. Press the following vertical softkeys shown in the
VSK-bar to delete or acknowledge the Alarm.

Press the VSK 1 “Delete HMI alarm” to delete a
marked alarm.
-OR-
Press the VSK 2 “Acknowl. alarm“ to delete a PLC
alarm of the SQ type (Alarm numbers starting from
800000).
Note:
The softkeys are activated when the cursor is placed on the correspond-
ing alarm.
3.3 Acknowledgement symbols
Symbol Instruction
Turn the unit off and back on (main switch), or press

“NCK POWER ON”.
Press the “RESET”-key.
Press the “ALARM CANCEL"-key.
Press the “Acknowl. HMI alarm”-key.
Press the key provided by the manufacturer.
3.4 Deleting or acknowledging an alarm
1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the CNC-

keyboard and the yellow HSK 5 “Diagnostics”.
Alternatively press the “ALARM”-key on the CNC-
keyboard.
The operating area “Diagnostics” opens.
2. Press the VSK 1.1 “Alarm list” to open the “Alarms”-
window.
3. Navigate the cursor with the blue cursor keys to the
corresponding alarm.
4. Press the corresponding key on the keyboard that is
displayed in the alarm line.
- OR -
4. Press the VSK 1 “Delete HMI alarm” to cancel a
HMI alarm.
- OR -
4. Press the VSK 2 “Acknowl. Alarm” to delete a PLC
alarm of the SQ type (alarm number as of 800000).
The alarms are now deleted.

Section 4 Displaying messages
Notes : 4.1 Selecting the function “Messages
By pressing the HSK 1.2 “Messages” the

“Messages”-window opens, showing PLC and part
program messages during machining.
PLC and part program messages may be issued during machining.

Messages provide information with regard to a certain behaviour of the cy-
cles and with regard to the progress of machining and are usually kept be-
yond a machining step or until the end of the cycle.
 Date and time
- On the occurrence of the message,
the actual system time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY)
are displayed in this list. The date is above the clock time.
 Number
- Message number only displayed for PLC messages.
 Text
- Message text in short words.
Note:
These message will not interrupt the program execution.

Alarm log Section 5
5.1 Selecting the function “Alarm log” Notes :
By pressing the HSK 1.3 “Alarm log” the following

“Alarm log”-screen will be displayed.
A maximum of up to 32000 alarm messages can be displayed in the

„Alarm log“ window.
They are shown chronological ordered with the following parameters:
 Raised
- If the alarm message is raised, the actual system
time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is
displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.
 Cleared
- If the alarm message is cleared, the actual system
time (hh:mm:ss) and system date (TT.MM.YY) is
displayed in a list. The date is above the clock time.
 Number
- In this column the alarm number or massage is being output .
 Text
- In this column a short description of the alarm or massage is being
output.
Note
These message will not interrupt the program execution.

Section 5 Alarm log

By pressing the VSK 1 “Display new” the actual
alarm log list will be updated.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Settings” the “Settings”
input mask opens, where you can limit the numbers
of entries in the log list and decide to write the log
into a file on the control.
By pressing the VSK 7 “Store log” the actual alarm
log is stored as a text file.
5.3 Showing and saving alarm logs

panel and then the yellow horizontal softkey 5
“Diagnostics“. Alternatively you can press the
“Alarm”-key on the keyboard.
The operating area “Diagnostics” opens.
2. Press the VSK 3 “Alarm-log.“.
The “Alarm log” window opens with the correspond-
ing vertical softkey bar.
3. Press the VSK 1 “Display new” to update the log
list.
- OR -
3. Press the VSK 2 “Settings” to open the “Settings”-
input mask. In the “Number of entries”-field enter
values for the maximum number of entries
(maximum 32000) that shall be displayed in the log
window and in the “Write mode file” select:
 “off“, if the changes are not to be written to a file.
 “At every event“, if every change is to be written
to a file.
 “Time-controlled” if the file is to be overwritten
after a particular time period. A new option field
opens where you can insert the write interval in
seconds.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or
abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
- OR -
3. Press the VSK 7 “Store log” to save the log directly
to the file:
card/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/alarm_log/alarmlog.txt
on the on the control.

B527 Operating area “Start-up”
1 Brief description
In this module you learn to adjust the operating interface of the Sinumerik Operate to your local lan-
guage and to set the password and the key-switches.
The user interface is adjustable to the most common global languages English, French, German, Ital-
ian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you can select from a list.
Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the user interface and so the functionality of the con-
trol to different levels of user groups, which allows different user groups different operations on the
machine, depending on their knowledge and education. This can be done by passwords and key
switches.
Content:
Start-up
B527
B527

B527
Operating area Start-up: Description

Operating area
Start-up:
The user interface is adjustable to the most com- START
mon global languages English, French, German,
Italian, simplified Chinese and Spanish, which you
can select from a list.
Start-up
Furthermore you can adjust the functionality of the
user interface and so the functionality of the con-
trol to different levels of user groups, which allows
different user groups different operations on the
machine, depending on their knowledge and edu- Operating area
Start-up:
cation. This can be done by passwords and key
END
switches.
Notes :

Section 2 Start-up
Notes :
2.1 Selecting the operating area “Start-up“
The operating area “Start-up” can be selected as follows:

panel.
The following horizontal softkey bar of the Sinumerik Operate is displayed.
Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“, to open the window for

Start-up.
The “Machine configuration“ window opens.
2.2 Horizontal softkey bar

By pressing the HSK 1 “Mach. data“ the “General
MD”-window opens.
The display of the machine data or drive mecha-
nism depend on the configuration of the control.
The access rights to the machine data are re-
stricted by the position of key switches or pass-
words.
By pressing the HSK 6 “System data” the “System

data”-window opens.

Start-up Section 2

By pressing the VSK 3 “Change language” you
can adjust the user interface language to the lan-
guage of your choice.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Password“ the VSK 1 “Set
password” becomes active. You can switch to dif-
ferent protection levels of the control by using differ-
ent passwords.
2.3 Selecting the function “Change language”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Change language” the

“Language selection”-window opens.
2.4 Changing the user language

1. Press the “MENU SELECT”-key on the operator
panel.
The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens.
2. Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“.
3 Press the VSK 3 “Change language”
The “Language selection” window opens.
4 Move the orange cursor over the language field of
your choice, by using the blue cursor keys.
Accept your selection by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”
The Sinumerik changes the user interface language
to the language of your choice.
Tip:
You can change the user language of the interface directly at any time by
pressing the “CTRL” + “L” key on the keyboard simultaneously.

Section 2 Start-up
Notes : 2.5 Selecting the function “Password”
The access to programs, data and functions is restricted user-oriented by

8 hierarchical protection levels.
They are separated into:
 4 password levels for system, machine manufacturer, commissioner,
and user
 4 key-switch positions for the end user
There are the protection levels 0 - 7, where 0 is the highest and 7 is the
lowest level.
By pressing the VSK 6 “Password” and VSK 1 “Set
password” an input mask opens where you can set
a new protection level by entering a password.
2.6 Changing the protection level via password

panel.
The yellow horizontal softkey bar opens.
2. Press the HSK 6 „Start-up“.
3. Press the VSK 6 “Password”.
4. Press the VSK 1 “Set password”.
The “Define password” input mask opens.
5. Enter the password in the orange marked input field
and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK” or abort
Note:
The additional softkeys and functions “Set pass-
word” and “Change password” are only accessible
at a higher protection level.

B605 Basics of programming with the program-
GUIDE
1 Brief description
Working with this module you will learn the concept of the G code programming with the ShopTurn
programGUIDE.
This module explains the general program structure of a ShopTurn G code program, programmed
with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the functions of the “Editor“ are described, as well as the func-
tions “Various “, “Simulation“ and “NC-Selection“.
Content:
Basics
Creating G-code programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
B605
B605

B605
Basics of the Programming with the program-
GUIDE: Description Basics with
programGUIDE:
START
This module explains the general program struc-
ture of a ShopMill G code program, programmed
with the programGUIDE. Furthermore the func-
tions of the “Editor“ are described, as well as the Basics
functions “Various “, “Simulation“ and “NC-
Selection“.
Creating
G-code
programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
Basics with
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Basics
Notes :
2. 1 G code programming with ShopTurn
ShopTurn offers beside the manual operation are, the possibility to create
NC programs on the control. These programs can be of the type chained
sequential programs, G code programs or a mix of both.
If you do not want to program with the ShopTurn functionality, you can
generate G code programs with G code commands in the ShopTurn user
interface. G code commands can be programmed as per DIN 66025.
Note:
The creation of chained sequential programs is explained in detail in the
module - B601 - „Basics of programming with ShopTurn”.
With the G code programming in ShopTurn with the programGUIDE, pa-
rameter masks guide you in the process of measuring, programming of
contours, as well as drilling, turning and milling cycles.
From within the parameter masks, G code will be generated, which can
also be translated back into the parameter masks.
The following functions simplify the programming of G code programs:
 Technology oriented program step selection (cycles) using softkeys

 Input masks and -windows for parameters, with animated help graphics
 Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window
 Comfortable definition of the blank
 Support for the contour input (geometric processor)
ShopTurn programs can be represented in different views:

 As a work plan showing the call up of the tool, path commands, revolu-
tion settings, spindle data, feed, cycle calls, the program end, etc.

Basics Section 2
Notes :
 As a parameter mask, with 3D animations during parameter input of
cycles and blank definition.
 As a parameter mask, with help graphics during parameter input of

cycles and blank definition. .

Section 2 Basics
Notes :
 As a parameter mask with an outline drawing during parameter input
of cycles and blank definition (the VSK 3 “Graphic view” must be ac-
tive).
Note:
The animated helping pictures are displayed always in the correct position
to the adjusted coordinate system.
The parameters are dynamically displayed in the graphic and are high-
lighted in a different colour.

Basics Section 2
Notes :
2.2 General program structure
In general a G code program can be programmed freely.

For a good legibility however, the following structure is recommended:
1
Zero point selection, plane selection, absolute dimensioning
2
Blank attribution for the simulation
3
Tool call-up and tool change
4
Technology data, path commands
5
Programming of the technologies (cycles)
6
Program end
1
2
3

Section 2 Basics
Notes :
2.3 Standard commands in the G code Editor
Unlike in a program with ShopTurn functionality the following G-code com-

mands are programmed through graphically supported parameter masks,
where as in the programGUIDE G-code editor they have to be specifically
typed into the editor.
Note:
Unnamed G commands are freely selectable.
The documentation of the machine manufacturer must be observed.
Command Meaning
G 00 Rapid traverse command
G 01 Linear interpolation (Feed motion)
G 02 Circular interpolation anti-clockwise
G 03 Circular interpolation clockwise
G 04 Dwell time
Note: Additional parameter inputs are required
G 17 Plane selection XY Z
G 18 Plane selection ZX Y
G 19 Plane selection YZ X
G 54 - G 57 Selection of the zero points
Note:
More zero points may be available.
The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be
observed.
G 90 Absolute dimensions
G 91 Incremental dimensions
The following standard M commands are available in the G code editor.
Note: Unnamed M-commands are freely selectable. The documentation by

the machine manufacturer must be observed.
Command Meaning
M00 Programmed Halt
M01 Optional stop, see also M00
M02 End of Program
M03 Spindle Start clockwise
M04 Spindle Start anti-clockwise
M05 Spindle Stop
M06 Tool change
M08 Coolant ON
M09 Coolant OFF
M19 Defined spindle stop
M30 End of Program (see also M02)

Basics Section 2
Notes :
The following standard “other“ commands are available in the G code edi-
tor.
Note:
The documentation by the machine manufacturer must be observed.
Command Meaning
T Tool call-up (Tool)
S Speed (Speed)
F Feed rate (Feed)
2.4 Navigation in the editor window
For a fast and comfortable navigation within a G code program and the
parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys.
With the blue “cursor-up”-key on the keyboard you

can navigate upwards in the program editor and the
parameter masks.
With the blue “cursor-down”-key on the keyboard

you can navigate downwards in the program editor
and the parameter masks.
The arrow symbol (extend symbol) on the right side

of a cycle or workpiece line in the editor window
indicates that you can enter the parameter input
mask by pressing the “cursor-to-the-right”-key
The “cursor-to-the-right”-key opens the parameter

mask of the corresponding program block.
The “cursor-to-the-left”-key closes the parameter

mask for the cycle or workpiece settings and brings
you back to the editor window, displaying the G
code program.

Section 3 Creating G code programs
Notes :
3.1 Creating a new G code program or opening an existing one
A new G code program can be created from the operating modes “JOG”,
“MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:
Press the “Program Manager“-key on the keyboard.
The program manager for creating and administering
programs opens directly.
See module B525 - „Operating area Program Man-
ager“.
- OR -
Press the “MENU SELECT“ key on the operator
panel (OP).
Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program Manager“.
The program manager for creating and administering
programs opens.
- THEN -
Select a storage drive by pressing the horizontal
softkey “NC”, “Local drive” or “USB”, where you
want to create the program.
Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to
the directory of your choice.
For the navigation process refer to the modules
B516 - “Operating elements“ or module B525 -
“Operating area Program Manager“.
Press the VSK 2 “New”.

The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating
new programs opens.
Press the VSK 3 „programGUIDE G code“, to open

the input mask for creating a new G code program.
Here you can create a new main program,
or a new subprogram.
Enter a name for the program and confirm your input

by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”, or abort with pressing
the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

Creating G code programs Section 3
Notes :
After creating a new programGUIDE program, the program will be loaded
into the G code editor in the operating area “Program”, where all the func-
tions for entering and editing G code commands and cycles are available
(see picture below).
3.2 Programming a tool
Within the editor, tools can be selected and inserted into the G code pro-
gram comfortably by using a softkey.
Note:
Of course one can program a tool call by hand too.
Under the function “Edit” press the VSK 1.1 “Select

Tool” to open the tool list in the operating area
“Parameter”.
Press the VSK 1.2 “New tool” to create a new tool
(see module - B523 “Operating area Parameter”).
- OR -
Select an already existing tool from the tool list by
placing the orange selection cursor on that tool and
pressing the VSK 1.1 “To program”.
Afterwards program the tool change (M06), the spin-
dle start (M03/M04), the coolant (M07/M08), the
speed (S...), the feed (F) and if needed, some tool
specific functions.

Section 3 Creating G code programs
Notes :
3.3 Programming the blank
The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording. A
realistic simulation is only possible with a blank, that represents the actual
blank dimensions as close as possible.
The shape (Block centred, Pipe, Cylinder or N-corners) and dimensions of
the blank must be defined.
In the operating area “Program” press the HSK 1.6
“Various” to open the vertical softkey bar with “various”
functions.
Here, press the VSK 1.1 “Blank” to open the input mask for
defining the blank.
Fill in the needed parameters and press the VSK 8
“Accept” to take over the blank settings into the program
(see section 5.3) or abort with pressing the VSK 7
“Cancel”.
3.4 Programming a cycle
Cycles (technologies) can be programmed easily by using softkeys and

parameter masks.
In the operating area “Program”
press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”, or
press the HSK 1.3 “Turning”, or
press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. turn.”, or
press the HSK 1.5 “Mill.”
to open the cycles for drilling, turning, contour turning and

milling.
Select the corresponding technology (cycle) and optionally

a position pattern and accept for inserting the cycle into the
G code program.
See modules B611 - “Drilling“, B618 - “Milling“, B626 -
“Contour turning” und B634 - “Turning“.
3.5 Inserting G code commands and programming the program end
In the G code editor window several functions for inserting, copying and
cutting G code commands are available.
In the operating area “Program” press the HSK 1 “Edit” to
program a part program with G code commands or to edit
an already loaded program.
Program the program end (M02/M30) (see section 4).
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to simulate the machining

(see section 6).
- OR -
Press the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” to load the program to the
NC memory, ready for machining (see section 7).

Edit Section 4
Notes :
4.0 Explanation of the function “Edit”
With the editor you can create, supplement, or change part programs.
4.1 Selecting the function “Edit”
The program editor can be opened from the operating modes “JOG”,
“MDA” or “AUTO”..
By pressing the “PROGRAM“-key on the keyboard
the editor window opens directly, with the last
opened program.
If no program was loaded before, the program man-
ager window opens instead, where you can create or
select an existing program.
- OR -
panel.
Press the yellow HSK 3 “Program” to change to the

operating area “Program”. The last loaded program
in the editor opens (see picture below).
If not selected, press the HSK 1 “Edit“.
If no program had been opened for editing purpose,
then the Sinumerik Operate opens the Program
Manager window, offering a chance to the user for
choosing the desired program for editing.
For further details see module - B524 “Operating
area Program”, and also module - B526 “Operating
area Program Manager”.
The following softkeys are available for editing a program:

Section 4 Edit
Notes :

The VSK 1.1 “Select tool” opens the tool manage-
ment area (tool list) of ShopTurn in the operating
area “Parameter”.
Here you can select an existing tool or create a new
one. By pressing the VSK 1.1 “To program” you can
insert the selected tool data into the G code pro-
gram.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search“ you can search

for any text in the current program.
A search window opens where you can enter a
search string.
You can continue searching afterwards (see section
4.3).
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark” you can mark one
to several program blocks in order to copy or cut
(delete) them.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” you can copy one

to several program blocks to the internal memory of
the control, to paste them to a different location in
the active program or to another program.
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste“ copied program

code can be inserted anywhere into the active pro-
gram, or into another program on a different location.
The pasted program code will be inserted under the
program block marked with the orange selection cur-
sor in the work plan. You can paste the code to the
active program, as well as to another program on the
NC, local drive or USB-drive.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut”, you can cut out or

delete one to several program blocks. The cut out
program blocks remain in the clipboard and can be
inserted via VSK 1.6 “Paste” into the same or any
other program (see VSK 1.6 “Paste“).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the extended ver-
tical softkey bar 2, with the following functions, will
be displayed.
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” you can
assign new numbers for every program step in the
editor window. Select the first block number to start
and then the increment (see section 4.4).
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings“ you can change
the setting for the program editor (see section 4.5).
By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Exit” you close the editor

with the active program.
By pressing the VSK 2.8 “Back“ you switch back to
the vertical softkey bar 1.

Edit Section 4
Notes :
4.3 Search
With the function “Search” you can search for any text in a sequential pro-
gram and even replace the text with other text.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search” the search win-

dow opens, where you can search for any program
code in the current program.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Go to start” the cursor will
be positioned on the first line of the program in the
work plan.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Go to end” the cursor will be
placed on the last line of the program in the work
plan.
By pressing the VSK4 “Search” the search mask
opens, where you can decide to search for complete
words, select the search direction (forward/
backwards) and enter the search text.
By pressing the VSK5 “Find + replace” the “Search
and replace” mask opens where you can decide to
search for complete words, select the search direc-
tion (forward/backwards), enter the search text and
enter the text you want to use for replacement.
With pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” you can abort the
search process.
By pressing the VSK 8 “OK“ you start a search run
with the above mentioned search criteria.

Section 4 Edit
Notes :
4.4 Renumbering
With the function “Renumbering” you can renumber manually the program
steps in the work plan with an increment you can select here.
4.4.1 Selecting the function “Renumbering“
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” the input

window opens where you can change the settings
for the renumbering of the program blocks in the
editor window.
4.4.2 Parameters for “Renumbering”
Parameter Meaning
First block number The first block number you want to start with.
The values shown here by default can be adjusted
under the function “Settings” in the input field “First
block number” (see section 4.5).
Increment The Increment between the program blocks.
The values shown here by default, can be adjusted
under the function “Settings” in the input field
“Increment” (see section 4.5).

Edit Section 4
Notes :
4.5 Settings
With the function “Settings” you can change the settings for the program
editor.
4.5.1 Selecting the function „Settings“
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings” the settings win-

dow for the program editor opens.
4.5.2 Parameters for “Settings”
Parameter Meaning
Number automati- Program blocks will be numbered automatically at
cally (Yes/No) the time of input. If this parameter is deactivated the
following two parameters will not be displayed.
First block number Block number of first block.
Increment Increment between block numbers.
Show hidden lines Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).

(Yes/No)
Display block end as A symbol is displayed at the end of each block.
symbol (Yes/No)
Move horizontally Blocks are displayed in one line with the scroll bar.
(Yes/No)
Save automatically Changes are saved automatically without a query.

(only local and ex-
ternal drives)
(Yes/No)

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.1 Selecting the function “Various”
The function “Various” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG”,
“MDA” or “AUTO” in the operating area “Program” as follows:
Press the HSK 6 “Various“ to switch over to the
function “Various”. The following functions described
are shown in the VSK-bar of the program editor.

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Blank“ an input mask
opens where you can change the settings for the
blank (see section 5.3 “Blank”).
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Subprogram” the input
mask for loading a subprogram to the main program
opens (see section 5.4 “Subprogram“).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the vertical soft-
key bar 2 opens.
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “HighSpeed settings“ the
input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal
speed in relation to the machining method opens
(see section 5.5 “HighSpeed settings”).

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.3 Blank
The blank is needed for the simulation and the simultaneous recording. A
realistic simulation is only possible with a blank, that represents the actual
blank dimensions as close as possible.
The shape (Block centred, Pipe, Cylinder or N-corners) and dimensions of
the blank must be defined.
5.3.1 Selecting the function “Blank“
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Blank” the blank input win-

dow opens.
5.3.2 Parameters for the “Blank”
Parameter Meaning
Spindle
 Main spindle
 Counterspindle
Blank The following blank forms can be selected:

 Block centred
 Pipe
 Cylinder
 N corner
ZA Initial dimension
ZI (abs/inc) Final dimension related to ZA (absolute or incre-

mental)
ZB (abs/inc) Machining dimension

Section 5 Various
Notes :
Parameter Meaning (continuation)
XA Outside diameter (only with pipe or cylinder)
XI Inside diameter (absolute or incremental)
N Number of edges (only with N corner)
SW Width across flats (only with N corner)
W Width of blank (only with Block centred)
L Length of blank (only with Block centred))
5.3.3 Changing the graphical view on the blank
The graphic view of the blank and cycles can be changed under the func-
tion “Various” (blank), as well as under the technology cycles Drilling”,
“Turning” and “Milling”, by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
Help pictures and animations are only displayed if the VSK 2 “Graphic
view” is deselected.
You can change the graphic view of the blank as follows:
1. In the operating area “Program” press the HSK 1.6

“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1.1 “Blank” to open the input mask
for the blank settings.
Activate or deactivate the VSK 2 “Graphic view” to
switch between a:
 3D view/side view

Various Section 5
Notes :
 and an outline drawing.
5.3.4 Changing the settings for the blank

“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1.1 “Blank”.

The setting window for the blank opens.
3. Optionally change the help graphic view on the blank

by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Enter the parameters for the blank in the corre-

sponding input fields (see parameter list in section
5.3.2).
5. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”

A new program block “WORKPIECE” is inserted into

the Work plan (see picture below)
5.4 Subprogram
If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different

workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate subrou-
tine. You can then call this subroutine in any program.
Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.
ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and subprogram.
This means that you can call a "standard" sequential ShopTurn or G code-
program as subprogram from another G code program.
In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram.
The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines.
If you want to call a sequential ShopTurn program as a subroutine, the

program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate
program in “AUTO” mode). This is not necessary for G code
subroutines.

Section 5 Various
Notes :
The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a
separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs",
"Subprograms" directories).
If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use the
G code command "EXTCALL".
Note:
Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopTurn evaluates the
settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also
remain active even after the subprogram has ended.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main
program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after
calling the subprogram.
5.4.1 Selecting the function “Subprogram”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Subprogram”, the input win-

dow for calling up a subprogram opens.
5.4.2 Subprogram call
1. In the operating area “Program“ press the HSK 1.6

“Various“.
2. Press the VSK 1.6 ”Subprogram”.
The input window for the subprogram call opens.
3. Enter the directory path to the subprogram and the
name of the subprogram in the input mask.
Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your inputs or
press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort.
A new program block “Execute” with the subpro-
gram path is inserted into the work plan (see picture
below).

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.5 High-Speed Settings
With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on ma-
chining speed, as well as accuracy and surface finish.
The optimal speed in conjunction with the machining method (roughing,
prefinishing, finishing) can be achieved with the function “High-Speed set-
tings”.
It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before pro-
gramming the geometry part.
Machining methods:
With the function “High-Speed settings” you can select from 4 different
technological machining methods (see pictures to the right):
 "roughing"
 "prefinishing"
 "finishing"
 "deselect" (default setting)
These four machining methods are associated in CAM programs for HSC-
machining directly with accuracy, velocity and surface quality of the con-
tour path (see picture below).
The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by adjusting
the tolerance value. You can assign each machining operation different
tolerance values and technologies.
5.5.1 Selecting the function “High-Speed settings“
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “HighSpeed settings“ the

High-speed settings screen opens.
The screen changes in intervals between helping picture and animation.

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.2 Parameter for „High-Speed Settings“
Parameter Helping picture Animation

PL The parameter for the machining plane is optional
and has to be activated by a machine data setting.
Tolerance Tolerance values for the machining.
Machining:
 Roughing
 Prefinish
 Finishing
none
 Deselect
5.5.3 Changing the High-Speed settings

“Various”.
2. Here, press the VSK 2.1 “HighSpeed settings“.
3. Optionally change the graphic view on the blank by
pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Enter the parameter values for “Tolerance” and
“Machining”.
Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to accept your inputs or
abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
A new program block “CYCLE832” with the high
speed settings is inserted into the program

Simulation Section 6
Notes :
ShopTurn provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for
displaying the simulation and the machining paths.
During simulation, the current program is calculated entirely and the result
is displayed in graphically.
You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

 Side view
 Face view
 2 windowed view
The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece
contours.
The tool is displayed in yellow colour.
The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour:

Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse
Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The

displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the ap-
proximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining
program on the machine (incl. tool change).
If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops.
In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program
block currently being executed are also displayed.
The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also dis-
played in the simulation.
Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultane-

ous recording:
 Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed as
programmed.
 Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface.
 After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are de-
leted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is dis-
played (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane).
 Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display.
This means that, in the case of multiple clampings, the machining op-
erations for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one
another.
Note:
If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one de-
fined in ShopTurn, you can define a new blank in the program (see section
5.3 in this module).

Section 6 Simulation
Notes :
6.1 Selecting the function “Simulation”
The function “Simulation” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG“,
“MDA“ and “AUTO“ as follows:
In the operating area “Program” with a program
loaded, press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to start a
simulation run. The following screen opens, with a
side view on the blank by default. After a short pe-
riod of calculation the simulation starts.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Face view” the simulated

workpiece will be shown in a face view from the front
Following softkeys and functions will be available in the VSK- bar:

Notes :

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Stop“ the simulation will
be halted. The softkey will be replaced by the VSK
1.1 “Start” (see softkey below).
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start” the simulation will
be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced
by the VSK 1.1 “Stop” (see softkey above).
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “SBL“ the simulation will be
processed block by block. This softkey replaces the
softkey “Start”, if the VSK 4 “Single block” is acti-
vated under the function “Program control”.
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Reset“ the simulation will
be aborted, and can be started again by pressing the
VSK 1.1 “Start”.
The VSK 1.3 “Side view” is activated by default
showing the blank and the simulation in a side view.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Face view” the simulation
will be shown in a view on the face of the blank.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the vertical
softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the
view on the simulation process (see section 6.3).
key bar opens, where you can adjust the level of de-
tails that will be shown during the simulation (see
section 6.4).
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the ver-
tical softkey bar opens, with functions to control the
simulation run (see section 6.6).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” the vertical soft-
key bar 2 with the following functions will be dis-
played:
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Show tool path” the dis-
play of the simulated tool path can be switched on
and off.
By pressing the VSK 2.4 “Delete tool path” the ani-
mated tool path in the simulation window will be de-
leted. A new tool path is shown immediately after
pressing this softkey or after running a new simula-
tion (if the simulation is in “Stop”- or “Reset”-mode).
By pressing the VSK 2.5 “Blank” you can change
the dimensions of the simulated blank (see also sec-
tion 5.3). This softkey is active if the simulation is in
“Reset” mode.

Notes :
6.3 Further views
You can change the graphical view on the blank, to view the simulation
process in an optimal way.
6.3.1 Selecting the function “Further views
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further view” the function

“2 windows” is displayed in the vertical softkey bar,
for further views of the blank .

By pressing the VSK 2 “2 windows”, the screen is
split in two sub-windows, one showing the blank
from the side and one showing the blank from the
face (see picture above).

Notes :
6.4 Details
With the function “Details” you can zoom in and out of the workpiece .
6.4.1 Selecting the function “Details”
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the following func-

tions are available in a vertical softkey bar.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Autozoom“ the workpiece
fills out the simulation window in an optimal way.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in into

the simulation window.
Alternatively you can press the “+“-key (plus) on the
number block of the keyboard.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Zoom -“ you can zoom out
of the simulation window.
Alternatively you can press the “-“-key (minus) on
the keyboard.
By pressing the VSK 4 “Zoom” a blue frame opens
in the simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the
exent of the frame size.
Press the VSK1 “Zoom +” to increase and the VSK
2 “Zoom -” to decrease the frame size.
Move the frame with the blue cursor keys on the
keyboard.
After adjusting the frame, press the VSK 8 “Accept”

to zoom to the selected extent of the frame or abort

Notes :
6.5 Selecting the function “Program control”
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the fol-

lowing functions will be shown in a vertical softkey
bar on the right side of the screen.

By pressing the VSK 1 “100% override” the feedrate

override is set to the maximum override of 100%.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Override +” the override will
be increased in 5% steps each time you press the
softkey, until a maximum of 100% is reached.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Override -” the override will
be decreased in 5% steps each time you press the
softkey until a minimum of 0% is reached.
With a feedrate override of 0% the simulation is
paused.
By pressing the VSK 4 “Single block” the simulation
will be executed block by block.
With pressing this softkey the VSK 1.1 “Start” in the
operating area “Simulation” will be exchanged with
the “VSK 1.1 “SBL” (see section 6.2).
By pressing the VSK 7 “Alarm” the “Simulation
alarms” window opens, with alarm messages that
have occurred during a simulation run
This can be used for error detection.

Notes :
6.6.1 Selecting the function “Alarm”

alarms” window opens, with a list of all current active
alarm messages that occurred during the simulation.
For error messages and acknowledgement symbols
see module - B526 “Operating area Diagnostics”,
section 3.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Acknowl. Alarm” all with

the “Reset”- or “Cancel”-symbol marked alarm mes-
sages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as
long as no appropriate error message is shown.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Simulation Power On” you

can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation.
Press the VSK 8 “OK” to confirm or the VSK 7

“Cancel” to abort the warm restart.
With a warm start the simulation will be ended and
started anew.

the operating area “Program control”.

Section 7 NC Execute
Notes :
7.0 NC Execute
The function “NC Execute” lets you load the active program from the pro-
gram editor to the operating area “Machine” in the operating mode “AUTO”
ready for machining.
7.1 Selecting the function “NC Execute”
By pressing the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” the control,

switches to the operating area “Machine” under the
operating mode “AUTO”.
The program is loaded into the internal memory of

the NC and is now ready for machining (see picture
below).

B611 Drilling
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Drilling” by programming two
G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with the programGUIDE in Shop-
Turn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of drilling cycles
and position patterns.
Content:
Simple programming example
Complex programming example
B611
B611

B611
Drilling - programGUIDE: Description
Drilling
programGUIDE:
This module explains the programming of a simple START
drilling example with the programGUIDE in Shop-
Turn, as well as well as the programming of a
more complex workpiece by means of drilling cy- Simple
cles and position patterns. programming
. example
Complex
programming
example
Drilling
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Simple programming example
Notes :
Description:
A simple drilling operation is to be programmed with a drilling cycle with

the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The G code lines and the drill cycle must be programmed and the program
is to be simulated.
For this, the tool- and technology data below are to be used:
Tool data: Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)
Technology data: F 150 mm/min

S 1000 rpm
2.1 Creating a new G code program with the programGUIDE
A new G code program can be created from all operating modes, as fol-
lows:
1. Press the “Program Manager”-key on the keyboard.

The program manager will be opened directly.
- OR -

panel.
Press the yellow HSK 1.4 “Program Manager”.

The program manager opens.
2. Select a drive where you want to create the program

(“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”), by pressing a horizontal
softkey.
3. Press the VSK 2 “New“.

new programs opens.
4. Press the VSK 4 „programGUIDE G code“ to open
the input mask for creating a new ShopTurn G code
program.
Select “Main program MPF”.
5. Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field,
e.g. DIN_DRILLING_1.MPF and accept with press-
ing the VSK 8 “OK”.
The editor window for entering G code commands
opens.

Simple programming example Section 2
Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Drilling
The following G code program, with the call up of a simple drilling cycle, is
to be programmed.
1. Program the first line of the program:

N10 G54 G17 G90
2. Insert now a blank for the simulation.
Press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the operating

area “Various”.
Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the input mask for

the blank.
3. Fill in the following parameters for the blank:
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.
The following line will be inserted into the program:

N20 WORKPIECE(,,"","CYLINDER",192,0,-100,
-80,100)

Notes :
4. Now, insert a drill tool into the program.
Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool“.
The tool list window opens.
Select the tool “DRILL_D8.5” by using the blue cur-

sor key on the keyboard.
Press the VSK 1.8 “OK”.
The following program line is inserted into the pro-

gram:
N30 T="DRILL_D8.5"
Optionally you can program the tool by hand.
5 Programm the following G code commands:

N40 Y0 Z2=700
N50 S1000 M3 F150
N60 G0 X0 Z1 Z2=250
6. Program the drilling-cycle “CYCLE82”.

For this, press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.” to open the tech-
nology “Drilling”.
Press the VSK 2 “Drilling Reaming”.
Press the VSK 3 “Drilling“. The input mask for the

drilling cycle “CYCLE82” opens.
7. Fill out the input mask like displayed below:
The following program line will be inserted into the

program:
N70 CYCLE82(100,0,1,,25,0.6,10,1,11)
8. Programm the following G code commands:

N80 G0 X200 Z200 G5
9. Program the program end:

N90 M30

Notes :
10. Simulate the machining.
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to run the simula-

tion of the program.
The simulation starts in a “Side view” on the blank by
default.
To see the simulation of the machining from the front

side of the blank, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Section 3 Complex programming example
Notes :
Description:
By using different drilling cycles (Centering, Drilling, Thread drilling) and a

position pattern, a more complex programGUIDE-program (drill pattern) is
to be created in ShopTurn.
Objective:
The workpiece shown below is to be programmed.

Afterwards, the program is to be simulated.
The following tools and technology data are to be used for programming.
Tool data: Centre drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12)

Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)
Tap M10 (TAP_M10)

S 500 rpm
Approach strategy As a start position for the machining, the first pro-
grammed drill hole is to be used.
This position is approached in rapid traverse.

Complex programming example Section 3
Notes :
3.1 Example: Drill pattern
The following program, with the call up of a drilling-, center drilling- and
thread drilling-cycle, is to be programmed:
Create a new G code programGUIDE-program in ShopTurn, like described

in section 2.1 in this module.
Give the program a name, for example “DIN_DRILLING_2”.
1. Program the first G code lines of the program:
N10 G54 G17 G90
N20 TRANSMIT
N30 SETMS(2)
2. Now insert a blank for the simulation.

For this, press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the
operating area “Various”.
Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter
mask for the blank.
3. Fill in the following parameters for the blank:

-80,100)

Notes :
4. Insert now a centre drill tool into the program.
Press the VSK 1.1 “Select tool”.
Use the blue cursor keys to select the tool
“CENTERDRILL_D12”.
The program line N50 T="CENTERDRILL_D12" is

inserted into the program.
Optional you can program the line by hand.
5. Program the following G code commands:

N60 Y0 Z2=700
N70 M24
N80 S500 M3 F150
N90 G0 X0 Z100 Z2=250
6. Program the centre drill cycle “CYCLE81”.

Press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”, to open the technology
“Drilling”.
Press the VSK 1 “Centering”.
The input mask for the centering cycle “CYCLE81”

opens.

N100 MCALL CYCLE81(100,0,1,11,,0,10,1,11)
8. Program now a position pattern (Position circle) for

the following drillings.
Press the VSK 7 “Positions” for selecting a position

pattern.
Press the VSK 3 “Position circle”. The parameter

input mask for the position data of the bolt hole pat-
tern opens.

Notes :
9. Insert “HOLES” into the “LAB” field to set a name for
the jump mark for the repeat positions.
Fill out the rest of the input mask like displayed be-
low.

N110 HOLES: HOLES (0,0,30,0,30,8,1010, 0,,,1).

N120 MCALL
N130 M25
N140 G0 X200 Z150
11. Insert the following tool “DRILL_D8.5” into the pro-

gram (see step 5) or program the following line by
hand:
N150 T="Drill_D8.5" D1
N160 Y0 Z2=700
N170 M24
N180 S1500 M3 F150
N190 G0 X0 Z100
13. Program the cycle for the drilling (CYCLE82).

Press the VSK 2 “Drilling Reaming”.
Press the VSK 3 “Drilling”.

The input mask for the drilling cycle “CYCLE82”
opens.
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

N200 MCALL CYCLE82(100,0,1,,18,0.6,10,1,11).

Notes :
15. Enter the following G code lines:
N210 REPEATB HOLE
N220 MCALL
N230 M25
N240 G0 X200 Z150
16. Insert the tool “TAP_M10” into the program (see
step 5) or program the following line by hand:
N250 T="TAP_M10"

N260 Y0 Z2=700
N270 M24
N280 S60 M3
N290 G0 X0 Z100
18. Finally program the cycle for the thread drilling

(CYCLE84).
Press the VSK 6 “Thread”.
If not active by default, press the VSK 3 “Tapping”

to open the input mask for the CYCLE84 “Tapping”.

N300 MCALL CYCLE84(100,0,1,,15,0,5,,1.5,0,
60,60,0,1,0,0,5,1.4,,,,,1001,2001001)
20. Enter following G code lines and end the program:

N310 REPEATB HOLES
N320 MCALL
N330 M25
N340 G0 X200 Z200
N350 M30

Notes :
22. Start the simulation of the program.
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to open the simula-

tion window. The control calculates the simulation
and shows the simulation in a side view.

of the blank, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

B611 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate
B618 Milling
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Milling” by programming two
This module explains the programming of a simple milling example (multi-edged spigot) with the pro-
gramGUIDE in ShopTurn, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (rectangular
pocket).
Content:
B618
B618

B618
Milling - programGUIDE: Description
Milling
programGUIDE:
milling example (multi-edged spigot) with the pro-
gramGUIDE in ShopTurn, as well as the program-
ming of a more complex workpiece (rectangular Simple
pocket). programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Milling
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple milling operation, by means of a multi edged spigot on the face

side of the blank is to be programmed in a G code program with the pro-
gramGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:

The G code lines, the blank and the milling cycle must be programmed and
then simulated.
For this the following tool- and technology data are to be used:
Tool data: Cutter Ø 8 mm (CUTTER_D8)
Technology data: F = 500 mm/min

V = 120 m/min
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE G code program
A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes
“JOG, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:

- OR -

panel.


softkey.

new programs opens.


e.g. DIN_MILLING_1.MPF and accept with pressing
the VSK 8 “OK”.

opens.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Multi-edged spigot
The following program with a call-up up of a multi-edge milling cycle is to

be programmed:
1. Program the first two G code commands:

N100 G54 G17 G90
N110 TRANSMIT
2. Insert now blank for the simulation into the program.
Press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the work area

“Various”.
Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parameter

mask for the blank input.
3. Insert the following values for the blank into the

parameter mask.
Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.
The following line is inserted into the program:

N120 WORKPIECE(,,"","CYLINDER",192,0,-100,-
80,100)

Notes :
4. Insert a tool into the program.

Select the tool “CUTTER_D8” by using the blue cur-
The G code command N130 T="CUTTER_D8"

Is inserted into the program.
Optionally you can program this line by hand..
5 Program now the following G code commands:

N140 M6
N150 SETMS(2)
N160 M24
N170 S4500 M3
6. Program the milling cycle (CYCLE79) for the multi-

edged spigot .
For this press the HSK 1.5 “Mill.” to open the tech-
nology “Milling”.
Press the VSK 3 “Multi-edge spigot”.
Press the VSK 5 “Multi-edge”.

The input mask for the milling cycle
“CYCLE79” (Multi-edge) opens.
7. Fill out the input mask as follows:
The following line for the CYCLE79 is inserted into te

program:
N180 CYCLE79(100,0,1,-5,6,75,0,0,0,1,100,80,
2.5,0,0,500,0,1,1,2,,1,111)

Notes :
8. Insert the following G code commands into the pro-
gram and program the program end:
N190 G0 X200 Z200
N200 M30
9. At the end, simulate the machining.
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation” to start the simula-

The simulation starts in a “Side view” on the blank by
default.


Notes :
3.1 Programming example: Rectangular pocket
Description:
A more complex G code programGUIDE program, by means of a rectan-

gular pocket on the front face, is to be programmed in ShopTurn.
Objective:

The G code lines, the blank and the milling cycle must be programmed
and then simulated.
The following tools and technology data are to be used for programming:
Technology data: F = 0,03 mm/Zahn,

V = 220 m/min

Notes :
The following program, with the call up of a rectangular pocket cycle is to
be programmed.

in section 2.1 in this module.
Give the program a name, for example “DIN_MILLING_2.MPF”.
1. Program the first G code line of the program:
N100 G55 G17 G90

“Various”.
the blank parameters.
3. Insert the following values for the blank into the
parameter mask.

80,100)
4. Now, insert a cutter tool into the program.

Select the tool “CUTTER_D8” by using the blue cur-

Section 3
Notes :
Press the VSK 1.8 “3D”.
gram:
N120 T="CUTTER_D8"
Alternatively you can program this line by hand.
N130 M6
N140 G0 X0 Z100
N150 TRANSMIT
N160 SETMS(2)
N170 M24
N180 S1000 M3 F2000
6. Insert a rectangular pocket milling cycle into the

program.
For this, press the HSK 1.5 “Mill.” to open the tech-
Press the VSK 2 “Pocket”, to open the work area for

the “Pocket”.
Press the VSK 3 “Rectang. pocket”.

The following input mask for the rectangular pocket
milling cycle opens:
7. Fill out the input mask as follows.

Following G code line is inserted into the program:
N190 POCKET3(100,0,1,3,23,23,4,0,0,0,3,0,0,
2000,0.1,0,21,75,8,3,15,7,1,0,1,2,11100,1,111)

Notes :
8. Program the following G code commands and the
end of the program:
N200 G0 X200 Z100
N210 M25
N220 M30
9. Start the simulation of the program.

tion window.
The control calculates the simulation and shows the
simulation in a side view.


Section 3
Notes :

B634 Turning
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Turning” by programming two
This module explains the programming of a simple turning example (spigot) with the programGUIDE
in ShopTurn, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (threaded spigot) by means
of different turning cycles.
Content:
B634
B634

B634
Turning - programGUIDE: Description
Turning
programGUIDE:
turning example (spigot) with the programGUIDE
in ShopTurn, as well as the programming of a
more complex workpiece (threaded spigot) by Simple
means of different turning cycles. programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Turning
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple turning operation is to be programmed as a G code program in

ShopTurn, using the programGUIDE.
Objective:

The G code lines, the blank and turning cycle must be programmed and
afterwards the program is to be simulated.
For this, the following tool- and technology data are to be used:
Tool data: ROUGHING_TOOL_A80

Technology data: F 0.3 mm/rev
Work piece data: Blank part: Ø 100 x 130 mm
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program
A new G code program can be created from within the operating modes

- OR -

panel.
The program manager window opens.

softkey.

new programs opens.


e.g. “DIN_TURNING_1.MPF” and accept with press-

opens.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Spigot
The G code program shown below is to be programmed:
1. Program the first lines of the program by inserting

the following G code commands:
N100 G54 G17 G90
N110 G0 X400 Z200
2. Insert now a blank for the simulation into the pro-

gram.
“Various”.
Press the VSK 1 “Blank”.
The following input mask for the blank input opens.
3. Insert following values/parameters for the blank:

100,100)

Notes :
4. Now, insert a new tool into the program.

Mark the desired tool “ROUGHING_TOOL_A80” in

the tool list window with the orange selection cursor,
by using the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.

gram:
N130 T="ROUGHING_TOOL_A80"
Alternatively you can program the tool by hand.

gram:
N140 Y0 Z2=700
N150 G96 S200 M4
6. Insert a “Stock removal” cycle into the program.

(CYCLE 951)
Press the HSK 1.3 “Turning”, to open the technol-

ogy “Turning”.
Press the VSK 1 “Stock removal”.

The work area with the functions for the technology
“Stock removal” opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Stock removal 1”, to open the

input mask for the “Stock removal 1” cycle.
7. Fill out the input mask as displayed below:

N160 CYCLE951(100,0,50,-50,50,-50,1,3,0,0,11,0,
0,0,1,0.3,0,2,1110000)

Notes :
8. Program the last lines of the program and the pro-
gram end, by inserting the following lines:
N170 G0 X400 Z200
N180 M30

In order to start the simulation run, press the HSK
1.7 “Simulation”.
The control calculates the simulation parameters
and opens the simulation in the simulation window in
a “Side view” by default.
To view the simulation with a view on the face of the

blank, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Notes :
Description:
A more complex G code program (threaded spigot), with the call up of dif-
ferent turning cycles (stock removal, groove, undercut, thread longitudinal,
cutoff) is to be created with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:

The G code lines, the blank, stock removal, groove, undercut, thread longi-
tudinal, cut off are to be programmed and afterwards simulated.
The following tool- and technology data are needed for the programming:
Tool- and ROUGHING_TOOL_A80 ( F 0.300 mm/rev)

technology data
FINISHING_TOOL_35 (F 0.150 mm/rev)
PLUNGECUTTER_3 ( F 0.150 mm/rev)
FINISHING_TOOL_35 (F 0.300 mm/rev)
THREADING_TOOL_2 ( F 2.000 mm/rev)
PLUNGECUTTER_3 ( F 0.100 mm/rev)

Notes :
3.1 Programming example: Threaded spigot
The following program with the call up of the turning cycles, stock removal,
groove, undercut, thread longitudinal and cutoff is to be programmed.

in section 2.1 in this module and give the program a name, for example
„DIN_TURNING_2.MPF“.
1. Program the first G code lines of the program:

N100 G54 G17 G90
N110 G0 X200 Z200
2. Now insert a blank for the simulation.

For this, press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the
operating area “Various”.
Press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the input mask
for the blank parameters.
3. Insert the following values for the blank into the input
mask:

gram:
110,100)
Section 3
Notes :
4. Insert now a tool (ROUGHING_TOOL_A80) into the
program.

the tool list window with the orange selection cursor.
gram:
Alternatively you can program the line by hand.

N140 Y0 Z2=700
N150 G96 S260 M4
6. Program the first “stock removal 1” turning cycle

(Face roughing)
ogy “Turning”.
Press the VSK 1 “Stock removal”

Press the VSK 3 “Stock removal 1”, to open the pa-
rameter mask for the “Stock removal 1” cycle.

gram:
N160 CYCLE951(100,2,-5,0,-5,0,1,2,0.2,0.2,
12,0,0,0,1,0.3,0,2,1110000)

Notes :
8. Program the first „Stock removal 2“ cycle into the
program (longitudinal roughing).

input mask for the “Stock removal 2” cycle “.

gram:
N170 CYCLE951(100,0,60,-60,60,-60,1,5,0.3,0.3,
11,0,5,5,1,0.3,1,2,0)
10. Program the following G code line:

N180 G0 X200 Z200
11. Insert now a new tool (FINISHING_TOOL_35) into

the program:
Mark the desired tool “FINISHING_TOOL_35” in the
tool list window with the orange selection cursor.

gram:
N190 T="FINISHING_TOOL_35"
Alternatively you can program the line by hand.

Notes :
N200 Y0 Z2=700
N210 G96 S150 M4
13. Program the second „Stock removal 2“ cycle into the

program (longitudinal finishing).
Press the VSK 4 “Stock removal 2”, to open the in-

put mask for the “Stock removal 2” cycle “.

gram:
N220 CYCLE951(100,0,60,-60,60,-60,1,5,0.3,0.3,
21,0,5,5,1,0.15,1,2,0)
15. Program the following G code command:

N230 G0 X200 Z200
16. Insert a new tool (ROUGHING_TOOL_A80) into the

program:

the tool list window with the orange selection cursor.

gram:

Notes :
N250 Y0 Z2=700
N260 G96 S260 M4
18. Program another “Stock removal 2” cycle

(CYCLE951).

parameter mask for the “Stock removal 2” cycle “.

N270 CYCLE951(60,0,42,-25,42,-25,1,5,0.3,0.3,11,
3,0,3,1,0.3,1,2,1010000)

N280 G0 X200 Z200
21. Insert a new tool (PLUNGECUTTER_3) into the pro-

gram.
Mark the desired tool “PLUNGECUTTER_3” in the

gram:
N290 T="PLUNGECUTTER_3"

Notes :
N300 MY0 Z2=700
N310 G96 S300 M4
23. Insert now a “Groove“ cycle (CYCLE930) into the

program..
Press the VSK 2 “Groove”.
“Groove” opens.
Press the VSK 4 “Groove 2“, to open the input mask

for the cycle “Groove 2”.

N320 CYCLE930(60,-45,6.23673,8,5,,0,10,10,
1,1,1,1,0.2,2,1,10130,,1,30,0.15,1,0.1,0.1,2,10)

N330 G0 X200 Z200
26. Insert a new tool (FINISHING_TOOL_35) into the

program.
Mark the desired tool “FINISHING_TOOL_35” in the


Notes :
gram:

gram:
N350 Y0 Z2=700
N360 G97 S1500 M4
28. Insert now a “Undercut” cycle (CYCLE940) into the

program.
Press the VSK 3 “Undercut”.
The work area with the functions for the “Undercut”
cycle opens.
Press the VSK 5 “Undercut thrd DIN” to open the
input mask for the cycle “Undercut thread (DIN76).

The following G code line is inserted into the pro-
gram:
N370 CYCLE940(42,-25,"A",1,1,0.3,13,,,,,30,
60,2.5,0.1,0.2,0.2,15,,,2,1000)

N380 G0 X200 Z200
31. Insert now a new tool (THREADING_TOOL_2) into

the program:
Mark the desired tool “THREADING_TOOL_2” in the

Notes :

gram:
N390 T="THREADING_TOOL_2"

gram:
N400 Y0 Z2=700
N410 G97 S400 M4
33. Insert a “Thread” cycle (CYCLE99) into the program.

The work area with the functions for the “thread”
cycle opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Thread long.” to open the input

mask for the “Thread longitudinal” cycle.

gram:
N420 CYCLE99(0,42,-24,,4,0,1.227,0.1,30,0,3,0,2,
1110101,4,2,0.5,0.5,0,0,1,0,0.708409,1,,,,2,0)

Notes :
N430 G0 X200 Z200
36. Insert a new tool (PLUNGECUTTER_3) into the

program.

Mark the desired tool “PLUNGECUTTER_3” in the

gram:
N490 T="PLUNGECUTTER_3"

N440 Y0 Z2=700
N450 G96 S200 M4
N460 G95 F0.1
38. As a last machining step, insert a “Cutoff” cycle

(CYCLE92) into the program.
Press the VSK 5 “Cutoff”.
The input mask for the “Cutoff” cycle opens.

gram:
N470 CYCLE92(100,-80,0,-2,0,1,150,1500,
3,0.1,0.05,200,0.2,0,,2,11000)
40. Program the last lines of the program and the pro-
gram end.
Insert the following lines into the program:
N480 G0 X200 Z200
N490 M30

Notes :
41. Lastly, start the simulation of the program.
tion window.
The control calculates the simulation and shows the
simulation in a side view.


B626 Contour turning
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology „Contour turning“ by program-
ming two G code programs with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
This module explains the programming of a contour turning machining with the programGUIDE in
ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of contour
descriptions, stock removal- and residual cutting cycles.
Content:
B624
B626

B626
Contour turning - programGUIDE: Description
Contour turning
programGUIDE:
This module explains the programming of a con- START
tour turning machining with the programGUIDE in
ShopTurn, as well as well as the programming of
a more complex workpiece by means of contour Simple
descriptions, stock removal- and residual cutting programming
cycles. example
Complex
programming
example
Contour turning
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple contour turning G code program, using a contour and stock re-
moval cycle is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:

The G code lines and the stock removal cycle must be programmed and
the program is to be simulated.
For this, the tool- and technology data below are to be used:

Technology data: F 0,4 mm/U, V 200 m/min
Approach strategy: As a start position for the machining, the following

position is to be programmed:
X 30
Z 0
2.1 Creating a new ShopTurn programGUIDE program
A new G code program can be created within the operating modes „JOG“,
„MDA“ and „AUTO“, as follows:
- OR -
panel.


(“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”), by pressing the corre-
sponding horizontal softkey.

new programs opens.


e.g DIN_CONTOUR_1.MPF and accept with press-
opens.
Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Bevel
The following program with the call up of a simple stock removal cycle is to
be programmed:
1. Program now the first lines of the program:

N100 G55 G17 G90
N110 G0 X400 Z200
2. Insert a blank for the simulation into the program.
Press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the working

area “Various”.
Here, press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the input
mask for the blank.
3. Enter the following parameters for the blank:

program:
-100,100)

Notes :
4. Insert now a tool into the program.

Select the tool “ROUGHING_TOOL_A80” by using
the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.

N130 T="ROUGHING_TOOL_A80”
5. Insert the following G code commands into the

program:
N140 Y0 Z2=700
N150 S200 M4 F0.4
6. Program now the call up of the contour “CYCLE62”.

Note:
The contour itself is programmed at the end of the
program (see section 12).
For this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. turn.” to open the
technology “Contour turning”.
Press now the VSK 1 “Contour”.

The vertical softkey bar for creating or calling up a
contour opens.
Press the VSK 2 “Contour call” to open the input

mask for the call up of a contour.
7. Insert the following contour name into the input

mask:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

N160 CYCLE62("BEVEL",1,,)
Note:
The contour “BEVEL” you called up here, will be
created in section 12.
8. Insert now a stock removal cycle “CYCLE952” into

the program.
Press the VSK 2 “Stock removal” to open the pa-

rameter window for the stock removal cycle.
The following parameter mask for the CYCLE952
opens (see next page).

Notes :

N170 CYCLE952("ROUGHING",,
"REST_ROUGHING",2301311,0.4,0,0,3,0.1,0.1,0,0,
0.1,0,1,100,0,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,12,110)

N180 G0 X400 Z200
N190 M30
11. Program the contour description for machining at the

end of the program (after M30).

contour opens.
Press the VSK 1 “New contour” to create a new

contour.
An input mask opens, where you can assign a name
to the new contour.
12. Enter the following name for the contour:

Notes :
The operating area “Contour” with the input mask for
the starting point of the contour opens (recognizable
by the yellow vertical softkeys and the yellow con-
tour step bar on the left side of the screen, see next
page).
13 Enter the following coordinates for the contour

starting point.
14. Insert as the only contour element a straight line ZX

into the program.
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX” to insert a straight
line in ZX-direction to the contour description.
The input mask for the “Straight ZX” opens.
15. Insert the following coordinates into the input mask:
Note:
The starting angle to the Z axis “α1“ will be automati-
cally calculated from the values “Z“ and “X“.
16. Examine now the finished contour.

For this, switch with the orange selection cursor to
the yellow contour step bar on the left side of the
screen, by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-left” key
on the keyboard.
Place the orange selection cursor on the END-
symbol, using the blue “cursor-down” key on the
keyboard.
The following screen with the a sketch of the finished
contour is displayed (see next page).

Notes :
Finish the contour description by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.
17. The following program lines will be inserted into the

program.:
N200 E_LAB_A_BEVEL: ;#SM Z:4

G18 G90 DIAMOF;*GP*
G0 Z0 X15 ;*GP*
G1 Z-50 X50 ;*GP*
E_LAB_E_SCHRAEGE:
18. Simulate now the machining.


and the simulation window opens, showing the work-
piece in side view, by default (see the picture on the
next page).

Notes :

work piece, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Notes :
Description:
A more complex G code program (spigot) is to be programmed using dif-

ferent turning cycles (contour, stock removal and residual cutting) with the
programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:

Then the program is to be simulated.
.
The following tool- and technology data are to be used for programming:

Technology data: (F 0,3 mm/U, V 260 m/min)
BUTON_TOOL_8
(F 0,25 mm/U, V 240 m/min)
FINISHING_TOOL_35
(F 0,12 mm/U, 280 m/min)
Approach strategy: The following position is programmed as the
contours starting point:
X 0
Z 0
This point is approached in the cycle automatically
with rapid traverse.

Notes :
The following program is to be created, with the call up of contour descrip-

tions, as well as stock removal- and residual cutting cycles.

in section 2.1 in this module and give the program a name, for example
„DIN_CONTOUR_2.MPF“.
1. Program now the first lines of the program with fol-

lowing G code commands:
N100 G55 G17 G90
N110 G0 X200 Z200
Press the HSK 1.6 “Various” to open the working

area “Various”.
Here, press the VSK 1 “Blank” to open the parame-

ter window for the blank.
3. Enter the following parameters for the blank:

program:
-100,90)

Notes :
4. Insert now a tool into the program.

Select the tool “ROUGHIN_TOOL_A80” by using the
blue cursor key on the keyboard.

Following program line is inserted into the program:
5. Program the following G code commands.

N140 Y0 Z2=700
N150 S260 M4 F0.3
6. Program now the call up of the contour “CYCLE62”.

Note:
The contour itself is programmed at the end of the
program (see section 31).
For this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. turn.” to open

the technology “Contour turning”.

The vertical softkey bar with functions for creating or
calling up a contour opens.

mask for the contour call up.

mask:

N160 CYCLE62("SPIGOT_BLANK",1,,)
Note:
The contour “SPIGOT_BLANK” you called up here,
will be created in section 31.
8. Program now the next contour call “CYCLE62”.
The vertical softkey bar with function for creating or

calling up a contour opens.

Notes :
mask for the call up of the contour.

mask:
The following line will inserted into the program:

N170 CYCLE62("SPIGOT_FINISHED",1,,)
Note:
The contour “SPIGOT_FINISHED” you called up
here, will be created in section 52.
10. Insert now a stock removal cycle “CYCLE952” into

the program.
Press the VSK 2 “Stock removal” to open the input

mask for the stock removal cycle.
The following program code is inserted into the pro-

gram:
N180 CYCLE952("ROUGHING",,
"REST_ROUGHING",2301311,0.3,0,0,1.9,0.1,0.1,0.
2,0.2,0.1,0,3,0,0,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,12,1110110)

Notes :
N190 G0 X200 Z200
13. Insert another tool into the program.

Select the tool “BUTTON_TOOL_8” by using the

gram:
N200 T="BUTTON_TOOL_8"
Optionally you can program the tool by hand.

N210 Y0 Z2=700
N220 S240 M4 F0.25
15. Insert a contour call “CYCLE62” into the program.

contour opens.

16. Enter the following contour name into the input

mask:

Note:
The contour “SPIGOT_BLANK” you called up here,
will be created in section 31.

Notes :
17. Insert another contour call “CYCLE62” into the pro-
gram.

contour opens.


mask:

Note:
The contour “SPIGOT_FINISHED” you called up
here, will be created in section 52.
19. Insert a residual cutting cycle “CYCLE952” into the

program.
Press the VSK 3 “Cut resid. stock”.

The “Cut residual material” input mask opens.

gram:
N250 CYCLE952("SEMI_ROUGHING",
"REST_ROUGHING","",1301311,0.25,0.2,0,1,0.1,0.
1,0.2,0.2,0.1,0,1,0,,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,112,1100110)

Notes :
N260 G0 X200 Z200
22. Insert another tool into the program for the following
stock removal cycle:

Select the tool “FINISHING_TOOL_35” by using the

gram:
23. Program the following G code commands by hand:

N280 Y0 Z2=700
N290 S280 M4 F0.12
24. Insert another contour call “CYCLE62“ into the pro-

gram for the next machining operation.
Press the VSK 1 “Contour”.

and calling up a contour opens.

window for the call up of a contour.

mask:

Note:
The contour you called up here, will be created at
the end of the program in section 31.
26. Insert another contour call “CYCLE62“ into the pro-

gram for the next machining operation.


window for the call up of a contour.

Notes :
mask:

Note:
The contour you called up here, will be created at
the end of the program in section 52.
28. As a last machining step, program a stock removal

cycle “CYCLE952”.
Press the VSK 2 “Stock removal” to open the input

mask for the technology “Stock removal cycle“.

program:
N320 CYCLE952("FINISHING",,"",2301321,
0.12,0,0,1.9,0.1,0.1,0.2,0.2,0.1,0,3,0,0,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,
12,1100110)

Notes :
30. Program the following two lines:
N330 G0 X200 Z200
N340 M30
31. Insert now the first contour description

“SPIGOT_BLANK” into the program.

Press the VSK 1 “New contour” to create a new

contour.
The input mask for entering a name for the new
contour opens.
32. Enter the following name for the new contour:
The contour editor with the input mask for the con-
tour description opens automatically.
Enter the contour starting point:

Notes :
33. Leave the default values as the starting point for the
contour:
34. Start the contour description with a straight line in

direction “X”.
Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line X”.

The parameter window for the “Straight line X”
opens.

Note:
By entering the value for “X”, the starting value to the
Z-axis “α1” is calculated automatically.
36. Extend the contour description by adding a “Straight

line Z”.
Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line Z”.

The parameter window for the “Straight line Z”
opens.
Note:
By entering the value for „Z“ the starting value to the
Z-axis “α1” and the angle to the previous element
“α2” are calculated automatically.

Notes :
38. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in ZX
direction.
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX”.

The parameter window for the “Straight ZX” opens.
39. Extend the contour by adding a line in Z direction.

The parameter window for a straight line in Z direc-
tion opens.

Note:
By entering the value for “Z”, the values for “α1” and
41. Extend the contour by adding a line in ZX direction.

The parameter window for a straight line in ZX direc-
tion opens.
Note:
By entering the values for “Z” and “X”, the values for
“α1” and “α2” are calculated automatically.
43. Extend the contour by adding a line in Z direction.

The parameter window for a straight line in Z direc-
tion opens.

Notes :

Note:
45. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in X di-

rection.
The parameter window for the straight line in X di-
rection opens.

Note:
By entering the value for “X”, the value for “α1” and
47. To close the contour, insert a straight in ZX direction.

The Parameter window for the straight line in ZX di-
rection opens.

The contour description is finished.
Note:

Notes :
49. Examine now the finished contour.
Press the blue “cursor-to-the-left” key on the key-
board, to switch with the orange selection cursor to
screen (see picture below).
Use the blue “cursor-down” key on the keyboard to
place the orange selection cursor on the END-
symbol.
contour outline is displayed:
50. Finish the creation of the contour by pressing the

VSK 8 “Accept”
The following G code lines are inserted into the

program:
N350 E_LAB_A_SPIGOT_BLANK: ;#SM Z:2
G18 G90 DIAMOF;*GP*
G0 Z0 X0 ;*GP*
G1 X30 ;*GP*
Z-40 ;*GP*
Z-45 X40 ;*GP*
Z-65 ;*GP*
Z-70 X45 ;*GP*
Z-100 ;*GP*
X0 ;*GP*
Z0 ;*GP*
E_LAB_E_SPIGOT_BLANK:

Notes :
51. Start now another contour description.
Press the VSK 1 “New contour”.

The “New contour” input window opens, where you
can enter a name for the new contour.
52. Enter the following name for the new contour:

The contour editor with the input mask for entering
the contour starting point opens by default.
53. Enter the following starting point for the contour:
54. Start the contour description with a straight line in X

direction.

The input mask for the “Straight line X” opens.
Note:
By entering the value for “X”, the value for “α1” is
calculated automatically.

Notes :
56. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in direc-
tion Z.

The input mask for the “Straight line Z” opens.
Note:
58. Extend the contour by adding a circular path.
Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle”.

The input mask for the circle opens.
59. Fill out the input mask as follows (X, K, I):
Note:
If the other parameter values are not updated as de-
sired, press the VSK 4 “Change selection”, then the
VSK 1 “Dialog select” and confirm with pressing the
VSK 8 “Dialog accept”.
60. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in

Z direction.

The input mask for the “Straight line Z” opens.

Notes :
Note:
62. Extend the contour by adding a “Straight ZX”.
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX”

The parameter mask for the “Straight ZX” opens.
Note:
By entering the values “Z” and “X”, the values for
64. As a last contour element, add a straight line in Z

direction.

The input mask for the straight line in Z direction
opens.
Note:
The contour is now finished.

Notes :
66. Examine now the outline of the contour.
Press the blue “cursor-to-the-left” key on the key-

board, to switch with the orange selection cursor to
screen.
Use the blue “cursor-down” key on the keyboard to

place the orange selection cursor on the “END”-
symbol.

contour outline is displayed.
Confirm the finished contour by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”
The following G code lines are inserted into the pro-

gram:
N360 E_LAB_A_SPIGOT_FINISHED: ;#SM Z:6
G18 G90 DIAMOF;*GP*
G0 Z0 X0 ;*GP*
G1 X24 CHR=3 ;*GP*
Z-18.477 RND=4 ;*GP*
G2 Z-55.712 X30 K=AC(-35) I=AC(40)RND=4 ;*GP*
G1 Z-75 RND=6 ;*GP*
Z-80 X45 RND=4 ;*GP*
Z-90 ;*GP*
;E_LAB_E_SPIGOT_FINISHED:

Notes :

and the simulation window opens, showing the work-
piece in a side view, by default.

work piece, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

B650 Measurement turning programGUIDE
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Measurement turning”,
through 2 programming examples with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
This module shows in examples the programming of measuring the face side of a workpiece, as well
as measuring the barrel of a cylindrical workpiece.
Content:
B656
B650

B650
Measure turning - programGUIDE: Description
Measure turning
programGUIDE:
This module shows in examples the programming START
of measuring the face side of a workpiece, as well
as measuring the barrel of a cylindrical workpiece.
Simple
programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Measure turning
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple measuring movement on the face side of a cylindrical workpiece

is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window.

The G code lines and the measuring cycle are to be programmed and the
program is to be simulated
For this, the tool data shown below is to be used:
Tool data: 3D-probe (3D_PROBE)
2.1 Creating a new programGUIDE program
A new programGUIDE program can be created from within all operating

modes as follows:

The program manager is opened directly.
- OR -
panel.
Press the yellow HSK 4 “Program Manager”.
2. Select a drive, where you want to create the pro-

gram (“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”).

The vertical softkey bar for creating new programs
opens.
4. Press the VSK 4 “programGUIDE G code” to open

Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field,

e.g. “DIN_MEASURING_1.MPF” and accept with
pressing the VSK 8 “OK”.
The program is loaded to the editor.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Measuring the face side
The following program with the call-up of a measurement cycle is to be

programmed.
1. Program the first line of the program:

N100 G54 G17 G90
area “Various”.
the Blank parameters.
3. Insert the following parameters for the blank:
Confirm your inputs with the VSK 8 “Accept”.

80,100)
4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program.
Press the HSK 1 “Edit” to open the operating area

Edit.

Notes :
Place the orange selection cursor on the tool
“3D_PROBE” by using the blue cursor keys on the
keyboard and press the VSK 1.8 „OK“.
The program line N120 T="3D_PROBE"
is inserted into the program.
5 Insert the following G code commands into the

program:
N130 G0 X100 Y0 Z5 Z2=700
N140 G0 X0 Z5
6. Program now the measuring cycle (CYCLE974).

Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel in or-
der to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2.
The horizontal softkey bar 2 opens.
Press the HSK 2.5 “Measurem. turning”.

The operating area “Measurement turning” opens.
Press the VSK 4 “Workpiece measure”.

A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring
workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 2 “One-Point measurem.”.
The input mask for the technology “One-pt.meas./
CYCLE974“ opens.
Confirm your inputs with pressing the VSK 8 “OK“.

The following lines will be inserted into the program:
_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0.5 _MA=1 _FA=10 _TSA=1
_KNUM=1 _PRNUM=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _EVNUM=0
CYCLE974

Notes :
7. Insert the following G-code line to end the program:
N150 M30
8. Simulate now the machining of the workpiece.
Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1, by press-

ing the “Extend”-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“, to start the simula-

The control calculates the simulation and opens the
simulation window with a view on the side of the
workpiece.
To view the face side of the workpiece during

simulation, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Notes :
Description:
A more complex measurement movement on the face side and the barrel
of the work piece is to be programmed with the programGUIDE in Shop-
Turn.
Objective:
A new G code program is to be created and opened in the editor window.

The G code lines and the milling cycle are to be programmed and the pro-
gram is to be simulated
For this, the tool data shown below is to be used:
Tool data: 3D probe (3D_PROBE)
3.1 Programming example: Measuring the face side and the barrel of
a cylinder
The following program with the call up of two measuring cycles is to be

programmed.
For this, create a new programGUIDE G code program, like described in

section 2.1. Name the program: „DIN_MESSEN_DREHEN_2.MPF“.
1. Program in the first line of the program, the following

G code command:
N100 G54 G17 G90

area “Various”.
the blank parameters.

Notes :
3. Insert the following parameter for the blank:

80,100)
4. Insert now a measuring probe into the program.
Press the HSK 1 “Edit” to open the operating area

Edit.
Press the VSK 1.1 “To program”.
Use the blue cursor keys on the keyboard to select
the tool “3D_PROBE“.

N120 T="3D_PROBE"
5. Program now the following G code commands:

N130 X100 Y0 Z10 Z2=700
N140 G0 X0 Z5
6. Program now the first measuring cycle, to measure

the front side of the workpiece.
Press the “Extend”-key on the operator panel in or-

der to switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2.
Press the VSK 2.6 “Measurem. turning”.

The work area “Measurement turning” with extended
measuring functions opens .

A vertical softkey bar with functions for measuring
workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 4 “One-point measurem.“.

The input window for the CYCLE974 “One-pt.meas./
CYCLE974” opens.

Notes :
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK“.
The following lines are inserted into the program:

_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0.5 _MA=1 _FA=10
_TSA=1 _KNUM=0 _PRNUM=1 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1
_EVNUM=0
CYCLE974
8. Program now the following G code lines:

N150 G0 X110
N160 G0 Z-5
9. Program now the CYCLE994 to measure the

cylinder jacket of the workpiece.
Press the VSK 2.6 “Measurem. turning”.

measuring functions opens .

The vertical softkey bar with different functions for
measuring workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Two-point measurem.”.

The input window for the technology “Two-pt.meas./
CYCLE994” opens.

Notes :
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK“.

__MVAR=2 _MA=1 _SETVAL=100 _FA=10
_TSA=10 _KNUM=0 _PRNUM=1 _TDIF=1 _TUL=1
_TLL=0 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1 _SZA=10 _SZO=120
_CHBIT[4]=0 _TMV=0.333333333333333 _K=1
_EVNUM=0
CYCLE994
11. At last, program the end of the program with the fol-
lowing G code command:
N160 M30
12. Simulate now the measurement of the workpiece.
Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1 by press-

ing the „Extend“-key on the operator panel.

Notes :
Press the HSK 1.7 „Simulation“ to start the simula-

“Top view”.
First, the face side of the workpiece is measured,

then successively the barrel.
To view the face side of the workpiece during simu-

lation, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

B658 Measurement milling
1 Brief description
In this module you will get to know with help of 2 programming examples the technology
"Measurement milling" using the programGUIDE under ShopTurn.
This module shows the exemplary programming of a simple and a complex measuring motion with
the function "Measurement milling" under programGUIDE.
Content:
B658
B658

B658
Measure milling - programGUIDE: Description
Measure milling
programGUIDE:
This module shows the exemplary programming of START
a simple and a complex measuring motion with
the function "Measurement milling" under pro-
gramGUIDE. Simple
programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Measure milling
programGUIDE:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Simple measurement example
Notes :
Description:
A simple measurement inside a pipe is to be programmed using the

programGUIDE under ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new G code program is to be created and opened.

The G code lines and the measuring cycle are to be programmed and the
program is to be simulated.
.For this the tool data shown below are to be used:
Tool data: 3D-key (3D_PROBE_BLUM)
2.1 Creating a new G-code programGUIDE program
A new G-code program can be created from within all modes of operation:
1. Press the key "Program manager" on the
CNC-keyboard.
The program manager is opened directly .
- OR -
1. On the operator panel press the
"MENU SELECT"-key.
Press the yellow HSK 1.4 "Program manager".
2. Select a suitable drive

("NC", "Local drive" or "USB") on which the program
is to be created.
3. Press the VSK 2 "New".

The vertical softkey-bar with functions for the
creation of new programs is opened.
4. Press the VSK 4 "programGUIDE G-Code" in order

to open the input mask for the creation of a new
ShopTurn G-Code program.
Select "Main program".

Name the program, e.g.
DIN_MEASURE_MILLING_1.MPF and confirm
with "OK".
The editor for the creation of a G-Code program is
opened.

Simple measurement example Section 2
Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Measuring a pipe internally
The following program with the call-up of a simple measuring cycle is to be

programmed:
1. Programme the first line of the program:

N100 G54 G17 G90
2. Now add a “Blank” for the simulation.
For this press the HSK 1.6 "Various" to call up the

work range "Various".
Press the VSK 1 "Blank" to open the input mask for

the “Blank” parameters.
3. Now enter the following parameters for the “Blank”:
Confirm the inputs with the VSK 8 "Accept".

The following line will be added into the program:
N110 WORKPIECE(,,"","PIPE",448,0,-100,-
80,100,50)

Notes :
4. Now insert a measuring probe for the measuring
motion into the program.
Press the VSK 1.1 "Select tool".

The tool list opens.
With the blue cursor-keys on the keyboard select the
tool "3D_PROBE_BLUM".
Press the VSK 1.8 "OK".

N120 T="3D_PROBE_BLUM"
Note:
Alternatively you can also programme this line
manually.
5 Enter the following G-Code commands into the

program:
N130 G0 X100 Y0 Z10 Z2=700
N140 G0 X0 Z5
N150 G0 Z-10
6. Now programme the measuring cycle.
For this press the "Extension"-key on the operator

panel to change to the horizontal softkey-bar 2.
The horizontal softkey-bar 2 is opened.
Press the HSK 2.6 "Measurem. milling".

The operating area "Measurement milling" with
extended measuring functions is opened.
Press the VSK 4 "Workpiece measure".

The vertical softkey-bar with workpiece measuring
functions is opened.
Press the VSK 2 "Hole Shaft".

The vertical softkey-bar with measuring functions of
holes or shafts is opened.
The Softkey "Hole". is pre-set and is therefore

shown in blue.
The input mask for the Cycle 977
"Meas. Hole/CYCLE977" is opened.

Simple measurement example Section 2
Notes :
Confirm your entry by pressing the VSK 8 "OK".

_MVAR=101 _SETVAL=50 _PRNUM=1 _KNUM=0
_FA=10 _TSA=10 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1
CYCLE977
8. Now programme the End-of-Program.

Enter the following G-Code commands into the
program:
N160 G0 X100 Z200
N170 M30
9. Finally simulate the measurement of the work piece.
Press the "Extension"-key on the operator panel

to change back to the horizontal softkey-bar 1.

Notes :
Press the HSK 1.7 "Simulation" to start the simula-
The control unit evaluates the simulation and opens
the simulation window with the side elevation of the
work piece.
Note: The 3D-view is an option.
In order to see the simulation with the front elevation

press the VSK 1.4 "3D view".

Complex measurement example Section 3
Notes :
Description:
An additional motion for measurement on the cylindrical surface of a pipe

is to be programmed with programGUIDE under ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new G-code program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The G-Code lines and measuring cycles are to be programmed and
subsequently the program is to be simulated.
For this the tool data shown below is to be used:
Tool data: 3D-key (3D_PROBE_BLUM)
3.1 Programming example: Measuring a pipe internally and externally
The following program with the call-up of two measuring cycles is to be

programmed.
For this create a new G-code programGUIDE-program under ShopTurn,

as described in section 2.1 of this module.
Name the program for example "DIN_MEASURE_MILLING_2.MPF".
1. In the first line programme the following G-code

command:
N100 G54 G17 G90
2. Now add a “Blank” for the simulation.
For this press the HSK 1.6 "Various" to call up the

work area for "Various" functions.

Section 3 Complex measurement example
Notes :
Press the VSK 1 "Blank" to open the input mask for
the Blank-parameters.
3. Enter the following parameters for the Blank:
Confirm the input with the VSK 8 "Accept".

N110 WORKPIECE(, ,"","PIPE",448,0,-100,-
80,100,50)
4. Now add a measuring probe for the workpiece

measuring into the program.
Press the VSK 1.1 "Select tool".

The tool list is being opened.
With the blue cursor-keys on the keyboard select the
tool "3D_PROBE_BLUM".
Press the VSK 1.8 "OK".

The following program line is added to the program:
N120 T="3D_PROBE_BLUM"
Alternatively this line can also be programmed

manually.
5. Programme the following G-Code lines:

N130 G0 X100 Y0 Z10 Z2=700
N140 G0 X0 Z5
N150 G0 Z-10
6. Programme the first measuring cycle "Meas. Hole/

CYCLE977" for the measurement of the pipe.

The horizontal softkey-bar 2 opens.

The operating are "Measurement milling" with

The vertical softkey-bar with measuring functions of
the work pieces is opened.

Notes :
The vertical softkey-bar with the measuring functions
of holes or shafts is opened.
The Softkey "Hole" is pre-set and is therefore shown

in blue.
The input window for the Cycle 977
"Meas. Hole/CYCLE977" is opened.
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 "OK".
The following lines are added to the program:

_MVAR=101 _SETVAL=50 _PRNUM=1 _KNUM=0
_FA=10 _TSA=10 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1
CYCLE977
8. Enter the following G-Code commands into the

program:
N160 G0 Z5
N170 G0 X60
N180 G0 Z-25
N190 G0 X55
9. Now programme the measuring cycle for measure-

ment of the external diameter of the pipe.


Section 3 Complex measurement example
Notes :
The operating are "Measurement milling" with

The vertical softkey-bar with functions for the
measuring of work pieces is opened.
Press the selection key "Plane" to open the input

mask for the Cycle 978 "1 Pt. Meas./CYCLE978".
Fill out the input mask as follows:
The following lines are added to the program:

_MVAR=100 _SETVAL=0.5 _PRNUM=1 _MA=3
_KNUM=1 _FA=10 _TSA=10 _VMS=0 _NMSP=1
_EVNUM=0
CYCLE978
10. Now programme the End-of-Program with the

following G-code lines:
N200 G0 X100 Z200
N210 M30
11. Finally simulate the measurement of the work piece.

Notes :
Press the "Extension"-key on the operator panel, to
change back to the horizontal softkey-bar 1.
Press the HSK 1.7 "Simulation" in order to start the

simulation of the program.
the simulation window with a side elevation of the
work piece.
Note: The 3D-view is an option
In order to see the simulation with the front elevation

press the VSK 1.4 "3D view".

Notes :

B601 Basics of programming with ShopTurn
1 Brief description
Working with this module you will learn the basics of creating ShopTurn sequential programs.
This module explains the general structure of a ShopTurn program which includes program header,
program block and program ending. In addition to this, the programming of chained programming
blocks (sequential programs), the functions of the “Editor”, as well as the functions “Various”, Simula-
tion” and “NC Execute” will be described.
Content:
Basics
Creating ShopTurn programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
B601
B601

B601
Basics of programming with Shopmill: Basics of program-
Description ming with
ShopTurn:
START
This module explains the general structure of a

ShopTurn program which includes program
header, program block and program ending. In Basics
addition to this, the programming of chained pro-
gramming blocks (sequential programs), the func-
tions of the “Editor”, as well as the functions
“Various”, Simulation” and “NC Execute” will be
Creating
described. ShopTurn
programs
Editor
Various
Simulation
NC Execute
Basics of program-
ming with
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Section 2 Basics
Notes :
2. 1 Programming with ShopTurn
ShopTurn offers the option to create NC programs directly on the control in

the manner of chained sequential block programs. It also offers the option
to program G-code programs directly, with additional ShopTurn functional-
ity.
Note:
The creation of G-code programs in ShopTurn is discussed in details in
the module B605 “ Basics of programming with the programGUIDE”.
The advantage of programming a ShopTurn program lies in the graphical
guiding of the programming process in the editor.
The following functions are available for this task:
 Technology oriented program step (technologies/cycles) selection using

softkeys
 Input masks and windows for parameters, with animated help graphics
 Context sensitive online help for every input mask and window
 Support for the contour input (geometric processor)
ShopTurn programs or program steps can be represented in different

ways:
 As a work plan, showing the program header, the programming steps
with their chaining and the end of the program.

Basics Section 2
Notes :
 As a programming graphic in the graphic view (workpiece or machin-
ing step as an outline graphic in side view or top view).
The marked program block in the work plan is highlighted in a different
colour.
 As a parameter mask with a help graphic in 3-D, or a simulation of the

machining step in side, face view and 3D.
If available, the view changes continuously from the help picture to the
animation.
Note:
The animated help graphics are displayed always in the correct position to
the adjusted coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically displayed
and the selected parameter in the graphic is highlighted in a different
colour.

Section 2 Basics
Notes :
2.2 The work plan
Main aspect of programming with ShopTurn is the “Work plan” in the editor
window. The structure of the “Work plan” is as below:
 Program header (with the base settings for the program, like measure-
ment units, work offset, blank dimensions, etc.)
 Program blocks (the program steps with the technologies/cycles)
 End of program (where you can finish the program and adjust the
numbers of workpieces you want to machine, see also picture below)
2.2.1 Program header
The program header (see picture above on the left and section 3.2)
contains the dimensions of the blank for the simulation, as well as the pa-
rameters that influence the whole program e.g.:
 Work offset
 Spindle
 Measurement units in mm or inch
 Tool axes X, Y or Z
 Retraction plane, tool change point, safety distance, speed limits etc.
In the work plan, the program header is at the beginning of the program
and is labelled with the icon , the text “Program header” and the corre-
sponding parameters.
.
2.2.2 Program blocks
Program blocks are programmed machining steps which are shown in the
editor in single rows, marked with an icon and text, representing the cor-
responding technology and the entered parameters (see picture below).
2.2.3 Chained sequential program blocks
For the Functions “Drill”, “Turning”, “Contour turning”, “Milling” and

“Straight Circle” technology blocks are programmed separately. These
program blocks are automatically chained together by the control and
connected by brackets in the work plan.
Technology blocks, specify in which way the machining should take
place (e.g. centring first, and then drilling). The positioning blocks deter-
mine the positions for the drilling, milling or turning operations (e.g. posi-
tion the drill-holes in a full circle on the front surface) and the contour
blocks describe the contour you want to machine.

Basics Section 2
A program chain is closed when a technology element is completed with Notes :
a position element. Otherwise an error message lets you know if one of
the parts is missing.
The Icons of the chained technology blocks and position
blocks are marked by a square bracket to the right of the ma-
chining symbol from the start to the end of the linkage.
Every Technology is represented by a unique symbol (icon).
The chained icons are also being displayed on the right side of
the screen in the programming graphic and parameter mask win-
dow. (here centring, drilling linked with a position circle pattern).
2.2.4 End of program

End of the program signals to the machine that the machining of the
workpiece has ended. In addition, you can specify the number of
workpieces that you would like to machine.
This program block is marked by the icon , as well as the lettering “End
of Program” with a letter “N”, indicating the number of workpieces you
want to machine:
2.2.5 G code blocks
In the work plan you can also insert G code program blocks.
For this, you must press the yellow “INSERT”-key on the keyboard on the
desired place in the program. A a new orange command line, marked with
the letter and a blinking cursor where you can enter G code com-
mands opens. Here you can enter now a G code command. With the blue
“cursor-down” or “cursor-up” you can exit the G code command line and
the inputs are taken over.
From a G code line you can not switch to a parameter mask window.
2.3 Navigation in the editor window
For a fast and comfortable navigation within a sequential program and the
parameter masks you can use the blue cursor keys.
With the blue “cursor-up” key on the keyboard you can navi-
gate upwards in the program editor and the parameter masks.
With the blue “cursor-down”-key on the keyboard you can

navigate downwards in the program editor and the parameter
masks.
The arrow symbol (extend-symbol), on the right side of the
program block line in the editor window, indicates that you can
access the parameter mask by pressing the “cursor-to-the-
right” key.
The “cursor-to-the-right” key opens the parameter mask of the
corresponding program block.
The “cursor-to-the-left” key closes the parameter mask of the

corresponding program block and brings you back to the work
plan window, displaying the ShopTurn program steps.

Section 3 Creating ShopTurn programs
Notes :
3.1 Creating a new ShopTurn program
A new ShopTurn program can be created from the operating modes

“JOG”, “MDA” and “AUTO” as follows:
Press the “Program Manager“ key on the keyboard.
The window for creating new programs and manag-
ing existing programs opens directly.
See module B525 - „Operating area Program Man-
ager“.
- OR -
Press the “MENU SELECT“ key on the operator
panel (OP).
Press the yellow HSK 4 “Program Manager“.
The program manager window for creating new pro-
grams and managing existing programs opens.
- THEN -
Select a storage drive, by pressing the horizontal
softkey “NC”, “Local drive” or “USB”, where you
want to create the program.
Move the orange cursor with the blue cursor-keys to
the directory of your choice.
For the navigation process refer to the modules
B516 - “Operating elements“ or B525 - “Operating
area Program Manager“.
Press the VSK 2 “New”.
new programs opens.
Press the VSK 3 “ShopTurn”, to open the input
mask for creating a new sequential ShopTurn pro-
gram like displayed below.

Creating ShopTurn programs Section 3
Notes :
3.2 Setting the program header
After entering a name for the program and pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”
the program header window opens automatically for input of program
header parameters. Here you can enter parameters for the measuring
units, the work offset, the spindle, the blank, the retraction mode, the tool
change point, the safety distance, the speed limits and the machining
sense (as shown e.g. below).
Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK
8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”, to switch back to
the work plan window.
The control switches to the work plan view in the program editor.
Program header and end of program are programmed automatically.

Section 3 Creating ShopTurn programs
Notes :
3.3 Creating program blocks
Place the cursor on the program header block, or any other program block
after which you want to insert a new program block. Select the technology
you want to apply (“Drilling”, “Turning”, “Contour turning”, “Milling” or
“Straight Circle”). For example select “Turning” -> “Undercut” -> “Undercut
thread DIN” to open the corresponding parameter window for this technol-
ogy (see picture below).
Enter the appropriate parameter values and confirm with pressing the VSK
8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”. You switch back to
the work plan view in the editor window.
The new program block is inserted automatically into the work plan.
The “cursor-to-the-right” key opens the parameter window at any time, to
change the input parameters you have edited before.
The additional program steps can be added as described above.

Creating ShopTurn programs Section 3
Notes :
3.4 Programming the end of the program
The program block “End of program” is programmed automatically when-

ever you create a new ShopTurn program.
To modify the default settings for the program end, mark the line “End of
program” with the orange selection cursor and press the blue “cursor-to-
the-right” key.
The parameter window for the program end opens, where you can modify
the numbers of workpieces you want to machine.
Enter the numbers of workpieces you want to machine and accept with
pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” or abort with pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.
You can set the number of workpieces to infinite by pressing the VSK 5
“Infinite”.
The values you have inserted are updated automatically

Section 4 Edit
Notes :
With the editor you can create, supplement and change part programs.
4.1 Selecting the function “Edit“
The function “Editor” can be opened from the operating mode “JOG”,
“MDA“ and “AUTO“.
By pressing the “PROGRAM“-key on the keyboard
the operating area “Program” opens, showing the
last program you have worked on.
- OR -
panel (OP).
Press the yellow HSK 3 “Program“ to switch to the

operating area “Program“.
The operating area “Program” opens, showing the
last program you have worked on (see picture be-
low).
If not selected, press the HSK 1 “Edit”.
If no program was loaded after starting the control,

the “program manager” window opens first, after
pressing the HSK 3 “Program”.
Here you can select either a existing ShopMill-
program or create a new one.
See module - B574 “Operating area Program” und

module - B576 “Operating area Program Manager“.
The following softkeys with their corresponding functions are now available
in the vertical softkey bar:

Edit Section 4
Notes :
The VSK 1.1 “Select tool” is greyed out (inactive) as
long as a ShopTurn program is loaded to the editor.
The function “Select tool” is available for ShopTurn
programs under the function “Drilling”, “Turning”,
“Contour turning”, “Milling”, “Straight Circle” or in a
corresponding G code program block with tool utili-
zation. This function opens the tool list window in the
operating area “Parameter” under the operating
mode “JOG” (see section 2.2.5).
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Graphic view” you can
see the simulated workpiece from a top view as an
outline drawing (see section 2.1, programming
graphic).
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search“ you can search
for any text in the program blocks. A search window
opens where you can enter a search string. You can
continue searching afterwards (see section 4.3).
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Mark” you can mark one
to several program blocks in order to copy or cut
(delete) them.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Copy” you can copy one
to several program blocks to the internal memory of
the control, to paste them to a different location in
the active program or to another program.
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Paste“ copied program
blocks can be inserted anywhere into the active pro-
gram or into another program on a different location.
The pasted program block or blocks will be inserted
behind the program block marked with the orange
selection cursor in the work plan window. You can
paste the block to the active program as well as to
another program on the NC, local or USB-drive.
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Cut” you can cut out one
to several program blocks, to paste them later some-
where in a program or to delete them. Cut program
steps remain in the clipboard and can be inserted
again with VSK 1.6 “Paste” (see VSK 1.6 “Paste“).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the extended ver-
tical softkey bar 2 will be displayed.
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” you can
assign new program line numbers for every program
step in the work plan window. Select the first block
number to start and then the increment.
By pressing the VSK 2.6 “Settings“ you can change
the settings for the editor (see section 5.3)
By pressing the VSK 2.7 “Exit” you close the editor
with the active program.
Section 4 Edit
Notes :
4.3 Search
With the function “Search” you can search for any text in a sequential pro-
gram and even replace the text with other text.
By pressing the VSK 1.3 “Search” the search win-

dow opens with the option to search for program
code and program parts.
4.3.2 Vertical softkey bar (VSK)

By pressing the VSK 1 “Go to start” the cursor will
be positioned on the first line of the program.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Go to end” the cursor will be
positioned on the last line of the program.
By pressing the VSK4 “Search” the search mask
opens, where you can decide to search for complete
words, select the search direction (forward/
backwards) and enter the search text.
By pressing the VSK5 “Find + replace” the “Search
and replace” mask opens where you can decide to
search for complete words, select the search direc-
tion (forward/backwards), enter the search text and
enter the text you want to use for the replacement.
With pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel” you can abort the

search process.
By pressing the VSK 8 “OK“ you start a search run
with the above mentioned search criteria.

Edit Section 4
Notes :
4.4 Renumbering
With the function “Renumbering” you can renumber manually the program
steps in the work plan window with an selectable increment.
4.4.1 Selecting the function “Renumbering”
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Renumbering” the input

mask for the renumbering settings opens.
4.4.2 Parameters for “Renumbering”
Parameters Meaning
First block number The first block number you want to start with.
The values shown here by default, can be adjusted
under the function “Settings” in the input field “First
block number” (see section 4.5).
Increment The Increment between the program blocks.
The values shown here by default can be adjusted
under the function “Settings” in the input field
“Increment” (see section 4.5)

Section 4 Edit
Notes :
4.5 Settings
With the function “Settings” you can change the settings for the editor.
4.5.1 Selecting the function “Settings”
By pressing the VSK2.6 “Settings” the input mask

for the program editor settings opens.
4.5.2 Parameters for the “Settings”
Parameters Meaning
Number Program blocks will be numbered automatically.
automatically Deactivating this parameter, hides the following two
(Yes/No) parameters.
First block number Block number of first program block.
Increment Increment between block numbers.
Show hidden lines Show hidden line (with the ID ;*HD).
Display block end A symbol is displayed at the end of each block.
as symbol
(Yes/No)
Move horizontally Blocks are displayed in one line with a scroll bar at
(Yes/No) the right side.
Save automatically Changes are saved automatically without a query.
(only local and ex-
ternal drives)
(Yes/No)

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.1 Selecting the function “Various“
The function “Various” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG”,
“MDA” or “AUTO” in the operating area “Program” as follows:
Press the HSK 1.6 “Various“ to switch over to the
function “Various”.
Following functions are shown in the VSK-bar:

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Settings“ an input mask
opens where you can change the settings for the
blank (see section 5.3 “Settings”).
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Counterspindle” the pa-
rameter window for the counterspindle settings
opens (see section 5.4).
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Transformations” the ver-
tical softkey bar with the functions for the coordinate
transformations is displayed (see section 5.5).
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Subprogram” the input
mask for loading a subprogram to the main program
opens (see section 5.6).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend“ the vertical soft-
key bar 2 opens.
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “HighSpeed settings” the
input mask for adjusting the settings for the optimal
speed in relation to the machining method opens
(see section 5.7).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
Display area Description (Continuation)
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Repeat program” the ver-

tical softkey bar with the function for repeating of
program parts opens (see section 5.8).
5.3 Settings
Each parameter defined in the program header, except the measuring

units and the dimensions of the blank, can be changed everywhere in the
program.
The settings in the program header are modal active, as long as they are
not altered somewhere else later in the program.
Some of the parameters in the program header can be changed with the
function “Settings”, like the retraction mode, the tool change point, the
safety distance, speed limits for the spindle and the machining sense.
The function “Settings” can be opened as follows:
5.3.1 Selecting the function “Settings”
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Settings” the following

window for the general program settings opens.

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.3.2 Parameters for the function „Settings“
Parameter Meaning Help picture/animation

Retract
 simple A changed retraction plane works from the last

safety distance set in the cycle, because the further
 all retraction is carried out by the following cycle.
 none
XRA (mm) Retraction plane X

related to XA (ink/abs)
XRI (mm) Retraction plane X

related to XI (ink/abs)
ZRA (mm) Retraction plane Z

related to ZA (ink/abs)
ZRI (mm) Retraction plane Z

related to rear (only if
Retract “all” is se-
lected)
Tailstock Only if available on the machine.

Tailstock is shown within the simulation and the si-
 yes
multaneous recording window. While approaching
and retracting the retraction logic is considered.
 no
You can further expand the retraction area so that
XRR (mm)
collisions with the tailstock will be avoided when
traversing the axes (only if Tailstock “Yes” is se-
lected).
Tool change point
 Workpiece  Workpiece coordinate system (WCS)

 Machine  Machine coordinate system (MCS)
XT (mm) Tool change point X
ZT (mm) Tool change point Z

Section 5 Various
Notes :
(continuation)
Safety distance:
The safety distance is
SC (mm)
depending on the ref-
erence point.
The direction is auto-
matically determined
by the cycle.
Speed limits:
S1 (rpm) Maximum speed of the main spindle
S3 (rpm) Maximum speed of the counterspindle
Machining sense:
The machining sense (down cut, up cut) is defined as the moving direction
of the cutter tooth in relation to the workpiece. ShopTurn evaluates the pa-
rameter “Machining sense” in relation to the rotation direction of the spindle
for milling (except path milling).
The basic settings for the machining sense is set in a machine datum.
 Down cut Milling direction,

counter clockwise
 Up cut Milling direction,

clockwise

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.3.3 Changing the “Graphic view” on the blank
The graphical view on the blank can be changed in the operating area
“Program” within the functions “Edit”, “Drilling”, “Turning”, “Contour turning”
“Milling”, “Various” and “Straight Circle”.
Note:
The help pictures with the corresponding animation are only shown when
the VSK 2 “Graphic view” is deselected.
The view on the blank can be changed as follows:
1. In the operating area “Program” within the operating mode “JOG,

“MDA, or “AUTO” press the HSK 1.6 “Various”.
2. Activate or deactivate the VSK 2 “Graphic view” to switch the

view in the parameter window between:
3-D view or help picture with animation or
Programming graphic (outline graphic).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.3.4 Changing the program settings
1. In the operating area “Program”, within the operating

mode “JOG, “MDA, or “AUTO”, press the HSK 1.6
“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1 “Settings”.
The window for the “Settings” opens.
3. If desired, change the graphic view in the parameter
window by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Enter the parameters for retract, tool change point,
safety distance, speed limits or machining sense.
(see parameter list in section 5.3.2).
A new program block “Settings” is inserted into the

work plan (see picture below).
5.4 Counterspindle
If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine workpieces

using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and rear faces with-
out re-clamping the workpiece manually.
Before machining begins on the rear face, the counterspindle must grip the
workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it to the new machin-
ing position.
You can program these operations with the "Counterspindle" function.
The following functions are available for the counterspindle programming:
 Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit
stop if necessary, see section 5.4.3). ShopTurn first synchronizes the
main spindle and counterspindle. The counterspindle then moves to-
wards the workpiece at rapid traverse to the programmed position ZR
and then continues at reduced feedrate FR to transfer position Z1.
 Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the counter-
spindle (see section 5.4.4). The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out
of the main spindle by amount Z1. ShopTurn shifts the coordinate sys-
tem accordingly and saves the offset in the selected work offset.
 Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the new
machining position (see section 5.4.5). The counterspindle moves with
the workpiece at rapid traverse to the new machining position ZW. The
workpiece zero moves too and shifts by ZV (with sign) from the front
face to the rear face of the workpiece. The coordinate system is then
transposed into a mirror image for machining on the rear face and
saved in the selected work offset. Synchronous operation of both spin-
dles is disabled. The counterspindle is now the master

Various Section 5
Notes :
4. Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (also see sec-
tion 5.4.6). As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is
finished, machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can
activate a Work offset in the meantime for machining the front face
using the "Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that
was active before the workpiece was gripped.
The main spindle is now the master spindle again.
 Complete: All steps gripping, pulling, rear face and optionally parting
(also see section 5.4.2).
5.4.1 Selecting the function “Counterspindle”
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Counterspindle” the pa-

rameter window for programming the counter spindle
opens.

By pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view” the view on
the workpiece changes from help picture/animation to
a programming graphic.
By pressing the VSK 5 “Teach park. pos.” the ac-

tual position of the tool is saved as the parking posi-
tion for that tool.
Note:
The softkey is only visible if in the parameter window
the first parameter is set to “Complete” or “Gripping”
and the parameter “Coordinate system” is set to
“Machine”. Here you can enter the parameters for
the park position also by hand, if you fill out the pa-
rameter fields “XP” and “ZP” (see section 5.4.3).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
By pressing the VSK 6 “Teach angle off.”, the angle
offset of the main spindle in relation to the counter-
spindle is saved.
Note:
This softkey is only visible if the first parameter in the
counterspindle parameter window is set to “Gripping”
or “Complete”.
You can also set the angle offset of the spindles by
hand, with filling out the parameter field “α1”.
By pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”, the values you

have entered in the parameter window will be dis-
carded.
By pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” you confirm your

inputs.
5.4.3 Parameters for counterspindle “Complete”

Grip:
Coordinate system
 Machine The park position is entered into the machine coordi-

(MCS) nate system. Teaching of the park position and the
angular offset is possible. With selection of MCS the
VSK 5 “Teach park. Pos.” becomes active.
 Workpiece The park position is entered into the workpiece coor-

(WCS) dinate system.
Parking position Besides the option to set the parking position of the
tool tool with the parameters “XP” and “ZP” in the pa-
rameter mask directly, you can also save the actual
position of the tool as the parking position by press-
ing the VSK 5 “Teach park pos.” A prerequisite is,
that for gripping the parameter “Machine” is selected.
XP (mm) Park position of the

tool in X-direction
(abs).
ZP (mm) Park position of the

tool in Z-direction
(abs).

Various Section 5
Notes :
(continuation)
Flush chuck
 Yes Flush the counter-

spindle chuck
 No Do not flush of the

counterspindle chuck
DIR Spindle direction of rotation

Direction of rotation clockwise (spindle and counter-

spindle)
Direction of rotation counterclockwise (spindle and
 counterspindle)
 No spindle rotation
S (rpm) Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle)
α1 (Degrees) Angular offset of

counterspindle on
“gripping”.
Note:
You can also save
the actual angular
offset of the spindle
by pressing the VSK
6 “Teach angle off.”.
Z1 (mm) Transfer position (see picture “Parking position

(abs) of the tool” in this section.)
ZR (mm) Position feedrate re- (see picture “Parking position

duction (abs/inc). of the tool” in this section.)
Position at which tra-
versal at reduced
feedrate starts
FR (mm/min) Reduced feed (see picture “Parking position

of the tool” in this section.)
Fixed stop Travel to fixed stop

The counterspindle comes to a halt at a specified
 Yes
distance away from the transfer position Z1 and then
traverses at the specified feedrate to the limit stop.

Section 5 Various
Notes :
(continuation)
 No The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position

Z1.
Draw:
Draw blank Draw along complete blank length
 Yes Draw the blank
 No Do not draw the blank
F (mm/min) Feedrate (only if draw blank “Yes” was selected)
Cut-off cycle Cut-off cycle in the following block
 Yes Cut-off
 No Do not Cut-off

Various Section 5
Notes :
(continuation)
Rear:
Work offset
 Basic ref. Work offset in which

the coordinate sys-
 G54 tem, which was
 G55 shifted according to
ZW and by ZV as well
 G56 as mirrored in Z, must
 G57 be saved.
Z3W Machining position for

special axis (abs);
MCS
ZV Offset Z=0
(see picture)
5.4.4 Parameters for counterspindle “Grip”

Grip:
Coordinate system
 Machine The park position is entered in the machine coordi-

(MCS) nate system.
Teaching of the park position and the angular offset
is only possible in the machine coordinate system.
 Workpiece The park position is entered into the workpiece coor-

(WCS) dinate system.
XP (mm) Parking position of (see section 5.4.2)

the tool in X-direction
(abs)
ZP (mm) Parking position of (see section 5.4.2)

the tool in Z-direction
(abs)
Flush chuck
 Yes Flush the counter- (see section 5.4.2)

spindle chuck
 No Do not flush the (see section 5.4.2)

counterspindle chuck

Section 5 Various
Notes :
DIR Direction of spindle rotation
Direction of rotation clockwise (spindle and counter-

spindle)
Direction of rotation counter clockwise (spindle and
 counterspindle)
 No spindle rotation
S (rpm) Spindle speed (only if spindle with rotating spindle)
α1 (Degrees) Angular offset of (see section 5.4.2)

counterspindle on
gripping.
Z1 Transfer position (see section 5.4.2)

(abs)
ZR Position at which tra- (see section 5.4.2)
versal at reduced
feedrate starts
(abs/inc).
FR (rpm) Reduced feedrate (see section 5.4.2)
Fixed stop Travel to fixed stop.

The counterspindle comes to a halt at a specified
 Yes
distance away from the transfer position Z1 and then
traverses at the specified feedrate to the limit stop.
 No The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position

Z1.
5.4.5 Parameters for counterspindle “Draw”

Draw:
Drag zero Drag zero point
 Yes Drag zero point

Various Section 5
Notes :
(continuation)
 No Do not drag zero

point.
Work offset
 Base ref. Work offset in which

the coordinate sys-
 G54 tem displaced by Z1
 G55 must be saved.
 G56 (only active with drag
Zero point “Yes”)
 G57
Z1 (mm) Transfer position (abs)
F (mm/min) Feed
5.4.6 Parameters for counterspindle “Rear”

Rear:
Work offset.
 Base ref. Work offset in which

the coordinate sys-
 G54 tem, which was
 G55 shifted according to
ZW and by ZV as well
 G56 as mirrored in Z, must
 G57 be saved.
Z2W (mm) Machining position for (see section 5.4.2)

special axis (abs.);
MCS
ZV (mm) Offset Z=0 (see section 5.4.2)

Workpiece zero offset
in Z direction (inc, the
sign is also evalu-
ated).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.4.7 Parameters for counterspindle “Front”

Front:
Work offset
 Base ref. Work offset for ma-

chining the next front
 G54 face.
 G55
 G56
 G57
5.4.8 Setting the counterspindle
1. In the operating area “Program”, within the operating

mode “JOG, “MDA, or “AUTO”, press the HSK 1.6
“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1.4 “Counterspindle” to open the
settings window for the counterspindle.
3. In the settings window choose the function “Grip”,

“Draw”, “Rear”, “Front” or “Complete”.
4. Enter the appropriate parameters into the input

fields.
5. If you want to save the current position of the tool
as the parking position of the tool, then press the
VSK 5 “Teach par. Pos.”.
6. If you want, you can save the current angle offset of

the main spindle in relation to the counterspindle by
pressing the VSK 6 “Teach angle off.”.
Note:
The teaching of the angle offset is only possible with
non-rotating spindles.

A new sequential program block “Counterspindle”
is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.5 Transformations
To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate system.

Use this function, for example, to rotate the coordinate system.
Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.
You can define offset, rotation, scaling or mirroring.
You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined
coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate
transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate
transformations.
Supported are:
 Offset (see section 5.5.4)
For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.
 Rotation (see section 5.5.5)
You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle.
A positive angle corresponds to a counter clockwise rotation.
Note:
On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems with the
coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.
 Scaling (see section 5.5.6)
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane, as well as
for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by
this factor. Important is that Scaling factor always refers to the work-
piece zero. If for example a pocket is to be scaled and it’s centre point
does not match with zero point, then the pocket centre will be shifted
during scaling.
 Mirroring (see section 5.5.7)
Furthermore, you can mirror all axes.
Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.
 Rotation of the C-axis (see section 5.5.8)
You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable subsequent
machining operations to be performed at a particular position on the
front face or peripheral surface. The direction of rotation is set in a ma-
chine datum.

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.1 Selecting the function “Transformations”
By pressing the VSK 5 “Transformations” a new

vertical softkey bar opens on the left side of the
screen with the transformation functions, like dis-
played below:

By pressing the VSK 1 “Work offset” the parameter
window for the work offset opens (see section 5.5.3).
By pressing the VSK 2 “Offset” the parameter win-
dow for the offset opens (see section 5.5.4).
By pressing the VSK 3 “Rotation” the parameter
window for the rotations opens (see section 5.5.5).
By pressing the VSK 4 “Scaling” the parameter win-
dow for the scaling opens (see section 5.5.6).
By pressing the VSK 5 “Mirroring” the parameter
window for the mirroring opens (see section 5.5.7).
By pressing the VSK 6 “Rotation C axis” the pa-
rameter window for the rotation of the C axis opens

the main screen of the function “Various”.

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.5.3 Work offset
You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.
You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine
workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program.
The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank.
5.5.3.1 Selecting the function “Work offset”
By pressing the VSK 1 “Work offset” the work offset

window opens.
5.5.3.2 Parameters for the “Work offset”
Parameter Meaning
Work offset
 Basic ref. Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.3.3 Setting the work offset

“Various“ and the VSK 5 “Transformations”.
2. Press the VSK 1 “Work offset”.

4. Select the work offset (Basic reference, G54, G55,

G56 or G57).
Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to confirm your selection
or press the VSK 7 “Cancel” to abort.
A new program block “Work offset” is inserted into
the program in the editor window (see picture be-
low).
5.5.4 Offset
Offsets apply only to the current program.

Besides, you can select between a new and an additive offset.
With a new offset, all offsets defined before are deselected.
An additive offset works additional to the current selected offset.
For every axis an offset can be programmed.
5.5.4.1 Selecting the function “Offset”
By pressing the VSK 2 “Offset” the following screen

for setting the offset opens.

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.5.4.2 Parameters for “Offset”
Parameter Description Help picture/animation

Offset:
 New New offset
 Additive Additive offset
Axis: Unit
 Z Offset Z axis mm
 X Offset X axis mm
 Y Offset Y axis mm
5.5.4.3 Setting the offset
1. In the operating area “Program“ press the HSK 6

“Various“ and the VSK5 “Transformations”.
2. Press the VSK 2 “Offset”.
3. Optionally change the graphic view of the help

screen by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Select the kind of offset (new, additive).

Enter the offset values for the different axes (Z, X, Y)
in millimetres.
A new program block “Offset” is inserted into the
program in the editor window (see picture below).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.5 Rotation
Rotations apply only to the current program.

Besides, you can select between a new and an additive rotation.
With a new rotation, all rotations defined before are deselected.
An additive rotation works additional to the current selected rotation.
For every axis an rotational angle in degrees can be programmed.
A positive angle means a rotation counter clockwise.
5.5.5.1 Selecting the function “Rotation”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Rotation” the window for

setting the rotation parameters opens.
5.5.5.2 Parameters for “Rotation”
Rotation:
 New New rotation

Various Section 5
Notes :
Parameter Description Help picture/Animation
(continuation)
 Additive Additive rotation
Axes: Unit
 Z Turning around the mm

Z axis
 X Turning around the mm

X axis
 Y Turning around the mm

Y axis
5.5.5.3 Setting the rotations

“Various” and the VSK 5 “Transformations”.
2. Press the VSK 3 “Rotation”.

The window for setting the rotation parameters
opens.
3. Optionally change the graphic view of the Help

screen pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Select if you want to add a new or an additional rota-

tion. Enter the values of rotation about the X,Y, and
Z-axis in degree.
A new program block “Rotation” is inserted into the

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.6 Scaling
Scaling applies only to the current program.

Besides, you can select between a new and an additive scaling.
With a new scaling, all scalings defined so far are deselected.
An additive scaling works incremental to the current selected scaling.
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for
the tool axis. The programme coordinates are then multiplied by this factor.
Note:
Note that the scaling always refer to the zero point of the workpiece.
For example, if you increase the size of a pocket whose centre point does
not coincide with the zero point, scaling will shift the centre of the pocket.
5.5.6.1 Selecting the function “Scaling”
By pressing the VSK 4 “Scaling” the input mask

“Scaling” opens.
5.5.6.2 Parameters for “Scaling”
Scaling:
 New New scaling

Various Section 5
Notes :
(continuation)
 Additive Additive scaling
Axes:
 ZX Scaling factor ZX
 Y Scaling factor Y
5.5.6.3 Setting the scaling

2. Press the VSK 4 „Scaling“.

4. Select whether the scaling is new or additive.

Insert the values for the scaling factor ZX and Y.
A new program block “Scaling” is inserted into the

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.7 Mirroring
Mirroring applies only to the current program.

Besides, you can select between a new and an additive mirroring.
With a new mirroring, all mirrorings defined so far are deselected.
An additive mirroring works additional to the current selected mirroring.
Furthermore it is possible to mirror all axes.
Activate the axis to be mirrored in each case.
Note:
Note that with mirroring, the machining direction of the cutting tool (down-
cut/ up-cut) is also mirrored.
5.5.7.1 Selecting the function “Mirroring”
By pressing the VSK 5 “Mirroring” the following in-

put mask for mirroring the axes opens.
5.5.7.2 Parameters for “Mirroring”
Mirroring:
 New New mirroring

Various Section 5
Notes :
Parameters Description Help picture/animation
(continuation)
 Additive Additive mirroring
Axes:
 Z (on/off) Mirroring for the Z axis
 X (on/off) Mirroring for the X axis
 Y (on/off) Mirroring for the Y axis
5.5.7.3 Mirroring the axes

2. Press the VSK 5 “Mirroring”.

4. Select whether the “Mirroring” is new or additive.

Switch on or off the axis that you want to have
mirrored.
A new program block “Mirroring” is inserted into the

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.5.8 Rotating the C axis
Rotations of the C axis apply only in the current program.

Besides, you can select between a new and an additive rotation.
With a new rotation of the C axis, all rotations of the C axis defined so far
are deselected. An additive rotation works additional to the current se-
lected rotations.
You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable subsequent ma-
chining operations to be performed at a particular position on the end face
or peripheral surface.
The direction of rotation is set in a machine data.
Enter the value for the rotation of the C axis in degree.
5.5.8.1 Selecting the function “Rotation C axis”
By pressing the VSK 5 “Rotation C axis” the input

mask for the parameters “C axis rotation” opens.
5.5.8.2 Parameters for „Rotation C axis“

Rotation:
 New New rotation

Various Section 5
Notes :
(continuation)
 Additive Additive rotation
Rotation C:
 C C axis rotation in degree
5.5.8.3 Setting the rotation of the C axis

2. Press the VSK 6 “Rotation C axis”.

The input mask “Rotation C axis” for the parameter
input opens.
4. Select whether the rotation of the C axis is new or
additive.
5. Enter a value for the C axis rotation in degree.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”
A new sequential program block “Rotation C axis”
is inserted into the work plan (see picture below).

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.6 Subprograms
If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different

workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate subrou-
tine. You can then call this subroutine in any program.
Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.
ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and subprogram.
This means that you can call a "standard" sequential program or G code
program as subprograms in another sequential program.
In this subprogram, you can also call another subprogram.
The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines.
You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.
If you want to call a sequential ShopTurn program as a subroutine, the
program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate
program in “AUTO” operating mode). This is not necessary for G code
subroutines.
The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a
separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs",
"Subprograms" directories).
If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use the
G code command "EXTCALL".
Note:
Please note that, when a subprogram is called, ShopTurn evaluates the
settings in the program header of the subroutine. These settings also
remain active even after the subprogram has ended.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main
program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after
calling the subprogram.
5.6.1 Selecting the function “Subprogram“
By pressing the VSK 3 “Subprogram” the input

mask for selecting a “Subprogram” opens.

Various Section 5
Notes :
5.6.2 Subprogram call

“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1.6 “Subprogram”.

The input mask for selecting a “Subprogram” opens.

4. Enter the path to the subprogram file into the “Path/

workpiece” input field and the name of the subpro-
gram into the “Program name” input field.

A new sequential program block “Execute” with the

subprogram path and name is inserted into the work
plan (see picture below).
5.7 High Speed settings
With the machining of free form surfaces, there are high demands on ma-
chining speed, as well as accuracy and surface finish.
The optimal speed in conjunction with the machining method (roughing,
prefinishing, finishing) can be adjusted easily with the function “High
Speed settings”.
It is advisable to program the cycle in the technology part first, before pro-
gramming the geometry part.
Machining methods:
With the function “High Speed settings” you can select from 3 different
technological machining methods:
 "roughing"
 "prefinishing"
 "finishing"
 "deselect" (default setting)
In CAM Software in the HSC area, the four machining methods directly
have an effect on the accuracy and velocity of the path contour (see the
upper help picture on the next side).
The operator/programmer can make an appropriate weighting by changing
the tolerance value.
Different tolerance values and technologies can be assigned to the four
machining methods.

Section 5 Various
Notes :
5.7.1 Selecting the function “High-Speed settings”
By pressing the VSK 2.1 “High-Speed settings” the

input mask for the high speed settings opens.
The screen changes in intervals between help graphic and animation.
5.7.2 Parameters for the “High-Speed Settings”
Parameter Help picture Animation
Tolerance: Tolerance value for the machining axis
Machining:
 Roughing
 Prefinishing

Various Section 5
Notes :
Parameter Help picture Animation (continuation)
 Finishing
 Deselect none
5.4.3 Changing the High-Speed settings

“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 2.1 “High-Speed settings“.
graphic by pressing the VSK 2 “Graphic view”.
4. Enter the parameter values for “Tolerance” and
“Machining”.
A new sequential program block “High-speed set-
tings” is inserted into the work plan
5.8 Repeating program blocks
If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed more

than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once.
ShopTurn offers a function for repeating program blocks.
You must enclose the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start
and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times
again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have
different names. No names used in the NCK can be used for this.
You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not
within chained program blocks.
Note:
It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preced-
ing program blocks and as the start marker for the following program
blocks.
5.8.1 Selecting the function “Repeat program”
By pressing the VSK 3 “Repeat program” the verti-

cal softkey bar with functions for repeating a pro-
gram opens.

Section 5 Various
Notes :

By pressing the VSK 1 “Set Mark” the window for
setting a start or end mark opens.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Repeat program” an input
mask opens where you can specify the start and end
marker which enclose the program parts you want to
repeat.
5.8.3 Repeating program blocks in the program

“Various”.
2. Press the VSK 1.8 “Extend” to open the vertical
softkey bar 2.
3. Press the VSK 2.3 “Repeat program”.
4. Place the orange selection cursor on the program

block before the program block that you want to re-
peat.
5. Press the VSK 1 “Set Mark” to insert a start mark.
In the “Set mark” input window, enter an individual

name for the start mark (see the following picture).
With pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” a new sequential

program block “MARK1”will be inserted into the work
plan (see picture below).
6. Place the orange selection cursor on that program

block in the work plan that shall be the last block in
the repetition sequence.
7. Press the VSK 1 “Set mark” to insert a stop mark.

In the “Set mark” input window, enter an individual
name for the end mark (see the following picture).
With pressing the VSK 8 “Accept” a new sequential

program block “MARK2” will be inserted into the

Various Section 5
Notes :
8. Place the orange selection cursor on that block,
after which you want to repeat the program se-
quence.
9. Press the VSK 2 “Repeat program”.
In the input mask “Repetition” enter the name for the
start mark and the end mark, as well as the number
of repetitions.

A new sequential program block “Repetition
MARK1 MARK2” is inserted into the work plan (see
picture below).
10. The program blocks between the marks (MARK1,

MARK2) will be repeated as often as entered in the
“Number of repetitions” field.

Notes :
ShopTurn provides various extensive and detailed simulation functions for
displaying the simulation of the programmed workpiece.
During simulation, the current program is calculated in its complete form

and the result is displayed in 3D graphic form.
You can select the following modes of representation for simulation:

 Side view
 Face view
 2 windows
The simulation uses the correct proportions for the tools and workpiece
contours.
The traverse paths for the tools are shown in colour:

Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse
Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The

displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the ap-
proximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining
program on the machine (incl. tool change).
If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops.
In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the program
block currently being executed are also displayed.
The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also dis-
played in the simulation.
Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and

simultaneous recording:
 Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed as
programmed.
 Cylinder surface transformations are displayed as a developed surface.
 After swivel transformation, the previous machining operations are de-
leted from the display and only machining of the swivelled plane is dis-
played (viewing angle perpendicular to the swivelled plane).
 Zero offsets (G54, etc.) do not alter the zero in the graphical display.
This means that, in the case of multiple clampings, the machining op-
erations for each of the individual workpieces are plotted on top of one
another.
Note:
If you want to display a different portion of the workpiece from the one de-
fined in ShopTurn, you can define a new blank in the program (see section
5.3 “Settings” in this module).

Notes :
6.1 Selecting the function “Simulation”
The function “Simulation” can be selected from the operating mode “JOG“,
“MDA“ and “AUTO“ as follows:
With a program loaded, press the HSK 1.7
“Simulation“ to start a simulation run.
The following screen opens, with a side view on the
blank by default.
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “3D view”, the simulation of

the workpiece is shown from the face view (see pic-
ture below).
The following functions are available in the vertical softkey bar.

Notes :

By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Stop“ the simulation will
be halted. The softkey will be replaced with the
“Start” softkey, in order to continue the simulation
again.
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “Start” the simulation will
be started or continued. The softkey will be replaced
with the “Stop” softkey (see VSK 1.1 “Stop”).
By pressing the VSK 1.1 “SBL“ the simulation will be

processed block by block. This softkey replaces the
softkey “Start”, if the VSK 4 “Single block” is acti-
vated under the function “Program control”.
By pressing the VSK 1.2 “Reset“ the simulation will

be aborted.
The VSK 1.3 “Side view” is activated by default and

shows the simulation in from the side (see the upper
picture on the last page).
By pressing the VSK 1.4 “Face view” the simulation

of the workpiece will be shown from the front.
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” the vertical

softkey bar opens, with more options to adjust the
view on the simulation process (see section 6.3).

key bar opens, where you can adjust the level of de-
tails that will be shown during the simulation (see
section 6.4).
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the ver-
tical softkey bar opens, with functions to control the
simulation run (see section 6.5).
By pressing the VSK 1.8 “Extend” the vertical soft-

key bar 2 with the following functions will be dis-
played.
By pressing the VSK 2.3 “Show tool path” the dis-

play of the simulated tool path can be switched on
and off.
By pressing the VSK 2.4 “Delete tool path” the ani-

mated tool path in the simulation window will be de-
leted. A new tool path is shown immediately after
pressing this softkey or after running a new simula-
tion (if the simulation is in “Stop”- or “Reset”- mode).


Notes :
6.3 Further views
With the function “Further views” a second view of the blank is available
and opened in “2 windows”, to view the simulation process in an optimal
way.
6.3.1 Selecting the function “Further views”
By pressing the VSK 1.5 “Further views” a vertical

softkey bar opens, with a new option for viewing the
blank and the simulation.

By pressing the VSK 2 “2 windows” the simulation
window will be split in two sub windows, one show-
ing the simulation in the side and one in the face
view.

Notes :
6.4 Details
With the function “Details” you can zoom in and zoom out of the workpiece
during simulation.
6.4.1 Selecting the function “Details”
By pressing the VSK 1.6 “Details“ the following func-

tions for changing the level of details are available in
a vertical softkey bar:
By pressing the VSK 1 “Autozoom“ the workpiece

fills out the simulation window in an optimal way.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Zoom +“ you zoom in into

the simulation window. Alternatively you can press
the “+“-key on the number block of the keyboard.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Zoom -“ you can zoom out
of the simulation window. Alternatively you can press
the “-“-key on the keyboard.
By pressing the VSK 4 “Zoom” a frame opens in the

simulation window, that lets you zoom in to the ex-
tent of the frame size.
Press the VSK1 “Zoom +” to increase and the VSK

2 “Zoom -” to decrease the frame size. Move the
frame with the blue cursor keys on the keyboard.
Press the VSK 8 “Accept” to zoom to the selected

extent or abort by pressing the VSK 7 “Cancel”.

By pressing the VSK 8 “Back” on the operator

6.5 Program control
With the function “Program control” the override can be adjusted for the
simulation, the program can be executed in single blocks and alarm mes-
sages, that occur during simulation, can be displayed.
6.5.1 Selecting the function “Program control”
By pressing the VSK 1.7 “Program control” the

following functions will be shown in a vertical softkey
bar on the right side of the screen.

By pressing the VSK 1 “100% Override“ the
feedrate override is set to the maximum override of
100%.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Override +” the override will

be increased in 5% steps each time you press the
softkey, until a maximum of 100% is reached.
By pressing the VSK 3 “Override -” the override will

be decreased in 5% steps each time you press the
softkey, until a minimum of 0% is reached.
With a feedrate override of 0% the simulation is
paused.
By pressing the VSK 4 “Single block” the simulation

will be executed block by block.
Each time you press the VSK 1 “SBL” in the operat-
ing area “Simulation” one program block will be exe-
cuted. (see section 6.2, “Vertical softkey bar 1 and
2”).

alarms” window opens, with alarm messages that
have occurred during a simulation run.
This can be used for error detection.


Notes :
6.6 Alarm
The function “Alarm” shows a list of all current active alarm messages that
occurred during the simulation run.
6.6.1 Selecting the function “Alarm“

alarms” window opens.
For error messages and acknowledgement symbols
see module - B526 “Operating area Diagnostics”,
section 3.

By pressing the VSK 1 “Acknowl. Alarm” all with
the “Reset”- or “Cancel”-symbol marked alarm mes-
sages can be deleted. This softkey is inactive as
long as no appropriate error message is shown.
By pressing the VSK 2 “Simulation Power On” you

can trigger a warm restart for the active simulation.
Press the VSK 8 “OK” to confirm or the VSK 7

“Cancel” to abort the warm restart. With a warm
start the simulation will be ended and started anew.
the operating area “Program control”.

NC Execute Section 7
Notes :
7.1 Selecting the function “NC Execute”
The function “NC Execute” lets you load the active program from the editor
to the operating area “Machine” in the operating mode “AUTO”.
By pressing the HSK 1.8 “NC Execute” the control,

switches to the operating area “Machine” under the
operating mode “AUTO”.
The program modified in the editor is now ready for
machining (see picture below).
In running state this softkey is deactivated

B610 Drilling
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Drilling” by programming two
chained sequential ShopTurn programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple drilling example with ShopTurn functionality, as
well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles
and position patterns.
Content:
B610
B610

B610
Drilling - ShopTurn: Description
Drilling
ShopTurn:
drilling example with ShopTurn functionality, as
well as well as the programming of a more com-
plex workpiece by means of chained drilling cycles Simple
and position patterns. programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Drilling
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple drilling operation using a “centric drilling”-cycle is to be pro-

grammed as a sequential program with ShopTurn functionality.
Objective:
A new ShopTurn-program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The program header, a centric drilling cycle and the program end are to be
programmed and simulated.
Tool data: Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)

S 1000 rpm
A new ShopTurn program can be created from all operating modes, as fol-
lows:
- OR -

panel and then the yellow HSK 1.4 „Programm
manager“.


new programs opens.
4. Press the VSK 3 “ShopTurn” to open the input mask

for creating a new ShopTurn sequential program.
Enter a name for the program in the “Name” field

and accept with pressing the VSK 8 “OK”.
The program is loaded to the editor and the parame-

ter window for the program header is opened by de-
fault.

Notes :
2.2 Example: Drilling
The following ShopTurn program with a “centric drilling”-cycle is to be pro-

grammed:
1. Create a new ShopTurn program as described in

section 2.1.
Give the program the name “ST_DRILLING_1”.
The input window for the program header opens
automatically.
2. Enter the values for the program header as

displayed below:

Notes :
3 Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”
The following program block “Program header” will

be inserted into the work plan.
4. Program now the “centric drilling” cycle.
For this, press the HSK 1.2 Drill.”, to open the tech-
nology “Drilling”.
Press the VSK 1 “Drilling centric”.

The input mask for the “Drilling centric”-cycle opens.
5. Fill out the input mask as followed:
To insert a tool into the parameter window, press the

VSK 1 “Select tool”.
Mark the desired tool (DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list
with the orange selection cursor and press the VSK
8 “OK”.
The following program block “Drilling centric” will
6. Program the end of the program and simulate the

machining.
To do this, place the orange selection cursor on the
program block “End of program” and extend the
program block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-
right”-key on the keyboard.
7. The settings window for the program end opens,

where you can define to repeat the workpiece.
Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.

Notes :
The program block “End of program” will be up-
dated.


“Side view” by default.


Notes :
Description:
A more complex ShopTurn program, by means of a hole pattern, is to be

programmed with help of calling up various drilling cycles (centring, drilling,
tapping and a position pattern).
Objective:
A new ShopTurn-program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The program header, a centric drilling cycle, a position pattern and the
program end are to be programmed and simulated.
Tool data: Centre drill 12 mm (CENTERDRILL_D12)

Drill Ø 8,5 mm (DRILL_D8.5)
Tap M10 (TAP_M10)

S 500 rpm
Approach strategy: As a start position for the machining, the first pro-
grammed drill hole is to be used.

Notes :
3.1 Example: Hole pattern front face
The following program with call up of the drill cycles “Centering”, “Drilling”,
“Tapping” and the position pattern “Position circle” is to be programmed.
Create a new ShopTurn program, like described in section 2.1 in this

module. Give the program a name, for example “ST_DRILLING_2.MPF”.
The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens auto-
matically.
1. Program the program header by entering/selecting
the following values/parameters:

Notes :
.
be inserted into the work plan:
3. Start the program by programming a centering drill

cycle.
Press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.”, to open the technology
for “drilling”.
Press the VSK 1 “Centering”.
The input mask for the “Centering” cycle opens.
To insert a tool into the input mask, press the VSK 1

“Select tool”.
Mark the desired tool (CENTERDRILL_D12) in the
tool list with the orange selection cursor and press
the VSK 8 “OK”.
The following program block “Centering” will be in-
serted into the work plan:
The program chain starts (note the opened bracket

on the right side of the icon)
4. Now, program the drill cycle.

Press the VSK 2 “Drilling Reaming”, to open the
technology for “Drilling Reaming”.
Select the VSK 3 “Drilling” to open the input mask

for the “drilling” cycle.

Notes :
Mark the desired tool (DRILL_D8.5) in the tool list
8 “OK”.
The following program block “Drilling” will be in-
The program chain will be extended.

(Note the bilateral opened bracket on the right side
of the icon).
6. Program now the tapping cycle.
Press the VSK 5 “Tapping”.

The input mask for the “Tapping”-cycle opens.
To insert a tool into the parameter mask, press the

Mark the desired tool (TAP_M10) in the tool list with
the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8
“OK”.
The following program block “Tapping” will be in-
The program chain will be extended.

(Note the bilateral opened bracket on the right side
of the icon)
8. Program now the position pattern for the drilling, in

order to close the program block chain.
Press the VSK 7 „Positions“.

The positions input mask opens.
To set the positions for the drillings press the VSK 5

“Position circle”.
The “Position circle” input mask opens.

Notes :
The following program block “Position circle” will be

inserted into the work plan:
The program chain will be closed.

(Note the downward closed bracket on the right side
of the icon).
10. Program now the program end and simulate the ma-
chining.
Place the orange selection cursor on the “End of

Program” program block.
Extend the program block by pressing the blue
“cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.
The input mask for the program end opens.

Accept the default value by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.
The program block “End of program” will be up-
dated.

Notes :

“Side view” by default.
To view the simulation in a view on the face of the

workpiece, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Notes :

B617 Milling
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Milling” by programming two
ShopTurn programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple milling program (multi-edged spigot) with Shop-
Turn functionality, as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece (rectangular pocket) by
means of a milling cycle and a position pattern.
Content:
B617
B617

B617
Drilling - ShopTurn: Description
Drilling
ShopTurn:
milling program (multi-edged spigot) with Shop-
Turn functionality, as well as the programming of a
more complex workpiece (rectangular pocket) by Simple
means of a milling cycle and a position pattern. programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Drilling
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple milling operation is to be programmed in a ShopTurn program, by

means of a multi edged spigot on the face side of the blank.
Objective:
A new ShopTurn program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The program header, a milling cycle and the end of the program are to be
programmed and afterwards simulated.
Technology data: F = 500 mm/min

V = 120 m/min
A new ShopTurn program can be created from within the operating modes
The program manager will open directly.
- OR -
panel.
Press the yellow HSK 1.4 „Programm manager“.



The vertical softkey bar with functions to create new
programs opens.


The program is loaded to the “editor” and the pa-

rameter window for the program header is opened
by default.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Multi-edge spigot
The following ShopTurn program with a multi-edge milling cycle is to be

programmed:
1. Create a new ShopTurn program like described in

section 2.1. and give the program the name
“ST_MILLING_1.MPF”.
The input window for the program header opens.
2. Insert following values/parameters into the program

header:
Confirm your inputs with the VSK 8 “Accept”.

Notes :
3. Program now a multi-edge spigot milling cycle.
For this, press the HSK 1.5 “Mill.”, to open the tech-
Press the VSK 3 “Multi-edge spigot”.
“Multi-edge spigot” opens
Press the VSK 5 “Multi edge”.
The input mask for the “Multi edge” milling cycle
opens.

Mark the desired tool (CUTTER_D8) in the tool list
8 “OK”
The following program block “Multi-edge” is inserted
into the work plan.
5. To program the end of the program, place the or-

ange selection cursor on the program block “End of
program” and extend the program block by pressing
the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key on the keyboard.
The input mask for the program end opens, where
you can define to repeat the workpiece.

Notes :
Accept the default setting “No” by pressing the VSK
8 “Accept”.
The program end “End of program” is updated



Notes :
Description:
A more complex ShopTurn program is to be programmed, by means of a

rectangular pocket cycle and a position pattern on the face side of the
blank.
Objective:

The program header, milling cycle, position pattern and the end of the pro-
gram are to be programmed and afterwards simulated.
Tool data: CUTTER_D8
Technology data: F = 0.030 mm/tooth

V = 220 m/min

Notes :
Description:
A more complex ShopTurn program is to be programmed, by means of a

rectangular pocket cycle and a position pattern on the face side of the
blank.
Objective:

The program header, milling cycle, position pattern and the end of the pro-
gram are to be programmed and afterwards simulated.
Tool data: CUTTER_D8
Technology data: F = 0.030 mm/tooth

V = 220 m/min

Notes :
2.
The following program block “Program header” is
inserted into work plan:
3. Program now a rectangular pocket milling cycle.

Press the HSK 1.5 „Mill.“ to open the function
“Milling”.
Press the VSK 2 “Pocket“.
“Pocket” opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Rectang. Pocket”
The input mask for the rectangular pocket milling
cycle opens.

Mark the desired tool (CUTTER_D8) in the tool list
with the orange selection cursor and press the
VSK 8 “OK”.
The following program block “Rectang. pocket” is
inserted into work plan:
The program chain opens (see the downward

opened bracket on the right side of the icon).

Notes :
5. Now, program a single position for the machining of
the rectangular pocket.
Press the HSK 1.2 “Drill.” to open the work area for
the technology “Drilling”.
Press the VSK 7 “Positions” . The work area for the
“Positions” opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Positions”.

The input mask for the cycle “Positions” opens.

The following program block “Positions” is inserted
into the work plan:
The program chain closes (note the downward

closed bracket on the right side of the icon).
7. Program now the end of the program and simulate

the machining.
Place the orange selection cursor on the program

block “End of program” and switch to the parameter
mask for the program end by pressing the blue
“cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.

Accept the default setting “No” and press the VSK 8

“Accept”.
The following program block “End of program” is

updated:

Notes :
In order to start the simulation run, press the
HSK 1.7 “Simulation”.



B625 Turning
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Turning” by programming two
ShopTurn programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple turning example with ShopTurn functionality, as
well as well as the programming of a more complex workpiece by means of different turning cycles
(stock removal, groove, undercut, thread longitudinal, cutoff).
Content:
B625
B625

B625
Turning - ShopTurn: Description
Turning
ShopTurn:
turning example with ShopTurn functionality, as
well as well as the programming of a more com-
plex workpiece by means of different turning cy- Simple
cles (stock removal, groove, undercut, thread lon- programming
gitudinal, cutoff). example
Complex
programming
example
Turning
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple turning operation is to be programmed with ShopTurn.
Objective:

The program header, a stock removal cycle, and the end of the program
are to be programmed and afterwards simulated.
For this, the following tool- and technology data are to be used:

Technology data: F 0.3 mm/rev
V 200 m/min
2.1 Creating a new sequential program
A new ShopTurn program can be created from within the operating modes
The program manager will open directly.
- OR -

panel.
Press the yellow HSK 1.4 „Programm manager“.



opens.


The program is loaded to the “editor” and the input

mask for the program header is opened by default.

Notes :
The following ShopTurn program is to be programmed:
1. Create a new ShopTurn program as described in the

previous section 2.1 and give the program a name,
for example “ST_TURNING_1.MPF”.

automatically.

header:

Notes :
3. Program a stock removal cycle.

ogy “Turning”.
Press the VSK 1 “Stock removal”. The work area
with the functions for the technology “Stock removal”
opens.
input mask for the cycle “Stock removal 1”.

Mark the desired tool (ROUGHING_TOOL_A80) in
the tool list with the orange selection cursor and
press the VSK 8 “OK”
The following program block “Stock removal” will be
inserted into the work plan.

machining.
block “End of program” and extend the program
block by pressing the blue “cursor-to-the-right”-key
on the keyboard.
Accept the default setting “No” by pressing the VSK

8 “Accept”. The program end is updated.

Notes :


Notes :
Description:
A more complex ShopTurn program (threaded spigot) with the call up of

different turning cycles (stock removal, groove, undercut, thread longitudi-
nal, cut off) is to be created.
Objective:

The program header, stock removal, groove, undercut, thread longitudinal,
cut off and the end of the program are to be programmed and afterwards
simulated.
Tool- and ROUGHING_TOOL_A80

technology data: (F 0.300 mm/rev)
FINISHING_TOOL_35
(F 0.150 mm/rev)
PLUNGECUTTER_3
( F 0.150 mm/rev)
FINISHING_TOOL_35
(F 0.300 mm/rev)
THREADING_TOOL_2
( F 2.0 mm/rev)
PLUNGECUTTER_3
( F 0.100 mm/rev)

Notes :
3.1 Programming example: Threaded spigot
The following program with the call up of different turning cycles is to be

programmed.
Create a new ShopTurn program like described in section 2.1 in this

module and name the program for example “ST_TURNING_2.MPF“.
The program with the parameter mask for the program header opens.

header:

Notes :
2
The following program block “Program header” is
inserted into the work plan.
3. Program now the first stock removal cycle.

ogy “Turning”.

input mask for the cycle “stock removal 1”.

VSK 1.1 “Select tool”.
press the VSK 8 “OK”.
The following program block “Stock removal” is
5. Program now the second stock removal cycle.

The work area for the “Stock removal” cycle opens.

input mask for the cycle “Stock removal 2”.

Notes :
The following program block “Stock removal” is in-

7. Insert another stock removal cycle into the program.

Press the VSK 4 “Stock removal 2”, to open the in-

put mask for the “Stock removal 2” cycle.

Mark the desired tool (here FINISHING_TOOL_35)
in the tool list with the orange selection cursor and

Notes :

9. Insert the last stock removal cycle into the program.


input mask for the “Stock removal 2” cycle.

11. Insert a groove cycle into the program.
Press the VSK 2 “Groove”.

The work area for the technology “Groove” opens.
Press the VSK 4 “Groove 2”, to open the input mask

for the groove cycle “Groove 2”.

Notes :

Mark the desired tool (PLUNGECUTTER_3) in the
the VSK 8 “OK”.
The following program block “Groove” is inserted
into the work plan:
13. Insert now a undercut cycle into the program.

Press the VSK 3 “Undercut”. The work area with the
functions for the technology “Undercut” opens.
Press the VSK 5 “Undercut thrd DIN” to open the
input mask for the undercut cycle “Undercut thread
(DIN76)”.

Notes :
Mark the desired tool (FINISHING_TOOL_35) in the
the VSK 8 “OK”.
The following program block “Undercut GDIN” is
15. Insert a thread turning cycle into the program.

“Thread” opens.
Press the VSK 3 “Thread long.” to open the input

mask for the Cycle ”Thread longitudinal”.

Mark the desired tool (THREADING_TOOL_2) in the
the VSK 8 “OK”.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 „Accept“.
The following program block “Thread long.” is

Notes :
17. As a last machining step, program the cutoff of the
workpiece.
Press the VSK 5 “Cutoff”.

The input mask for the “Cutoff” cycle opens.

Mark the desired tool (here PLUNGECUTTER_2) in
The following program block “Cutoff” is inserted into
the work plan:

the machining.

block “End of program” and switch to the parameter
mask for the program end by pressing the blue
“cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.


“Accept”.
The program end is updated.

Notes :



B633 Contour milling
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the technology “Contour turning” by program-
ming two chained sequential ShopTurn programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple ShopTurn program (bevel), by using contour cycle
chained together with a stock removal cycle, as well as the programming of a more complex work-
piece by means of chained contours, stock removal- and residual cutting cycles.
Content:
B633
B633

B633
Contour turning - ShopTurn: Description
Contour turning
ShopTurn:
ShopTurn program (bevel), by using contour cycle
chained together with a stock removal cycle, as
well as the programming of a more complex work- Simple
piece by means of chained contours, stock re- programming
moval- and residual cutting cycles. example
Complex
programming
example
Contour turning
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple contour turning operation, using a contour and stock removal cy-
cle is to be programmed as a chained sequential program with ShopTurn
functionality.
Objective:
A new sequential program is to be created and opened in the editor.

The program header, a contour description and a stock removal cycle are
to be programmed and simulated.
For this, the tool- and technology data shown below are to be used:
Technology data: F 0,4 mm/U, V 200 m/min
Approach strategy: As a start position for the machining, the following
position will be programmed:
X 30 Z 0
2.1 Creating a new sequential ShopTurn program
A new ShopTurn program can be created in all operating modes, as fol-

lows:

- OR -

panel.
Press the HSK 4 “Program Manager”.



opens.


The program is loaded to the “editor” and the input


Notes :
2.2 Example: Bevel
The following ShopTurn program with the call up of a contour, chained with
a stock removal cycle, is to be programmed.

the previous section 2.1. and give the program the
name “ST_CONTOURTURNING_1.MPF”.
The input mask for the program header opens auto-
matically.
2. Enter the following values into the program header:

Notes :
be inserted into the work plan:
3. Program now the contour description for the turning

operation
.
For this, press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. turn.” in order to
activate the function “Contour turning”.
An input window opens where you can enter a suit-

able name for the new contour.
4. Insert the Name for the new contour e.g. “BEVEL”

into the following input mask:
Accept your input by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.
The contour editor for the contour description opens,

with the input window for defining the starting point
of the contour.

Notes :
5. Enter the starting point coordinates as follows:
Accept your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 Accept”.
6. Extend the contour description by inserting a straight

line in direction ZX.
Press the VSK 4 “Straight ZX”.

The input mask for the “Straight ZX” opens.
7. Enter the coordinates as follows:
Note:
The starting angle to the Z-axis “α1” is calculated
automatically, by entering the “Z” and “X” values.
8. Examine now the finished contour outline.

screen, by pressing blue “cursor-to-the-left”-key on
the keyboard.
Place the orange selection cursor on the “END”-

Symbol in the yellow contour step bar by using the
blue “cursor-down”-key on the keyboard.
The following screen with a sketch of the contour

path will be displayed (see the following page).

Notes :
9. Finish now the contour description by pressing the

VSK 8 “Accept”.
The following program block “Contour” will be

The program chain starts (recognizable by the

bracket opened downward, on the right side of the
programming symbol) .
10. Insert a stock removal cycle into the program.
Press the VSK 1.2 “Stock removal” to open the in-

put mask for the stock removal cycle.
The parameter mask for the stock removal cycle
opens.

Notes :
In order to insert a tool into the input mask, press the
Mark the appropriate tool (ROUGHING_TOOL_A80)
VSK 8 “OK”.
The program block “Stock removal” will be inserted

into the work plan:
The program chain is now closed (recognizable by

the downward closed bracket , on the right side of
the programming symbol) .

the machining.
For this, place the orange selection cursor on the

program block “End of program” and switch to the
parameter mask by pressing the blue “cursor to-the
-right” key on the keyboard.
13. The input mask for the program end opens, where
Accept the default setting “No” by pressing the

VSK 8 “Accept”.
The program block “End of program” is updated.

Notes :
Press the HSK 1.7 „Simulation“ to start the simula-
tion of the program run.
The control calculates the simulation and starts the

simulation with an animation window showing the
machining in a side view of the blank by default.
To view the simulation in a face view on the blank,

press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

Notes :
Description:
A more complex ShopTurn sequential program (spigot) is to be pro-

grammed, by using different turning cycles (contour, stock removal, resid-
ual cutting).
Objective:

Then the program is to be simulated.
The following tool- and technology data are to be used for programing:
Tool- and ROUGHING_TOOL_A80

technology data: (F 0,3 mm/U, V 260 m/min)
BUTTON_TOOL_8
(F 0,25 mm/U, V 240 m/min)
FINISHING_TOOL_35
(F 0,12 mm/U, 280 m/min)
Approach strategy: The following position is programmed as the
contour starting point:
X 0
Z 0
This point will be approached in the cycle automati-
cally with rapid traverse.

Notes :
3.1 Example: Spigot
The following program is to be created, with the call up of multiple contour

descriptions, as well as stock removal- and the residual cutting cycles.
1. Create a new ShopTurn sequential program like de-

scribed in section 2.1 in this module and name the
program “ST_CONTOURTURNING_2.MPF“.
The program, with the parameter mask for the pro-
gram header opens by default.
2. Enter the following values into the program header:

Notes :
3. Program the first contour description.
Press the HSK 1.4 “Cont. turn.”, to open the tech-

nology “Contour turning”.

The “New contour” input mask opens where you can
enter a suitable name for the new contour.
4. Enter a name for the contour, e.g.

“SPIGOT_BLANK” as follows:

of the contour (recognizable by the yellow bar with
the contour elements and programming symbols on
the left edge of the screen, and the yellow vertical
softkey-bar on the right edge of the screen):

Notes :
5. Enter the following coordinates as starting point:

X-direction.
Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line X” to open the

input mask for the “Straight line X” contour element.
7. Enter the following coordinates into the input mask:

Note:
The starting angle to the Z-axis “α1” is calculated
automatically, by entering the X value.

Z-direction.
Press the VSK 1.2 “Straight line Z” to open the in-

put mask for the contour element “Straight line Z”.
Accept your inputs by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.

Note:
By entering the value Z, the values for “α1” and “α2”
are calculated automatically from the previous con-
tour element and the current entered position.
10 Extend the contour by adding a straight line in ZX-

direction.

Notes :
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX” to open the input
mask for the contour element “Straight ZX”.

Note:
By entering the value for the parameter “X” and “Z” ,
the values for “α1” and “α2” are calculated automati-
cally.
12. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in Z-

direction.
Press the VSK1.2 “Straight line Z” to open the input
mask for the contour element “Straight line Z” .

Note:
By entering the value for the parameter “Z” , the val-
ues for “α1” and “α2” are calculated automatically.
14. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in direc-

tion ZX.
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX“ to open the input
mask for the contour element “Straight ZX”.

Note:

Notes :
16. Extend the contour by adding a straight line in Z
direction.

put mask for the contour element “Straight line Z” .

Note:
By entering the value for “Z” , the values for “α1” and

X direction.
Press the VSK 1.3 „Straight line X” to open the pa-

rameter for the “Straight line X”.

Note:
By entering the value for “X” , the values for “α1” and
20. For closing the contour extend the contour descrip-

tion by adding a straight line in ZX direction.
Press the VSK 1.4 “Straight ZX” to open the input

mask for the “Straight ZX” contour element.

Notes :
Note:
You have finished now the last contour element.
22. Now, examine the finished contour outline.

the keyboard.
Symbol in the yellow contour step bar by using the
The following screen with a sketch of the contour

description will be displayed.
23. Finish the contour by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program chain opens (recognizable by the

downward opened bracket right beside the program-
ming symbol).
24. Now, start a new contour.

An input window opens where you can enter a suit-
able name for the new contour.

Notes :
25. Enter a new contour Name e.g.
“SPIGOT_FINISHED”:

of the contour.
26. Enter the following coordinates as starting point:
27. Start the new contour by adding a straight line in

X direction.
Press the VSK 1.3 “Straight line X” to open the in-

put mask for the contour element “Straight line X”.

Note:
By entering the value for “X” , the starting value to
the Z-axis “α1” is calculated automatically.
29. Start the new contour by adding a straight line in

Z direction.


Notes :
Note:
By entering the value for “Z” , the starting value to
the Z-axis “α1” and the angle to the previous ele-
ment “α2” are calculated automatically.
31. Extend the contour by adding a circle.

Press the VSK 1.5 “Circle” to open the input mask
for the contour element “Circle”.
32. Enter the coordinates for “X”, “K”, “I” and the radius
into the input mask as follows:
Note:
If the other parameter values are not updated as de-
sired, press the VSK 4 “Change selection”,
then the VSK 1 “Dialog select” to make a selection
between the geometrical solutions and
confirm with pressing the VSK 8 “Dialog accept”.

Z direction.


Notes :

Note:

ZX direction.

The parameter window for the contour element
“Straight ZX” opens.

Note:
By entering the values for “Z” an “X” , the values for

Z direction.

The parameter window for the contour element
“Straight line Z” opens.

Note:
You have finished now the last contour element.

Notes :
39. Now, examine the finished contour outline.
the keyboard.
Symbol in the yellow contour step bar, by using the
The following screen with a sketch of the contour outline will be displayed:
40. Finish the contour by pressing the VSK 8 “Accept”.

The program chain is extended.

Notes :
40. Insert a stock removal cycle into the program.
Press the VSK 1.2 “Stock removal” to open the

input mask for the “Stock removal” cycle.
In order to insert a tool into the parameter mask,

press the VSK 1 “Select tool”.
Mark the appropriate tool (ROUGHING_TOOL_A80)
VSK 8 “OK”.
The program block “Stock removal” will be inserted

into the work plan:
42. Insert a “Residual cutting” cycle into the program.
Press the VSK 3 “Cut resid stock” to open the pa-

rameter mask for the “Cut residual material” cycle.
43. Fill out the parameter mask as follows:

Notes :
Mark the appropriate tool (BUTTON_TOOL_8) with
the orange selection cursor and press the VSK 8
“OK”.
The program block “Residual cutting” will be in-

44. As a last machining step, program a “Stock removal”

cycle.
Press the VSK 1.2 “Stock removal” to open the in-

put mask for the “Stock removal” cycle.
45. Fill out the parameter mask as follows:

Mark the appropriate tool (FINISHING_TOOL_A35)
8 “3D”.
The following program block “Stock removal” will be

The program chain is now closed (recognizable by

the downward closed bracket right beside the pro-
gramming symbol).

Notes :
machining of the program.

block “End of program” and extend the program-
ming block by pressing the blue “cursor to-the-
right” key on the keyboard.


VSK 8 “Accept”.
The program block “End of program” is updated.

Notes :
Press the HSK 1.7 “Simulation“ to start the simula-
tion of the program run.

simulation in an animation window showing the ma-
chining in a side view on the blank.
To switch to face view, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view”.

B641 Straight Circle
1 Brief description
Working through this module you become familiar with the function “Straight Circle” in ShopTurn by
programming two programs with ShopTurn functionality.
This module explains exemplary the programming of a contour machining operation (planar cut) with
the function “Straight Circle” and the programming of a more complex workpiece (shaft).
Content:
840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate
840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 This document was produced for training purposes.
B641
B641

B641
Straight - Circle: Description
Straight
Circle:
This module explains exemplary the programming START
of a contour machining operation (planar cut) with
the function “Straight Circle” and the programming
of a more complex workpiece (shaft). Simple
programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Straight
Circle:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple ShopTurn-program using the function “Straight Circle” is to be

programmed.
Objective:

The program header, several “Straights” and the program end are to be
programmed.
Afterwards the program is to be simulated.
For this, the tool- and technology data shown below are to be used:
Tool data: Finishing tool 35° (FINISHING_TOOL_35)
Technology data: S 1500 rpm
A new ShopTurn program can be created in all operating modes, as fol-

lows:

The program manager opens directly.
- OR -

panel.


gram by pressing the corresponding horizontal soft-
key (“NC”, “Local drive”, “USB”).

opens.


The program is loaded to the editor and the input

B641 Page 4 840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Planar cut
The following ShopTurn program is to be programmed using the function

“Straight Circle”:

the previous section 2.1 and give the program a
name, e.g. “ST_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_1.MPF”.
The input mask for the program header opens.
2. Fill out the program header input mask as follows:
840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 5 B641

Notes :
The program block “Program header” is inserted
into the work plan:
3. Insert now a tool (FINISHING_TOOL_35) into the

program.
Switch to the horizontal softkey bar 2, by pressing

the “Extend”-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle”.

The operating area of the function “Straight Circle”
opens.
Press the VSK 1 “Tool” to open the input mask for

the tool (see picture below).

Mark the appropriate tool (FINISHING_TOOL_35)
VSK 8 “OK”.
The tool is inserted into the input mask.
Fill out the rest of the input mask as follows:
The following program block is inserted into the work

plan:
4. Insert now the first of several “Straight”-cycles into

the program.
Press the VSK 2 “Straight” to open the input mask

for the function “Straight”.

Notes :
5. Insert the following values into the input mask:

plan:
6. Insert another “Straight”-cycle into the program.

The input mask for the function “Straight” opens.
7. Insert the following values into the parameter mask:

plan:


plan:

Notes :
10. Insert the last “Straight”-cycle into the program.


plan:
12. Program now the program end and simulate the

machining.

block “End of program” and switch to the input
mask by pressing the blue “cursor to-the-right” key
on the keyboard.
The input mask for the program end opens.

Here you can adjust whether you want to repeat the
program run or not.
Accept the default setting “no” by pressing the VSK

8 “Accept”.
13. To simulate the program run switch back to the hori-

zontal softkey bar 1.
For this, press the “Menu extend”-key on the opera-

tor panel.

Notes :
To start the simulation press the HSK 1.7
„Simulation“.

simulation in an animation window, showing the ma-
If you want to watch the simulation with a view on

the front side of the blank, press the VSK 1.4 “3D
view”.

Notes :
Description:
A more complex program (shaft) is to be programmed, by using the func-

tion “Straight Circle”.
Objective:
A new ShopTurn program to machine the workpiece below is to be cre-

ated.
The program header, several “Straights” and “Circles” as well as the pro-
gram end are to be programmed.
The following data are to be used for the programming:
Tool data: Finishing tool 55° (FINISHING_TOOL_55)
Technology data: S 1500 rpm F 0.3mm/rev
Blank dimensions: Ø 105 x 102 mm

Work steps: - Planar cut to Z = 0.
- Machining step Ø 90 x 60 mm with one cut.
- Machining of the finished diameter including the
machining of the chamfer 3x45° and the radius R5.

Notes :
3.1 Programming example: Shaft
The following ShopTurn program is to be created:

section 2.1 in this module and give the program the
name “ST_STRAIGHT_CIRCLE_2.MPF“.
The program, with the input mask for the program
header opens by default.
2. Fill out the program header input mask as follows:

Notes :

plan:
3. Inset now a tool (FINISHING_TOOL_55) into the

program.
In order to do this, switch to the horizontal softkey

bar 2, by pressing the “Menu extend”-key on the
operator panel.
Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle” to select the func-

tion “Straight Circle”.
The operating area of the function “Straight Circle”
opens.
Now press the VSK 1 “Tool” to open the input mask

for the tool (see picture below).

Mark the appropriate tool (FINISHING_TOOL_55)
VSK 8 “OK”.
The tool is inserted into the input mask.
Fill out the rest of the input mask, as follows:

plan:

Notes :
4. Insert now the first “Straight”-cycle into the program,
to approach the tool onto the starting position for
machining.
Press the VSK 2 “Straight”, to open the input mask


The following program block is inserted into the pro-
gram:
6. Insert now another “Straight”-cycle into the program.


gram:


gram:

Notes :


gram:
12. Insert now another “Straight”-cycle into the program.


gram:


gram:

Notes :


gram:


gram:


gram:

Notes :

22. Insert the following value into the input mask:

gram:
23. Now, insert a “Circle radius”-cycle into the program.
Press the VSK 4 “Circle radius”, to open the input

mask for the function “Circle radius”.

gram:

26. Insert the following value into the input mask:

gram:

Notes :


gram:
29. Now insert the last “Straight”-cycle into the program.


gram:

the machining afterwards.
For this, place the orange selection cursor on the

program block “End of program”, using the blue
cursor keys on the keyboard.
Press the “cursor-to-the-right”-key in order to
switch to the input mask for the “End of program”.
The input window for the program end opens. Here

you can adjust whether you want to repeat the pro-
gram run or not.
Accept the default value “No” by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.

Notes :
35. To simulate the machining, switch back to the hori-
zontal softkey bar 1.
For this press the “Menu extend”-key on the operator

panel. The horizontal softkey bar 1 opens.
Start the simulation, by pressing the HSK 1.7

“Simulation”.
simulation in an animation window, showing the ma-
For a simulation with a view on the front side of the


B649 Measurement turning ShopTurn
1 Brief description
Working with this module you become familiar with the technology “Measurement Turning” by pro-
gramming two sequential ShopTurn programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the work-
piece with the function “Measurement Turning” in ShopTurn.
Content:
B649
B649

B649
Measure Turning - ShopTurn: Description
Measure turning
ShopTurn:
and a complex measuring process of the work-
piece with the function “Measurement Turning” in
ShopTurn. Simple
programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Measure turning
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple measuring movement with a 3D-probe to the face side of a work-

piece is to be programmed under ShopTurn.
Objective:

The program header, a measuring cycle and the program end are to be
programmed.
Later, the program is to be simulated.
For this, the tool data below is to be used:
Tool data: 3d probe (3D_PROBE))
A new ShopTurn program can be created from within all operating modes
as follows:

- OR -

panel.



opens.

for creating a new ShopTurn program.


by default.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Measuring
The following ShopTurn program with the call up of a measuring cycle is to

be programmed:

the previous section 2.1.
Give the program a name, for example
„ST_MEASURE_TURNING_1.MPF“.
The input window for the program header opens.

Notes :
Confirm your inputs by pressing VSK 8 “Accept”.
plan:
3. Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program.

In order to do this, you have to access the tool list
window from the work area “Straight Circle”!
Note:
This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly
accessible over the technology “Measurem. turning”.
In order to reach to the function “Strght Circle”,

extend the horizontal softkey bar 1 by pressing the
“Extend”-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle”, to open the oper-

ating area “Straight Circle”. Here you have access to
the function “Tool”.
Press the VSK 1 “Tool”, to open the parameter win-

dow for the tool.
Press the VSK 1 “Select tool”.

Mark the desired tool (3D_PROBE) by using the

blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the
VSK 8 “OK”.
The selected tool is loaded into the tool parameter
window.
4. Leave the value as follows:
Confirm your tool selection by pressing the VSK 8

“Accept”.

plan:
5. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight

line with rapid traverse.
Press the VSK 2 “Straight”.

The input mask for the “Straight”-cycle opens.

Notes :
5. Insert the following position values into the parame-
ter mask, and press the VSK 5 “Rapid traverse” to
set the feed rate to rapid traverse:

plan:
6. Program now the measuring cycle (CYCLE974)

“One-pt. meas./CYCLE974”.

measuring functions opens.

The vertical softkey bar with functions for the
measurement of workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 2 “One-point measurem.”.

The input window for the CYCLE974 opens.

Notes :
8. Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 “OK”.
The following two program blocks are inserted into
the work plan.
9. Program the program end and simulate the meas-

urement of the work piece.
Place the orange selection on the program block
“End of program” and extend the line by pressing
the blue “cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.
10. The input mask for the program end opens.

Here, you can decide to repeat the program run.

VSK 8 “Accept”.
Switch back to the vertical softkey bar 1 by pressing

the “Extend”-key on the control panel.


simulation window in “Top view” by default.

Notes :

Notes :
Description:
Another program with an additional measuring movement on the face side

of a cylinder barrel is to be programmed in ShopTurn.
Objective:
The program header, two measuring cycles and the program end are to be
programmed.
For this, the tool data below are to be used:
Tool data: 3d probe (3D_PROBE)
2.2 Programming example : Measuring the face side and the barrel
of a cylinder
The following program with two measuring cycles is to be programmed:

the previous section 2.1.
Give the program a name, for example

“ST_MEASURE_TURNING_2.MPF”.

automatically.

Notes :
2. Insert the following values into the input mask for the
program header.

plan:
3. Insert a probe tool (3D_PROBE) into the program.

In order to do this, you have to access the tool list
window from the work area “Straight Circle”!
Note:
This is necessary, since the tool list is not directly
accessible over the technology “Measurem. turning”.
In order to reach to the function “Strght Circle”,

extend the horizontal softkey bar 1 by pressing the
Press the HSK 2.2 “Strght Circle”, to have access

to the function “Tool”.
Press the VSK 1 “Tool”,

to reach to the tool list window.
Press the VSK 1 “Select tool”.


Notes :
Mark the desired tool (3D_PROBE) by using the
blue cursor key on the keyboard and press the
VSK 8 “OK”.
The selected tool is loaded into the “tool” input mask.
4. Leave the value as follows:

“Accept”.
plan:
5. Program the approach of the probe tool in a straight

line with rapid traverse.

The input mask for the technology “Straight” opens.

ter mask and press the VSK 5 “Rapid tr.” to set the
feedrate to rapid traverse:

“Accept”.
plan:
7. Program now the measuring cycle (CYCLE974)

“One-pt. meas./CYCLE974”.
Extend the horizontal softkey bar 1, by pressing the

Press the HSK 2.6 “Measurem. turning”

The vertical softkey bar with functions for the meas-
urement of workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 2 “One-point measurem.”.


Notes :
The following two program blocks are inserted into

10. After the first measurement, position the tool with

rapid traverse in X direction.


The following program block is inserted into the

work plan:

Notes :
12. Position the tool with rapid traverse in Z direction.



plan window.
14. Insert now a CYCLE994 for measuring the barrel of

the cylindrical workpiece into the program.
Extend the horizontal softkey bar 1, by pressing the



The vertical softkey bar with functions for the meas-
urement of workpieces opens.
Press the VSK 2 “Two-point measurem.”.


Notes :
The following three program blocks are inserted into

17. Program the program end and simulate the meas-

urement of the work piece.
Place the orange selection on the program block

“End of program” and extend the line by pressing
the blue “cursor-to-the-right” key on the keyboard.
18. The input mask for the program end opens.

Here, you can set to repeat the program run.

“Accept”.
Switch back to the horizontal softkey bar 1 by press-

ing the „Extend“-key on the operator panel.

.

Notes :
tion of the measurement.
simulation window in “Side view” by default.
To view the simulation in a view on the face side of

the blank, press the VSK 1.4 “3D view“.

B657 Measurement Milling ShopMill
1 Brief description
Working with this module you become familiar with the technology “Measurement milling” by pro-
gramming two sequential ShopMill programs.
This module explains the programming of a simple and a complex measuring process of the work-
piece with the function “Measurement milling” in ShopMill.
Content:
B657
B657

B657
Measure milling - ShopTurn: Description
Measure milling
ShopTurn:
and a complex measuring process of the work-
piece with the function “Measurement milling” in
ShopMill. Simple
programming
example
Complex
programming
example
Measure milling
ShopTurn:
END
Notes :

Notes :
Description:
A simple measuring motion of a measuring probe into a hole of the work

piece is to be programmed under ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new ShopTurn program is to be created and then opened in the editor.

The program header, a measuring cycle and the end of the program are
programmed.
Thereafter the program is to be simulated.
For this the tool listed below must be used:
Tool data: Measuring probe (3D_PROBE)
2.1 Creation of a new ShopTurn program
Independently of the mode of operation, a new ShopTurn program can be

started as follows:
1. On the CNC-full keyboard press the key

"Program Manager".
The program manager opens immediately.
- OR -
1. On the operator panel press the key

"MENU SELECT".
Now press the yellow HSK 1.4 "Program manager".

2. Now select a suitable drive ("NC", "Local drive" or

"USB"), on which the program is to be started.
3. Press the VSK 2 "New".

The vertical softkey-strip with functions for the crea-
tion of new programs opens.

for creating a new ShopTurn program.


by default.

Notes :
2.2 Programming example: Front face measuring
The following ShopTurn-program with a measuring cycle is to be pro-

grammed:
1. Start a new ShopTurn program, as described in the

previous section 2.1 and give the program the name
"ST_MEASURE_MILLING_1.MPF".
automatically.
Note:
The numbering of the program lines used in the ex-
ample results if at the start the second level was se-
lected with the VSK1.8 "Extension".
Here press VSK2.6 "Settings" and select the follow-
ing settings.

Notes :
2. Enter the following values for the program header:
Confirm your input by pressing the VSK 8 "Accept".
The following program block will be entered in the

work schedule:
3. Include a measuring probe (3D_PROBE) into the

program.
For this select the measuring probe from the tool list
technology "Straight Circle"!
Note:
This is necessary, because the tool list cannot be
selected directly by means of the technology
"Measurement milling".
In order to get to the function "Straight Circle", ex-

pand the horizontal softkey-bar 1 by pressing the
"Extension"-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 2.2 "Strght Circle", in order to gain

access to the function "Tool".
Select the VSK 1 "Tool", to open the input mask

for the tool parameters.
Press the VSK 1 "Tool select".


Notes :
Highlight the respective tool (3D_PROBE) using the
blue cursor key on the CNC full keyboard and select
the VSK 8 "3D".
The selected tool is transferred to the “Tool” input
mask.
4. Leave the values as follows:
Confirm the tool selection by pressing the VSK 8

"Accept"
The following program block is added to the work

plan:
5. Now programme the straight line motion of the

measuring probe at rapid traverse rate.
Press the VSK 2 "Straight".

The input mask for the technology "Straight" opens:
6. Enter the following position values and press the

VSK 5 "Rapid traverse" to change the selection
feedrate to rapid traverse rate.
Confirm your Input with VSK 8 "Accept".

plan:
7. Now programme the motion of the measuring probe

in a straight line at rapid traverse rate.


Notes :
Enter the following position values and press the
Confirm you input with VSK 8 "Accept".
The next program block is added to the work plan.
8. Now programme the measuring cycle "Work piece

measure/hole CYCLE977".
In order to get to the function "Measurement milling",

expand the horizontal softkey-bar 1 by pressing the
"Extension"-key on the operator panel.
For this press the HSK 2.6 "Measurem. milling" on

the extended horizontal softkey-bar.
The operating range "Measurement milling" with the
extended measuring functions opens.

The vertical softkey-strip with functions for the meas-
uring of workpieces opens.

uring of Holes or Shafts opens.
The Funktion "Hole" is pre-selected and therefore

the softkey appears in blue.
The input window for the cycle 977 "Meas. hole/
CYCLE977" opens (see the illustration on the next
page).

Notes :
The two following program blocks are added to the

work plan:
10. Now programme the retraction of the measuring

probe along a straight line at rapid traverse rate.
Press the HSK 2.2 "Strght Circle" to gain access to

the function "Straight".

The input mask for die technology "Straight" opens:


plan:

Notes :
11. Now programme the end of the program and simu-
late the measurement.
Place the orange-coloured cursor on the program
block "End-of-program" and extend the line by
pressing the key "Cursor to the right" on the CNC-
keyboard.
The input mask for the end of the program opens.
Here it is possible to select whether the program run

is to be repeated.
Confirm the default setting "No" with the VSK 8

"Accept".
Change back to the horizontal softkey-bar 1 by

pressing the "Extension"-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 1.7 "Simulation" in order to start the

Note: The 3D-display is an option

Notes :
In order to display the simulation as front elevation of
the workpiece press the VSK 1.4 "3D view".

Notes :
Description:
A further measuring program with an additional measuring motion is to be

programmed under ShopTurn.
Objective:
A new ShopTurn program is to be created and then opened in the editor.

The program header, two measuring cycle and the end of the program are
programmed.
Thereafter the program is to be simulated.
For this the tool listed below must be used:

Tool data: Measuring probe (3D_PROBE)
3.2 Programming example: Internal measuring
The following ShopTurn program with two measuring cycles is to be pro-

grammed:
1. Start a new ShopTurn program as described in the

previous Section 2.1 and name the program
"ST_MEASURE_MILLING_2.MPF".
The input mask for the program header will open

automatically.

Notes :
2. Enter the following values for the program header:

the following program block is added to the work
plan:
3. Add a measuring probe (3D_PROBE) to the pro-

gram.
For this select the measuring probe from the tool list
via the technology "Straight Circle" !
Note:
This is necessary, because the tool list cannot be
selected directly by means of the technology
"Measurement milling".
In order to get to the function "Straight Circle", ex-

pand the horizontal softkey-bar 1 by pressing the
key "Extension" on the operator panel.

the function "Tool".
Press the VSK 1 "Tool" to open the input mask for

the tool parameters.
Press the VSK 1 "Select tool".

Highlight the respective tool (3D_PROBE) by means

of the blue cursor keys on the CNC-keyboard and
press the VSK 8 "3D".
The selected tool is transferred to the “Tool” input
mask.

Notes :
4. Leave the values as follows:
Confirm the tool selection by pressing the VSK 8

"Accept"
plan:
5. Now programme the measuring probe motion in a

straight line at rapid traverse rate.

6. Enter the following position values and press the


plan:
7. Now programme the straight line motion of the

measuring probe at rapid traverse rate.

The input mask for die technology "Straight" opens:


plan:

Notes :
8. Now programme the measuring cycle
"Workpiece measure/Hole CYCLE977".

The operating range "Measurement milling" with the

The vertical softkey-bar with functions for the meas-

uring of Holes or Shafts opens.
The key "Hole" is pre-set and is therefore shown in

blue.
The input window for the cycle 977 "Measurement
milling977" opens.
Confirm your inputs by pressing the VSK 8 "OK".

work plan:

Notes :
10. Now programme the retraction of the measuring
probe along a straight line at rapid traverse rate.




plan:
11. Now programme a further rapid traverse motion.




plan:

Notes :



Confirm the input with the VSK 8 "Accept".

plan:




plan:
14. Now programme the measuring cycle

"Workpiece measure/Face CYCLE978".

The operating are "Measurement milling" with the

Notes :
The vertical softkey-bar with functions for the meas-
Press the selection key "Plane", in order to open the

input mask for the cycle 978 "1 Pkt. measuring./
CYCLE978”.
Fill out the input mask as follows:

work plan:
15. Now programme the end of the program and simu-

late the measurement.
Locate the orange coloured selection cursor on the
program block "end-of-program" and extend the
line by pressing the blue key "Cursor-to-the-right"
on the CNC-keyboard.
The input mask for the end of the program opens.

Here the selection can be made whether the pro-
gram run is to be repeated or not.
Confirm the default setting "No" by pressing the

VSK 8 "Accept".

Notes :
Change back to the horizontal softkey-strip 1 by
pressing the "Extension"-key on the operator panel.
Press the HSK 1.7 "Simulation" to start the

In order to view the simulation as a front elevation of

the workpiece, press the VSK 1.4 "3D view".

B500 Cycles
1 Brief Description
With the help of this module you will get to know the various cycle parameters in ShopMill and Shop-
Turn.
This module explains the various parameters that are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form .
In the course of this the relationship and the differences of the parameters to the individual cycles
and techniques are pointed out.
Content:
Fundamentals
Turning
Drilling
Milling
840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate
This documentation was produced for training purposes.

840D/828D SINUMERIK Operate Page 1 SIEMENS does not accept resposibility for the contents. B500
B500

B500
Cycles: Description
Cycles:
This module explains the various parameters that START
are called up in the cycle masks in tabular form .
In the course of this the relationship and the differ-
ences of the parameters to the individual cycles
and techniques are pointed out. Fundamentals
Turning
Drilling
Milling
Cycles:
END
Notes :

Fundamentals Section 2
2. 1 Cycles Notes :
Cycles are sub-programs (technology-orientated functions) for the execu-

tion of a repeatedly occurring operation on a work piece.
Cycles can be selected comfortably via Softkeys and can simply be pa-
rameterised by means of input masks.
Programmed cycles are inserted in G-Code or step-chain-programs as a

program step and can be re-selected and newly parameterised at any
time.
The following functionality is available both in ShopMill and ShopTurn
 Technology-orientated cycle selection with help of Softkeys
 Input masks for cycle parameters (cycle masks) with help pictures and
animations
 Context-sensitive online-help for every input window
 Support for the contour input (geometry processor)

Section 3 Turning
Notes :
Unit
α Plunge angle Degrees

(Thread relief)
α0 Starting angle offset Degrees
α1 Angle of the tapers Degrees
α1 Angle of the first edge Degrees

(Stock removal)
α1 Flange angle 1 Degrees

(Groove)
α2 Angle of the second edge Degrees

(Stock removal)
α2 Flange angle 2 Degrees

(Groove)
αP Infeed taper (angle) Degrees
Allowance Finishing allowance (only with finishing) mm

(Stock removal)  Yes
U1 contour allowance
 No
Selection Table value, e.g. M10, M12, M14,…

(Thread)
B1 Width of groove, bottom mm
B2 Width of groove, top mm
Machining  Roughing
 Finishing
 Roughing + Finishing
Machining Machining directions

direction  Planar
Turning  Longitudinal
(Stock removal
parting)
Machining  Longitudinal
direction  Parallel to contour
(Thread relief)

Turning Section 3
Notes :
Unit
Machining  Planar
direction Longitudinal
Parallel to contour
Contour- From inside outward
turning From outside inward
(Stock removal) From front to rear end
From rear end to front
BL Blank description (contour, cylinder, allowance)
D Maximum infeed depth (inc) mm
D1 First infeed depth mm

(Thread)
DA Start-changing depth (inc)
DI At 0 continuous cut
DIR Spindle rotation direction

(parting)  counter-clockwise (CCW)
 clockwise (CW)
DP Infeed taper as a flank (inc)

(Longitudinal
thread)
DP Distance of back-cut (inc) mm

(Groove) DP is not displayed when N = 1
DX Maximum infeed depth (only parallel to contour mm
alternatively to D)
DZ Maximum infeed depth (only for parallel to con- mm
tour and UX)
Limit Machining range limitation
 Yes
XA: 1st limit XA Ø
XB: 2nd limit XB Ø (abs)

or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA: 1st limit ZA

ZB: 2nd limit ZB (abs)
or 2nd limit referred to ZA
 No

Section 3 Turning
Notes :
Unit
F Feed mm/min
mm/rev
Form  Normal (Form A)

(Thread relief)  Short (Form B)
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev

(Parting)
FR Plunging feedrate for relief cuts

(Stock removal)
FS Chamfer (n = 1...3) alternative to R mm

(Stock removal)
FS Chamfer width mm
FS1 Chamfer width 1 mm
FX Feed in X-direction mm/rev
FZ Feed in Z-direction mm/rev
G Change of thread pitch per rev.
Thread  Internal thread

(Longitudinal  External thread
thread )
H1 Calculated from thread pitch mm

(Taper thread)
H1 Depth of thread obtained from thread table mm
(Longitudinal
thread )
Relief cuts Machining of relief cuts

(Stock removal)  Yes
 No
Location Location of stock removal

turning  right top
(Stock removal)  right bottom
 left top
 left bottom

Turning Section 3
Notes :
Unit
Location  front
contour-  back
turning  internal
(Stock removal,  external
parting)
LR Thread run-out (inc) mm
LW Thread lead (inc) mm
Multi-start  No
α0 Starting angle offset
 Yes
Nr. of thread starts are spread evenly
around the circumference of work piece
N Number of grooves (N = 1...65535)
(Groove)
N Nr of thread starts
(Thread)
NN Number of dummy passes

(Thread)
P Thread pitch (to be selected from DIN-table) or mm/rev

(Thread relief entered manually
DIN)
P Selection of the thread pitch/-starts

(Longitudinal  Thread pitch in mm/rev mm/rev
thread )  Thread pitch in inch/rev in/rev
 Threads per inch threads/"
 Thread pitch in modulus modulus
R1 Rounding radius 1 mm
R Radius (n = 1...3) alternative to FS mm
S Spindle speed rev/min
SR Reduced speed rev/min
SV Maximum rotary speed for constant cutting rev/min

speed

Section 3 Turning
Notes :
Unit
Table Selection of the thread table

 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
T Tool name
T1 Groove depth Ø (abs) or groove depth mm

(Groove) referred to X0 (inc)
U1 Contour allowance mm
U Finishing allowance mm
UX Finishing allowance in X mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z mm
V Constant cutting speed m/min
VR Retraction distance (inc) mm
VX Planar pass Ø (abs) or planar pass (inc) mm

(Relief cut)
X0 Reference point Ø (abs) mm

(Groove)
X1 Allowance in X Ø (abs) or allowance in X (inc) mm

(Relief cut)
X1 End point of the thread Ø (abs) or thread mm

(Stock removal length (inc)
Thread)
X1 End point X Ø (abs) or end point referred to X0 mm

(Taper thread) (inc)
X1α Thread taper Degrees

(Taper thread)
X1 Depth for speed reduction Ø (abs) or depth for mm

(Parting cut) speed reduction referred to X0 (inc)
X2 Final depth Ø (abs) or final depth referred to mm

(Parting cut) X1 (inc)

Turning Section 3
Notes :
Unit
XA 1st limit XA Ø (abs) (limiting)
XB 2nd limit XB Ø (abs) (limiting)

(Stock removal)
XD Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc) mm

(Parting)
XDA 1st parting-limit tool Ø (abs) mm

(Parting)
XDB 2nd parting-limit tool Ø (abs) mm

(Parting)
XF2 Relief cut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm

(Stock removal)
XM Intermediate point referred to X0 mm
Z0 Reference point Z (abs) mm

(Groove)
Z1 End point Z Ø (abs) referred to Z0 mm

(Stock removal)
Z1 Allowance in Z mm
(Relief cut)
Z1 End point of the thread mm

(Thread)
ZA 1st limit ZA (abs) (limiting)

(Stock removal)
ZB 2nd limit ZB (abs) (limiting)

(Stock removal)
ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension (inc) mm

(Parting)
ZM Intermediate point Z mm
Infeed  Linear:
Infeed with constant cutting depth
 Degressive:
Infeed with constant chip cross-section

Section 4 Drilling
Notes :
Unit
α Lifting angle (tool orientation angle) (only for Degrees

lifting the tool), spindle position for orientated
spindle stop in the cycle.
α0 Rotation angle for the straight line, referred to Degrees

the X-axis
α1 Advancing angle (only for circular pattern pitch Degrees

(Pitch circle) circle)
Lifting mode  No lifting Degrees
The cutting edge is not retracted, but re-

turns to the safety clearance with rapid
traverse.
 Lifting
The cutting edge is moved clear of the

edge of the hole and is then lifted to the
retraction level.
αS Starting angle offset (only for tapping without a Degrees

compensating chuck)
αX Shearing angle X (only for the location pat- Degrees

terns grid or frame)
αY Shearing angle Y (only for the location pat- Degrees

terns grid or frame)
Centre Centre drilling with reduced feedrate

drilling  Yes
 No
The reduced feedrate is executed as

follows:
Drilling feedrate F1 < 0,15mm/rev:

Centre drilling feedrate = 30% of F1
Path feedrate F1=> 0,15mm/rev:

Centre drilling feedrate = 0,1 mm/rev
Selection Selection of table value:

(tapping)  M1 - M68 (ISO metric)
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)

Drilling Section 4
Notes :
Unit
Selection Coordinate system
 Right-angled (Cartesian)
 Polar
Machining  Chip breaking

(Drilling)
 Chip clearing
Machining The following machining methods are avail-

(without comp. able:
chuck)
 One cut only:
(Tapping) The tapping takes place in one pass
without interruption.
 Chip breaking:
The drill is retracted by an amount V2 for
chip breaking.
 Chip clearing:
The drill is retracted from the work piece
for chip clearing.
Machining The following machining methods are avail-

(with comp. able:
chuck)
 With encoder:
(Tapping) Tapping with spindle encoder
 Without encoder:
Tapping without spindle encoder selec-
tion with specification of the "pitch" pa-
rameter
Machining  Single location:

location Drilling at the programmed location
 Location pattern:
Location with MCALL
Drilling depth Referred to

 Shaft:
Drilling until the drill-shaft has reached
the programmed value X1. The angle in
the tool list is taken into account.
 Point:
Drilling until the drill point has reached
the programmed value X1.

Section 4 Drilling
Notes :
Unit
C0 Polar coordinates of the 1st location, with

(Locations) the selection "polar"
longitudinal (abs) mm
angle (abs) Degrees
C1...C7 Polar coordinates of further locations, with

(Locations) the selection "polar"
angle (abs) Degrees
Ø Drilling continues until the diameter has been

reached (only with centring)
Ø Nominal diameter mm
(internal
thread
milling)
D maximum depth infeed mm

(only with chip clearing or chip breaking)
D Lift-off amount (inc) (only for lifting, SN) mm

(Boring)
DF  Percentage for all further infeeds %

or
 amount for every further infeed mm
DIR Direction of rotation
 counter-clockwise (CCW)
 clockwise (CW)
DT  Dwell at final drilling depth in seconds s
 Dwell at final drilling depth in revs rev
DTB  Dwell at drilling depth in seconds s
 Dwell at drilling depth in revs rev
DTS  Dwell at the start point for chip clearing s

in seconds (only for chip clearing)
 Dwell at the starting point for chip clearing rev

in revs (only for chip clearing)

Drilling Section 4
Notes :
Unit
Through Remaining drilling depth at path feedrate

drilling
 Yes
 No
DX Lift-off amount in X-direction (inc)

(only for lifting, standard)
DY Lift-off amount in Y-direction (inc)

DZ Lift-off amount in Z-direction (inc)

Chip clearing Chip clearing before thread milling

(Drill + thread
milling)  Yes
 No
Retract to work piece surface for chip

clearance before thread milling.
F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
F1 Path feedrate mm/min

mm/rev
FD1 Percentage feedrate for the first infeed %
FR Drilling feedrate for remaining depth mm/min

(Drill + thread mm/rev
milling)
FR Feedrate for retraction mm/min
FS Finishing feedrate mm/min

(only for down cut / up cut ) mm/tooth
Milling  Down-cut (climb milling)

direction  Up-cut (conventional milling)
(Drill + thread  Down cut / up cut (climb/conventional
milling) milling)
Thread Thread sense
 Right-hand-thread
 Left-hand-thread

Section 4 Drilling
Notes :
Unit
L0 Distance of the first location from the reference mm

point (only for location pattern straight line)
L0 Polar coordinates of the first location with selec-

(Locations) tion "polar"
angle (abs) Degrees
L Distance between the locations (only for location mm

pattern straight line)
L1 Distance between the columns (only for location mm

pattern grid or frame)
L1...L7 Polar coordinates of further locations, with

(Locations) selection "polar"
angle (abs) Degrees
L2 Distance between the lines (only for location mm

pattern grid or frame)
LAB Repeat of jump mark for location
Compensa-  with compensating chuck

ting chuck  without compensating chuck
mode
N Number of locations (only for location pattern

straight line)
N1 Number of columns (only for location pattern grid

or frame)
N2 Number of lines (only for location pattern grid or

frame)
P Thread pitch…
 in modulus: modulus = pitch/π modulus

 in mm/rev mm/rev
 in inch/rev in/rev
 in threads per inch Threads/"
Positioning Positioning motions between the locations

(Pitch circle)
 Straight
 Circle
PL Machining plane G17 (XY)

Drilling Section 4
Notes :
Unit
R Radius mm
RP Retraction plane (abs) mm
Retraction (only for machining with "Chip breaking")

retraction amount
 manually
 automatically
SC Safety distance (inc)
SDE Direction of rotation after end of cycle
S/V Spindle speed or rev/min

constant cutting speed m/min
SPOS Spindle stop position Degrees
SR Spindle speed for retraction rev/min
Pitch  User entry of the input

(only for ma-  active feed, pitch is derived from the feed
chining with- rate
out encoder)
T Tool name
Table Selection of the thread table:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
V1 Minimum infeed depth mm
V2 Retraction amount (only for retraction mm

(Tapping) "manually")
Amount, by which the tap is retracted for chip

breaking.
V2 = automatically: The tool retracts by one

revolution.
V2 Retraction amount after each machining opera- mm

(drilling) tion (only for machining "chip breaking")
V3 Pre-stopping distance mm
(only for pre-stopping distance "manually")

Section 4 Drilling
Notes :
Unit
Pre-stopping (only for machining "chip clearing")

distance
 manually
 automatically
VR Constant cutting speed for retraction m/min
XD Centre offset
X0 X-coordinate of the reference point X (abs) mm
X1...X7 X-coordinate of further reference points (abs or mm

(Locations) inc)
Y0 Y-coordinate of the Reference point Y (abs) mm
Y1...Y7 Y-coordinate of further reference points mm

(Locations) (abs or inc)
Z0 Reference point Z mm
Z1 Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth mm

(Drilling) referred to Z0 (inc)
Z1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread length mm

(Thread) (inc)
Z1 Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth mm

(Drilling) referred to Z0 (inc)

(Thread) (inc)
Z2 Retraction amount before thread milling mm
ZR Remaining depth for through drilling mm

("Yes" only for through-holes)

Drilling Section 4
Notes :

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
α0 Rotation angle Degrees
α0 Start angle Degrees

(circular slot)
α1 Opening angle of the slot Degrees

(circular slot)
α1 Text direction Degrees

(Engraving) (only for linear alignment)
α1 Starting direction relative to X-axis Degrees

(contour)
α1 Opening angle of the slot Degrees

(circular slot)
α2 Advancing angle Degrees

(circular slot) (only for pitch circle)
α2 angle to previous element Degrees

(contour)
αS Starting angle Degrees

(Thread-
Milling)
Retract mode Retract mode in plane

(Path milling)
 Quarter circle:
Part of a spiral (only for path milling to
the left and the right of contour)
 Semi circle:
Part of a spiral (only for path milling to
the left and the right of the contour)
 Straight:
Oblique in space
Retract  Axis-by-axis
strategy  spatial
(Path milling)

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Lift mode Lifting mode before a renewed infeed mm

(Centring)
If for the machining several plunging points
are required, the retraction height can be
programmed:
 to RP (retraction plane)
 Z0 + safety distance
Lift mode If several depth infeeds are required, the re- mm

(Path milling) traction height to which the tool is retracted
to between the individual infeeds, can be
specified here. (at the transition at the end of
the contour to the beginning).
Lifting mode before a renewed infeed
 No retraction
 to RP (retraction plane)
 by safety distance
Lift mode Lifting mode before renewed infeed mm

(Pre-drilling
centring) If for the machining several plunging points
(Pocket are required, the retraction height can be
milling) programmed as following:
 to RP
 X0 + safety distance

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
Approach Approach mode in plane

(Path milling)
 Quarter circle:
Part of a spiral (only for path milling left
and right of the contour)
 Semi circle:
Part of a spiral (only for path milling left
and right of the contour)
 Straight:
Oblique in space
 Vertical:
Perpendicular to the path (only for path
milling on the centre line path)
Approach  Axis-by-axis (only for approach "quarter mm

strategy circle or semi circle")
(Path milling)
 Spatial (only for approach "quarter circle,
semi circle or straight")
Removing  Complete machining:

(Rectangular The rectangular pocket is milled out of
pocket, only for the solid material.
roughing)
 Re-machining:
An already existing small rectangular
pocket or a bore is enlarged in one or
more axes. In this case the parameters
AZ, W1, and L1 must be programmed.
Alignment  Linear alignment

(Engraving)
 Curved alignment, arch at the top
 Curved alignment, arch at the bottom

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Selection Selection of table values:

(Thread-
milling)
 M3, M10, etc. (ISO metric)
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
AZ Depth of roughing mm
(only for re-machining)
β1 End-angle to X-axis Degrees
β2 Opening angle of the circle Degrees
(Planar-/
thread-milling)  Finishing
(Rectangular/
round spigot)  Finishing
(path milling)  Chamfering
(Rectangular/
circ. pocket)  Finishing
(Longitudinal/  Finishing edge
circ. slot)
 Chamfering
(multi edge
spigot)
(Rectangular/
circ. spigot)

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
Machining Selection of the machining plane

plane
 G17 (X/Y)
 G18 (Z/X)
 G19 (Y/Z)
Machining  Centric:
type Clearing a circular pocket plane-by-plane
(Circular
pocket)  Helical:
Clearing a circular pocket helically
Machining  Front Y:
face Machining on a front face with Y-axis
(Planar milling)
 Mantle Y:
Machining on a cylindrical surface with
Y-axis
Machining  Front C:
face Machining on a front face with C-axis
(Rectangular/
circ. spigot)  Front Y:
Thread milling)
Machining on a front face with Y-axis
 Mantle Y:
Y-axis
Machining  Front C:
face Machining on a front face with C-axis
(Rectangular
pocket)  Front Y:
(Longitudinal/
Machining on a front face with Y-axis
circular slot)
(Open slot)
(Circ. spigot)  Mantle C
(Engraving) Machining on a cylindrical surface with
(Path milling) C-axis
 Mantle Y
Y-axis
Machining  Z0 → Z1
direction Machining from top to bottom
(Thread mill-
ing)  Z1 → Z0
Machining from bottom to top

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Machining Machining in the programmed contour direction

direction
(Path milling)  Forward:
The machining takes place in the pro-
grammed contour direction
 Backward:
The machining takes place against the
programmed contour direction

location Milling a rectangular pocket at the pro-
(Rectangular grammed location (X0, Y0, Z0) .
pocket)
(Longitudinal  Location pattern:
slot) Location MCALL

location Milling a circular pocket at the programmed
(circular location (X0, Y0, Z0).
pocket)
Several circular pockets are milled on a
location pattern (e.g. full circle, pitch circle,
grid etc.).

location Milling a rectangular/circular spigot at a
(Rectangular/ programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).
circular
spigot)  Location pattern:
Location with MCALL.

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit

location A multi-edge spigot is milled at the
(multi-edge programmed location (X0, Y0, Z0).
spigot)
Several multi-edge spigots are milled on
the programmed location pattern (e.g.
pitch circle, grid, straight line).

location Milling a slot at the programmed location
(Open slot) (X0, Y0, Z0).
Milling of several slots on a programmed
location pattern (e.g. full circle or grid).
Reference Location of the reference point:

point
(Open slot)  Left edge
 Centre
 Right edge

point
(Engraving)  Bottom left
 Bottom centre
 Bottom right
 Top left
 Top centre
 Top right
 Centre left
 Centre
 Centre right

point
(Slot)  Left edge
 Inside left
 Centre
 Inside right
 Right edge

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Reference The following various locations of the

point reference point can be selected:
(Rectangular
pocket)  Centre
 Bottom left
 Bottom right
 Top left
 Top right
CP Positioning angle for machining range Degrees

(only for front Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining face Degrees

(only for mantle Y)
Ø Diameter of the pocket mm

(Circular
pocket)
Ø Diameter of the spigot mm

(Circular
spigot)
Ø Nominal diameter, mm
(Thread- Example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12 mm
milling)
Ø1 Diameter of the blank spigot mm

(Circular-
spigot,
multi-edge
spigot)
Ø1 Diameter of pre-machining mm
(Circular (only for re-machining)
pocket)
D Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9)
Direction of Direction of the thread rotation:

rotation
(Thread-  Right hand thread
milling) A right-hand thread is milled
 Left hand thread

A left-hand thread is milled
Rotation  Rotation clockwise

(Milling)  Rotation counter-clockwise

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
DX1 Character spacing or total width mm

for front face machining
DX Maximum depth infeed mm
DXY Maximum plane infeed mm
Alternatively the plane infeed can also be %

stated as a percentage ratio of plane infeed
(mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm)
DY1 Character spacing or total width mm

for mantle machining
DYZ Maximum plane infeed mm
Alternatively the plane infeed can also be de- %

fined as a percentage ratio of the plane infeed
(mm) to the milling cutter diameter (mm)
DZ Maximum depth infeed mm

(only for roughing)
Plunging  Vertical:
(Rectangular Vertical plunging to the pocket centre
pocket)
(Longitudinal  Helical:
slot) Plunging along a spiral path
(Pocket
milling)  Oscillating:
Plunging with an oscillating motion along
the central axis of the rectangular pocket.
Plunging  Vertical:
(Circular Vertical plunging at the centre of pocket.
pocket)
 Helical:
Plunging along a spiral path
EP Maximum pitch of the helix mm/rev

(Rectangular/ (only for helical plunging)
circular pocket)

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
ER Radius of the helix mm

(Rectangular/ (only for helical plunging)
circular
pocket)
EW Maximum plunge angle Degrees

(Rectangular (only for oscillatory plunging)
pocket)
(Longitudinal
slot)
F Feed mm/min
mm/rev
FR Retraction feed for intermediate positioning

(Path milling)
Milling Milling direction (other than plunge milling)

direction
(Open slot)  Climb milling
 Conventional milling
FS Chamfer width for chamfering mm

(Rectangular/ (only for chamfering)
circular
pocket)
(Rectangular/
circular
spigot)
(Path milling)
FX Infeed feed depth mm/min

(Rectangular/ (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) mm/tooth
circular for mantle C/Y
pocket)
(Longitudinal
slot)
FZ Infeed feed depth mm/min
(Rectangular/ (only for vertical and pre-drilled plunging) mm/tooth
circular for front C/Y machining
pocket)
(Longitudinal
slot)
Engraving Maximum 100 characters
text
(Engraving)
H1 Thread depth mm
(Thread-
milling)

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
I Circle centre point in X-direction (abs or inc) mm
J Circle centre point in Y-direction (abs or inc) mm
Circular  Full circle:

pattern The circular slots are positioned on a full
(Circular slot) circle. The distance of one circular slot to
the next circular slot is always the same
and is determined by the control unit.
 Pitch circle:
The circular slots are positioned on a pitch
circle. The distance of one circular slot to
the next circular slot can be determined by
means of angle α2.
L1 Pre-machined pocket length mm

(Rectangular (only for further machining)
pocket)
L1 Blank material length of spigot mm

spigot)
L1 Approach length mm
(Path milling) (only for approach "Straight")
L2 Exit length mm
(Path milling) (only for exiting "Straight")
L2 (abs) Distance between pole and circle centre mm

(Circle) point
mm
(inc) Distance between the last point and circle
centre point
L Length of pocket, spigot, slot, straight mm
Position of Position of the thread:

the thread
(Thread-  Internal thread:
milling) An internal thread is milled
 External thread:
An external thread is milled

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
N Number of edges
(multi-edge
spigot)
N Number of slots
(Circular slot)
NT Number of teeth per cutter

(Thread
milling)
P Thread pitch…
(Thread  in modulus: modulus = pitch/π modulus

milling)
 in mm/rev mm/rev
 in inch/rev in/rev
 in threads per inch Threads/"
The thread pitch depends on the tool

used
PL Machining plane
 G17 (XY)
 G18 (ZX)
 G19 (YZ)
Positioning Positioning between the slots:

(Circular slot)
 Straight:
The next location is approached along a
straight line at rapid traverse.
 Circle:
The next location is approached along a
circular path at the programmed feedrate
R1 Rounding radius mm
(multi-edge
spigot)
R2 Exit radius mm
(Path milling) (only when exiting contour with "quarter circle
or semi circle")

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
R Corner radius mm
(Rectangular
pocket/spigot)
R Radius of the circular slot mm

(circular slot)
R Radius of the circle mm

(Milling)
RP Retraction plane mm
(Centring)
Radius cor-  Left

rection (machining to the left of the contour)
(Path milling)  Right

(machining to the right of the contour)
 OFF
(machining tool centre path)
Direction  Same machining direction

 to the right
 to the top
 Changing machining direction

 meandering left/right
 meandering up/down
S Spindle speed rev/min
Stop-Position Input of the spindle position in degrees
Starting point  Manually preset starting point

(Pocket  Automatic starting point calculation
milling)
SW Spanner size A/F

(multi-edge
spigot)
T Input of the tool

(Name or number)

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Table Selection the thread table:

(Thread-
milling)  without
 ISO Metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
Techno-logy  Whirling:
(Open slot) Circular motion of the cutter through the
slot and back again
 Plunge milling:
Sequential boring motions along the tool
axis.
TR Reference tool for rest material machining

(Pocket Rest-
material)
U Finishing allowance in Y and X mm

(Thread-
Milling)
UX Finishing allowance depth mm

(Longitudinal
slot)
UXY Finishing allowance plane mm
UYZ Finishing allowance plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance depth mm
V Feed constant cutting speed m/min

Section 5 Milling
Notes :
Unit
W Width of the pocket mm

(Rectangular
pocket)
W Width of the spigot mm

(Rectangular
spigot)
W Width of the slot mm

(Longitudinal/
circular slot)
W Character height mm
(Engraving)
W1 Width of the pre-machining mm

pocket)
W1 Width of the raw material spigot (Important for mm

(Rectangular the determination of the approach location)
spigot)
X0 Reference point X mm
(Rectangular (only for single location)
/circular
pocket)
(Rectangular
spigot)
X0 Reference point 1 X mm
(Planar
milling)
X1 Reference point 2 X (abs) or reference point mm
(Planar 2X referred to X0 )inc)
milling)
X1 Spigot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or mm
(Rectangular/ X0 (inc)
circular
spigot)
X1 Slot depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 mm
(Longitudinal (inc)
slot)
XFS Plunging depth of tool tip (abs or inc) mm
(only for chamfering)
Machining mantle C/Y
XM Centre point X (abs) or centre point polar mm or

(Engraving) length (only for curved alignment) Degrees
XS Starting point X
(Pocket (only if starting point is preset manually)
milling)

Milling Section 5
Notes :
Unit
Y0 Reference point Y mm
(Rectangular/ (only for a single location) or
circular Degrees
pocket)
(Rectangular
spigot)
Y0 Reference point 1 in Y mm
(Planar
milling)
Y1 Reference point 2 in Y referred to Y0 mm

(Planar
milling)
YM Centre point Y (abs) or C (abs) mm

(Engraving) (only for curved alignment) or
(only for machining mantle C/Y) Degrees
YS Starting point Y
(Pocket (only if starting point is preset manually)
Milling)
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(Rectangular/ (only for single location)
circular
pocket)
(Rectangular
spigot)
Z0 Height of blank material mm
(Planar
milling)
Z1 Height of the finished item referred to Z0 mm

(Planar
milling)
Z1 Final depth (abs) or final depth referred to Z0 mm

or X0 (inc)
Z1 Engraving depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 mm

(Engraving) or X0 (inc)

(Thread- (inc)
milling)
ZFS Plunging depth tool point (abs or inc) mm

(only for chamfering)
(only for machining front C/Y)
ZM Centre point Z (abs) mm

(Engraving) (only for curved alignment)
(only for machining mantle C/Y)

B701 Drawings of programming examples
1 Brief description
This module provides the means to carry out further exercises regarding the programming with Shop-
Turn and to consolidate the programming knowledge so far attained.
This module contains all the drawings that were used in the individual modules so far and additional
work piece drawings as exercises for the consolidation of the acquired knowledge.
Content:
 Shop drawings
- Bolt_1
- Bolt_2
- Spigot_1
- Shaft_1
- Stepped shaft
- Contour spigot
- Kidney
- Core
- Bowling pin
- Pin
- Joint shaft
- Fitting shaft
- Example counter spindle
- Hub
B701
B701

B701
Drawings of programming examples: Descrip-
Drawings of
tion programming
examples:
This module contains all the drawings that were START
used in the individual modules so far and addi- Bowling Pin
tional work piece drawings as exercises for the
consolidation of the acquired knowledge.
Bolt_1
Pin
Bolt_2
Joint Shaft
Spigot_1
Fixed Shaft
Shaft_1
Example
Counter
Spindle
Stepped Shaft
Hub
Contour
Spigot
Drawings of
programming
examples:
END
Kidney
Core
Notes :

Section 2 Shop drawings
Notes :
2.1 Bolt_1

Shop drawings Section 2
Notes :
2.2 Bolt_2
100
60
20
Ø100
Ø10
Ø60

Notes :
2.3 Spigot_1
60
45
3x45° 25
3x45°
R5
Detail X
R5
5
M42x2
8
Ø100
Ø60
All not-dimensioned Radii: 1 mm
DIN76
10°
X

Notes :
2.4 Shaft_1
100
60
3x45°
5
R
45°
Ø60
Ø100
Ø85
Ø90
M10
15
18

Notes :
2.5 Stepped shaft
100
70
60
45
35
30
17
DIN76
Ø50
M30x2
Ø90
Ø40
Ø60
Ø70
70
°
R2
R2
R2
2x45° 0,5x45° 2x45°

X

Notes :
2.6 Contour spigot
100
80
75
Ø32
35
X
23
2x45°
3
R2
R4
Ø90
Ø60
Ø34
Ø48
t=3
R4 10
R4
R4
Ø5
R6
60
15°
X
4
All not-dimensioned Radii:

4,2 R=1
Y X
X Z

Notes :
2.7 Kidney
Ø120
Startpoint
20
0
R1
R5
0
19
R2
6
11
7 0
R1
t=5

Notes :
2.8 Core
t=3
4
R10
R1
R46
0
R5
120
R6
40 5
R10
80 10
120
Y Ø150 X
X Z

Notes :
2.9 Bowling pin
26,95
R1
R35
R68
141,618
81,5
217
R78
41,5
5°

Notes :
210 Pin
3x45°
4x45°
2x45°
Ø12
Ø60
Ø40
Ø35
40
50
X 60
Z 70
90

Notes :
2.11 Joint shaft
46
Ø20,5
Ø16
Ø19
R3
SW19
M22
12
8
18
24 21
20 48
98

Notes :
2.12 Fitting shaft
2x45°
2x45° 1x45°
1x45°
30° 2x45° 1x45°
2x45°
40°
40°
0
0
R1
R1
Ø70
Ø47
Ø40
Ø20
Ø27
Ø37
Ø24
Ø30
Ø15
Ø8
10 9 15 5 8 9 9 6 2 17 10
X

Notes :
2.13 Example counter spindle
195
160
130
100
67,5
60
40
Ø100
Ø80
Ø60
Ø90
Ø75
X

Notes :
2.14 Hub
Ø20
Ø40
Ø60
Ø20
2x45°
30 10 20
X 110


EN - 840D SL - Complete Sinumerik Operate Turning - v26

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EN - 840D SL - Complete Sinumerik Operate Turning - v26

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating and Programming

This document was produced for training purposes.

Operating and Programming

Sinumerik 828D Software 4.3

B516 B517 B518 B519 B520

Objective of the module:

Description of the module:

Programming of the technology data

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

B501 Page 2 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 3 B501

A block starts with a block number followed by the commands.

Each command consists of command words, which in turn consist of an

Departure information Switching information

Geometrical data Technological data

The block number is a program-technical assignment, which is not evalu-

In order to improve the oversight within a program, comments can be op-

B501 Page 4 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Programming example: Explanation:

Programming example 1: Explanation:

Programming example 2: Explanation:

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 5 B501

Programming example: Explanation:

(Note: Further functions can be found in the annexure of this manual)

Effect of the switching commands M3 and M4

Example Milling Example Turning

B501 Page 6 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Continuous path behaviour:

Exact stop Code G09 block-by-block Code G60 * modal

Continuous control operation Code G64

G60 Exact stop

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 7 B501

Change-over when the positioning window “fine” is reached

Change-over when the positioning window “coarse” is reached

This code can be used to obtain a defined rounding of the programmed

Destination point of the pro-

Actual tool paths depending on the

A dimensional definition of the positioning windows “coarse” and “fine” is

B501 Page 8 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Change-over when the setpoint position is reached: Code G603

The block change-over is initiated as soon as the control has calculated

This permits the contour corners to be formed in dependence on the path

Destination point of the pro-

Actual tool path with smaller feed

Actual tool path with greater feed

The codes G601, G602 and G603 are modal.

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate Page 9 B501

G70 Input system in inches

G94 Linear feed in mm/min *

G96 Constant cutting speed in m/min **

* Switching-ON status for milling machines

M03 Work spindle ON, clockwise

M06 Tool change

M17 End of subprogram

Furthermore there are instructions that are operative only block-by-block,

B501 Page 10 828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate

Objective of the module:

Description of the module:

Right hand rule

Explanation of the axis assignments

Points and distances in the work space

828D/840Dsl SINUMERIK Operate